IFC V5 Technology PDF

LEGACY WEST JPMORGAN CHASE - PHASE 2
PLANO, TEXAS
2019-06-28
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LEGEND
First Column: Current Date for Section

Second Column: Checked Indicates Section is Included in Current Issue
Third Column: Section Number
Fourth Column: Section Title
Fifth Column: Section Author
NOTES FOR REVISIONS IN TECHNICAL SECTIONS

1. Deleted information is indicated by STRIKETHROUGH; for example, THIS IS DELETED.
2. Added information is indicated by DOUBLE UNDERLINE; for example, THIS IS ADDED.
ISSUES
2019-06-28 Issue For Construction
HKS 22514.000
TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1
2019-06-28
PLANO, TEXAS
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
2019-06-28 00 3100 Available Project Information HKS

2019-06-28 00 5200 Agreement Form HKS
2019-06-28 00 7200 General Conditions HKS
2019-06-28 00 7300 Supplementary Conditions HKS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2019-06-28 01 0500 Design Selections HKS

2019-06-28 01 2100 Allowances HKS
2019-06-28 01 2200 Unit Prices HKS
2019-06-28 01 2300 Alternates HKS
2019-06-28 01 2500 Substitution Procedures HKS
2019-06-28 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures HKS
2019-06-28 01 2900 Payment Procedures HKS
2019-06-28 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination HKS
2019-06-28 01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation HKS
2019-06-28 01 3300 Submittal Procedures HKS
2019-06-28 01 4000 Quality Requirements HKS
2019-06-28 01 4200 References HKS
2019-06-28 01 4323 Special Inspections HKS
2019-06-28 01 4339 Visual Mock-Up Requirements HKS
2019-06-28 01 4516 Field Test for Water Leakage HKS
2019-06-28 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls HKS
2019-06-28 01 6000 Product Requirements HKS
2019-06-28 01 7300 Execution HKS
2019-06-28 01 7419.11 LEED V4 Construction Waste Management and HKS/dG
Disposal
2019-06-28 01 7700 Closeout Procedures HKS
2019-06-28 01 7823 Operations and Maintenance Data HKS
2019-06-28 01 7839 Project Record Documents HKS
2019-06-28 01 7900 Demonstration and Training HKS
2019-06-28 01 8112.11 Health and Environmental Performance HKS/dG
Requirements
2019-06-26 LEED V4 for New Construction and Major HKS/dG
Renovations – Project Scorecard
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
2019-06-28 02 4119 Selective Demolition HKS
HKS 22514.000
2019-06-28
PLANO, TEXAS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
2019-06-28 03 1113 Structural Concrete Forming LAFP

2019-06-28 03 1115 Expanded Polystyrene Foam Block Formwork LAFP
2019-06-28 03 1500 Cast-in-Anchors and Embeds LAFP
2019-06-28 03 2000 Concrete Reinforcing LAFP
2019-06-28 03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete LAFP
2019-06-28 03 3100 Structural Concrete LAFP
2019-06-28 03 3500 Concrete Finishing HKS
2019-06-28 03 3543 Polished Concrete HKS
2019-06-28 03 3800 Post-Tensioned Concrete LAFP
2019-06-28 03 4100 Structural Precast Concrete LAFP
2019-06-28 03 4500 Architectural Precast Concrete HKS
2019-06-28 03 5216 Lightweight Insulating Concrete HKS
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
2019-06-28 04 0513 Masonry Mortaring KH

2019-06-28 04 0516 Masonry Grouting KH
2019-06-28 04 2000 Unit Masonry KH
2019-06-28 04 2200 Concrete Unit Masonry HKS
2019-06-28 04 4100 Dry Placed Stone KH
DIVISION 05 – METALS
2019-06-28 05 1200 Structural Steel LAFP

2019-06-28 05 1213 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing HKS
2019-06-28 05 1636 Barrier Cable HKS
2019-06-28 05 3114 Steel Composite Floor Decking LAFP
2019-06-28 05 3123 Steel Roof Decking LAFP
2019-06-28 05 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing HKS
2019-06-28 05 5000 Metal Fabrications HKS
2019-06-28 05 5100 Metal Stairs HKS
2019-06-28 05 5200 Metal Railings KH
2019-06-28 05 5213 Pipe and Tube Railings HKS
2019-06-28 05 7300 Ornamental Handrails and Railings HKS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
2019-06-28 06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry HKS

2019-06-28 06 1643 Exterior Gypsum Sheathing HKS
2019-06-28 06 2026 Sculptural Wall Panels HKS
2019-06-28 06 4023 Interior Architectural Woodwork HKS
2019-06-28 06 6400 Plastic (FRP) Paneling HKS
2019-06-28 06 6413 Translucent Resin Panel Fabrications HKS
2019-06-28 06 6813 Plastic Gratings HKS
HKS 22514.000
2019-06-28
PLANO, TEXAS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
2019-06-28 07 1326 Sheet Waterproofing HKS

2019-06-28 07 1413 Hot Fluid-Applied Rubberized Asphalt HKS
Waterproofing
2019-06-28 07 1800 Traffic Coatings HKS
2019-06-28 07 1813 Epoxy Traffic Coatings HKS
2019-06-28 07 2100 Thermal Insulation HKS
2019-06-28 07 2423 DEFS for Soffits HKS
2019-06-28 07 2617 Below Slab Vapor Retarders HKS
2019-06-28 07 2713 Self-Adhering Air and Water Barriers HKS
2019-06-28 07 4213 Formed Metal Wall Panels - Interior Locations HKS
2019-06-28 07 4243 Composite Metal Wall Panels HKS
2019-06-28 07 5013 Single-Ply Membrane Roofing HKS
2019-06-28 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim HKS
2019-06-28 07 7200 Roof Accessories HKS
2019-06-28 07 7600 Roof Pavers and Pedestal Assemblies HKS
2019-06-28 07 8116 Sprayed Fire Resistive Materials HKS
2019-06-28 07 8123 Intumescent Mastic Firestopping HKS
2019-06-28 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping HKS
2019-06-28 07 8446 Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping HKS
2019-06-28 07 9200 Joint Sealants HKS
2019-06-28 07 9213 Elastomeric Joint Sealants KH
2019-06-28 07 9500 Expansion Control HKS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
2019-06-28 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames HKS

2019-06-28 08 1216 Interior Aluminum Frames HKS
2019-06-28 08 1416 Prefinished Flush Wood Doors HKS
2019-06-28 08 3113 Access Doors and Frames HKS
2019-06-28 08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors HKS
2019-06-28 08 3515 Accordion Folding Fire Doors HKS
2019-06-28 08 4213 Exterior Aluminum Entrances Doors HKS
2019-06-28 08 4233 Revolving Door Entrances HKS
2019-06-28 08 4400 Glazed Aluminum Framing Systems HKS
2019-06-28 08 4420 Aluminum Framed Folding Panel System HKS
2019-06-28 08 7100 Door Hardware HKS
2019-06-28 08 8000 Glazing HKS
2019-06-28 08 8016 Electrochromic Glazing System – HKS
Insulating Glass Units (IGUs) | Instrumentation and
Controls
2019-06-28 08 8123 Decorative Glass Panel Wall System HKS
2019-06-28 08 8300 Unframed Mirrored Glazing HKS
2019-06-28 08 9100 Wall Louvers HKS
HKS 22514.000
2019-06-28
PLANO, TEXAS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
2019-06-28 09 2900 Gypsum Board Assemblies HKS

2019-06-28 09 3000 Tiling HKS
2019-06-28 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings HKS
2019-06-28 09 5116 Wood Panel Ceilings HKS
2019-06-28 09 5423 Linear Metal Ceilings HKS
2019-06-28 09 6500 Resilient Flooring HKS
2019-06-28 09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories HKS
2019-06-28 09 6723 Resinous Flooring HKS
2019-06-28 09 6800 Carpeting HKS
2019-06-28 09 6900 Access Flooring HKS
2019-06-28 09 7200 Wall Coverings HKS
2019-06-28 09 7500 Interior Stone Facing HKS
2019-06-28 09 9100 Painting HKS
2019-06-28 09 9600 High Performance Coatings HKS
2019-06-28 09 9600 High Performance Coatings (Site) KH
2019-06-28 09 9663 Textured Acrylic Coatings HKS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
2019-06-28 10 1100 Visual Display Boards HKS

2019-06-28 10 1443 Photoluminescent Exit Path Marking System HKS
2019-06-28 10 2113 Toilet Compartments HKS
2019-06-28 10 2115 Cubicle Specialties HKS
2019-06-28 10 2238 Operable Panel Partitions HKS
2019-06-28 10 2239 Vertically Folding Panel Partitions HKS
2019-06-28 10 2613 Wall and Corner Guards HKS
2019-06-28 10 2813 Toilet Accessories HKS
2019-06-28 10 4116 Emergency Key Cabinets HKS
2019-06-28 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties HKS
2019-06-28 10 5113 Metal Lockers HKS
2019-06-28 10 7313 Awnings HKS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
2019-06-28 11 1200 Parking Control Equipment HKS

2019-06-28 11 1300 Loading Dock Equipment HKS
2019-06-28 11 1413 Pedestrian Control Equipment HKS
2019-06-28 11 2400 Building Maintenance Equipment HKS
2019-06-28 11 3100 Residential Appliances HKS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
2019-06-28 12 2413 Roller Window Shades HKS

2019-06-28 12 3661 Simulated Stone Countertops HKS
2019-06-28 12 4816 Entrance Floor Grilles HKS
2019-06-28 12 9300 Site Furnishings KH
HKS 22514.000
2019-06-28
PLANO, TEXAS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
2019-06-28 13 3423 Fabricated Control Booths HKS
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
2019-06-28 14 2100 Electric Traction Elevators PH

2019-06-28 14 2150 Gearless Machine-Room-Less Traction Elevators PH
DIVISION 20 – GENERAL MEP/FP REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

2019-06-28 21 0500 Common Work Results For Fire-suppression SHG
2019-06-28 21 0513 Common Motor Requirements For Fire-suppression SHG
Equipment
2019-06-28 21 0518 Escutcheons For Fire-suppression Piping SHG
2019-06-28 21 0533 Heat Tracing For Fire-suppression Piping SHG
2019-06-28 21 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls For Fire-suppression SHG
Piping And Equipment
2019-06-28 21 0553 Identification For Fire-suppression Systems SHG
2019-06-28 21 1313 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems SHG
2019-06-28 21 1316 Dry and Preaction Type Sprinkler Systems SHG
2019-06-28 21 1319 Dry and Preaction Fire Sprinkler Systems Corrosion SHG
Management
2019-06-28 21 1320 Firefighter Air Replenishment System (FARS) SHG
2019-06-28 21 3113 Electric Drive Centrifugal Fire Pumps SHG
2019-06-28 21 3910 Combined Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems SHG
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
2019-06-28 22 0500 Common Work Results For Plumbing SHG
2019-06-28 22 0513 Common Motor Requirements For Plumbing SHG
Equipment
2019-06-28 22 0516 Expansion Fittings And Loops For Plumbing Piping SHG
2019-06-28 22 0517 Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Plumbing Piping SHG
2019-06-28 22 0518 Escutcheons For Plumbing Piping SHG
2019-06-28 22 0519 Meters And Gages For Plumbing Piping SHG
2019-06-28 22 0523 General-duty Valves For Plumbing Piping SHG
2019-06-28 22 0529 Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And SHG
Equipment
2019-06-28 22 0533 Heat Tracing For Plumbing Piping SHG
HKS 22514.000
2019-06-28
PLANO, TEXAS
2019-06-28 22 0548 Vibration Controls For Plumbing Piping And SHG

Equipment
2019-06-28 22 0553 Identification For Plumbing Piping And Equipment SHG
2019-06-28 22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation SHG
2019-06-28 22 1116 Domestic Water Piping SHG
2019-06-28 22 1117 Stainless Steel Domestic Water Piping SHG
2019-06-28 22 1119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties SHG
2019-06-28 22 1316 Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping SHG
2019-06-28 22 1319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties SHG
2019-06-28 22 1423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties SHG
2019-06-28 22 1429 Sump Pumps SHG
2019-06-28 22 3300 Electric Domestic Water Heater SHG
2019-06-28 22 3400 Gas Fired Domestic Water Heater SHG
2019-06-28 22 4000 Plumbing Fixtures SHG
2019-06-28 22 7000 Natural Fuel Gas Systems Plumbing SHG
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING

2019-06-28 23 0500 Common Work Results For HVAC SHG
2019-06-28 23 0513 Common Motor Requirements For HVAC SHG
Equipment
2019-06-28 23 0516 Expansion Fittings And Loops For HVAC Piping SHG
2019-06-28 23 0519 Meters And Gages For HVAC Piping SHG
2019-06-28 23 0523.11 Globes Valves For HVAC Piping SHG
2019-06-28 23 0523.12 Ball Valves For HVAC Piping SHG
2019-06-28 23 0523.13 Butterfly Valves For HVAC Piping SHG
2019-06-28 23 0523.14 Check Valves For HVAC Piping SHG
2019-06-28 23 0523.15 Gate Valves For HVAC Piping SHG
2019-06-28 23 0523.16 Plug Valves For HVAC Piping SHG
2019-06-28 23 0529 Hangers And Supports For HVAC Piping And SHG
Equipment
2019-06-28 23 0533 Heat Tracing For HVAC Piping SHG
2019-06-28 23 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls For HVAC Piping SHG
And Equipment
2019-06-28 23 0553 Identification For HVAC Piping And Equipment SHG
2019-06-28 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC SHG
2019-06-28 23 0713 Duct Insulation SHG
2019-06-28 23 0719 HVAC Piping Insulation SHG
2019-06-28 23 0800 Commissioning of HVAC SHG
2019-06-28 23 0900 Instrumentation And Control For HVAC SHG
2019-06-28 23 0920 Refrigerant Detection and Alarm SHG
2019-06-28 23 2113 Hydronic Piping SHG
2019-06-28 23 2116 Hydronic Piping Specialties SHG
2019-06-28 23 2123 Hydronic Pumps SHG
2019-06-28 23 2500 HVAC Water Treatment SHG
2019-06-28 23 3113 Metal Ducts SHG
2019-06-28 23 3300 Air Duct Accessories SHG
HKS 22514.000
2019-06-28
PLANO, TEXAS
2019-06-28 23 3416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans SHG

2019-06-28 23 3423 HVAC Power Ventilators SHG
2019-06-28 23 3600 Air Terminal Units SHG
2019-06-28 23 3713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles SHG
2019-06-28 23 3723 HVAC Gravity Ventilators SHG
2019-06-28 23 5700 Heat Exchangers for HVAC SHG
2019-06-28 23 6416 Centrifugal Water Chillers SHG
2019-06-28 23 6416-I Prepurchased Centrifugal Water Chillers Installation SHG
2019-06-28 23 6423 Scroll Water Chillers SHG
2019-06-28 23 6426 Rotary Screw Water Chillers SHG
2019-06-28 23 6426-I Prepurchased Rotary Screw Water Chillers SHG
(Installation)
2019-06-28 23 6500 Cooling Towers SHG
2019-06-28 23 6500-I Prepurchased Cooling Towers Installation SHG
2019-06-28 23 7313 Modular Indoor Central Station Air Handling Units SHG
2019-06-28 23 7313-I Prepurchased Modular Indoor Central Station Air SHG
Handling Units Installation
2019-06-28 23 8123 Computer Room Air Conditioners SHG
2019-06-28 23 8126 Split System Air Cooled Air Conditioners SHG
2019-06-28 23 8219 Fan Coil Units SHG
2019-06-28 23 8239 Unit Heaters SHG
DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
2019-06-28 26 0500.1 Common Work Results For Electrical SHG
2019-06-28 26 0519 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables SHG
2019-06-28 26 0526 Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems SHG
2019-06-28 26 0529 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems SHG
2019-06-28 26 0533 Raceway and Boxes For Electrical Systems SHG
2019-06-28 26 0536 Cable Trays For Electrical Systems SHG
2019-06-28 26 0543 Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical SHG
Systems
2019-06-28 26 0544 Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Electrical Raceways SHG
and Cabling
2019-06-28 26 0553 Identification For Electrical Systems SHG
2019-06-28 26 0572 Overcurrent Protective Device Short Circuit Study SHG
2019-06-28 26 0573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study SHG
2019-06-28 26 0574 Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study SHG
2019-06-28 26 0923 Lighting Control Devices SHG
2019-06-28 26 0943 Network Lighting Controls SHG
2019-06-28 26 1200 Medium-voltage Transformers SHG
2019-06-28 26 2200 Low-voltage Transformers SHG
2019-06-28 26 2300 Low-voltage Switchgear SHG
HKS 22514.000
2019-06-28
PLANO, TEXAS
2019-06-28 26 2313 Paralleling Medium-Voltage Switchgear SHG

2019-06-28 26 2313.1 Paralleling Medium-Voltage Switchgear (Installation) SHG
2019-06-28 26 2416 Panelboards SHG
2019-06-28 26 2500 Enclosed Bus Assemblies SHG
2019-06-28 26 2653 Electric Vehicle Charging Equipment – Level 2 SHG
2019-06-28 26 2713 Electricity Metering SHG
2019-06-28 26 2726 Wiring Devices SHG
2019-06-28 26 2813 Fuses SHG
2019-06-28 26 2816 Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers SHG
2019-06-28 26 2913 Enclosed Controllers SHG
2019-06-28 26 2923 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers SHG
2019-06-28 26 2923 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers (VFC) and SHG
Variable Frequency Drives
2019-06-28 26 3213 Engine Generators (Cup) SHG
2019-06-28 26 3213 Engine Generators (Garage G) SHG
2019-06-28 26 3213.1 Engine Generators (Installation) SHG
2019-06-28 26 3353 Uninterruptible Power Supply SHG
2019-06-28 26 3600 Transfer Switches SHG
2019-06-28 26 4113 Lightning Protection For Structures SHG
2019-06-28 26 4313 TVSS for Low-voltage Electrical Power Circuits SHG
2019-06-28 26 5100 Interior Lighting SHG
2019-06-28 26 5101 Architectural Lighting Fixtures CD+M
2019-06-28 26 5600 Exterior Lighting SHG
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
2019-06-28 27 0000 Communications SHG

2019-06-28 27 0526 Grounding And Bonding For Communications SHG
Systems
2019-06-28 27 0528 Pathways For Communications Systems SHG
2019-06-28 27 0537 Firestopping For Communications Systems SHG
2019-06-28 27 0553 Identification For Communications Systems SHG
2019-06-28 27 1100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings SHG
2019-06-28 27 1300 Communications Backbone Cabling SHG
2019-06-28 27 1500 Communications Horizontal Cabling SHG
2017-01-20 27 5119 Electronic Sound Masking System Cerami
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
2019-06-28 28 1000 Security Systems (Garage G) SHG

2019-06-28 28 1000 Security Systems Gates (Garage F) SHG
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
2019-06-28 31 1300 Selective Tree and Shrub Removal and Trimming KH

2019-06-28 31 2301 Excavation and Fill For Landscape KH
2019-06-28 31 3116 Termite Control HKS
2019-06-28 31 6329 Drilled Piers LAFP
HKS 22514.000
2019-06-28
PLANO, TEXAS
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
2019-06-28 32 0190 Operation and Maintenance of Planting KH

2019-06-28 32 0192 Landscape Maintenance – 1 Year KH
2019-06-28 32 1314 Concrete Paving for Landscape Flatwork KH
2019-06-28 32 1316 Decorative Concrete Unit Paving KH
2019-06-28 32 1413 Precast Concrete Unit Paving KH
2019-06-28 32 1500 Aggregate Surfacing KH
2019-06-28 32 1715 Parking Accessories HKS
2019-06-28 32 3113 Chain Link Fencing HKS
2019-06-28 32 8000 Irrigation KH
2019-06-28 32 9119 Landscape Grading KH
2019-06-28 32 9219 Seeding KH
2019-06-28 32 9223 Sodding KH
2019-06-28 32 9300 Plants KH
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
2019-06-28 33 4601 Subdrainage for Landscape KH

2019-06-28 33 4613 Foundation Drainage System HKS
SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION
2018-07-01 WTS Critical Technology Space and Infrastructure SHG

2018-07-20 Low Voltage Responsibility Matrix V1.0 – Phase 2 SHG
2018-07-01 Appendix A - WTS Definition and Checklists for MER SHG
and TR Room Acceptance
2018-07-01 Appendix B - WTS Matrix V1 SHG
2018-07-01 Appendix C - WTS Faceplate Configurations SHG
2018-07-01 Appendix D - WTS General Identification Standard SHG
2018-07-01 Appendix E - Materials SHG
2018-07-01 Appendix F - WTS Data Clean Specification and SHG
Cleaning Policy for MERs and TRs
2018-07-01 Appendix H - WTS Cable Design and Engineering SHG
Installation Standard WAP
2018-07-01 Appendix I - WTS Cable Design and Engineering SHG
Patching Standard
2018-07-01 Appendix J -Main Equipment Room, Technology SHG
Room and Technology Lab Security Design Standard
2018-07-01 Appendix K - Exception Approval SHG
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
HKS 22514.000
2019-06-28
CRITICAL TECHNOLOGY SPACE &
INFRASTRUCTURE CABLING DESIGN
STANDARD
Version 1.0.2
July 1, 2018
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD ........................................................................................................... 4
SECTION 01 00 00 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................... 5
CRITICAL TECHNOLOGY SPACES .......................................................................... 5
Terminology ....................................................................................................... 27
Glossary ............................................................................................................. 27
GENERAL NOTES ................................................................................................ 29
Compliance with this Standard ......................................................................... 29
Copper and Fiber Systems ............................................................................... 30
Complete System ........................................................................................... 30
Owner Preferred Product Pricing and Delivery .................................................... 30
Subcontractors .............................................................................................. 31
Legacy Infrastructures .................................................................................... 31
Contractor personnel ...................................................................................... 32
Contractor notice to proceed............................................................................ 32
Contractor communication ............................................................................... 32
Contractor advertising .................................................................................... 32
Contractor badging ......................................................................................... 32
Omissions ..................................................................................................... 32
Interpretation ................................................................................................ 33
Equivalents ................................................................................................... 33
Substitutions ................................................................................................. 33
New Materials ................................................................................................ 33
General Cabling ............................................................................................. 33
Cable Protection ............................................................................................. 33
Quality Control............................................................................................... 34
Change Controls ............................................................................................ 34
Preferred Contractor List ................................................................................. 34
Site Safety .................................................................................................... 34
Material Interpretation .................................................................................... 34
Project Schedule ............................................................................................ 34
Installation .................................................................................................... 35
Construction Change Directive ......................................................................... 35
Testing ......................................................................................................... 35
Protection of Property ..................................................................................... 35
Partial Occupancy ........................................................................................... 36
Environmental Quality .................................................................................... 36
Cleaning and Trash ......................................................................................... 36
Storage and Staging ....................................................................................... 36
Work Schedule ............................................................................................... 36
Work Hours ................................................................................................... 36
Activity Tracking ............................................................................................ 37
Final authority ............................................................................................... 37
References .................................................................................................... 37
ACCEPTANCE ................................................................................................. 38
Acceptance Inspections ................................................................................... 38
Fault Correction Procedure .............................................................................. 39
Room Turnover and Substantial Completion ...................................................... 39
As-builts ....................................................................................................... 39
2
Test results ................................................................................................... 39
Transfer of Infrastructure Ownership ................................................................ 39
Project Close-out Documentation ..................................................................... 39
SECTION 01 45 00 – QUALITY CONTROL ............................................................. 40
SECTION 01 45 23 ......................................................................................... 40
TESTING ....................................................................................................... 40
SECTION 01 78 36 SUPPORT AND WARRANTY .................................................. 46
SECTION 21 00 00 – FIRE SUPPRESSION............................................................ 47
SECTION 21 07 16 FIRESTOP ......................................................................... 47
SECTION 27 00 00 - COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................. 49
SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING (EARTHING) INFRASTRUCTURE ........................ 49
SECTION 27 05 28.29 NON-CONTINUOUS CABLE SUPPORTS .............................. 51
SECTION 27 05 28.30 SLEEVES AND SLOTS ..................................................... 53
SECTION 27 05 28.31 GRIPS .......................................................................... 55
SECTION 27 05 28.32 POKE THRU .................................................................. 56
SECTION 27 05 28.33 CONDUITS AND PULL BOXES .......................................... 57
SECTION 27 05 28.34 INNERDUCT .................................................................. 58
Table 1 – Soft Duct Sizing Guideline ................................................................. 59
SECTION 27 05 28.35 ACCESS FLOOR ............................................................. 62
SECTION 27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION................................................................ 63
SECTION 27 11 23 ......................................................................................... 66
RELAY RACKS, NETWORK CABINETS, LADDER RACK, CABLE TRAY ....................... 66
SECTION 27 13 14 COPPER BACKBONE............................................................ 71
SECTION 27 13 24 MULTIMODE FIBER BACKBONE ............................................ 73
Table 2 – Multimode Fiber Cable Grading Schedule – Corporate ........................... 74
SECTION 27 13 25 SINGLE-MODE FIBER BACKBONE ......................................... 76
SECTION 27 13 34 DS-3 COAXIAL BACKBONE .................................................. 79
Table 3 – Coaxial Cable Grading Schedule ......................................................... 79
SECTION 27 15 00.19 CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL ............................................. 81
SECTION 27 21 33 CATEGORY 6A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT AND SECURITY
CAMERAS ................................................................................................. 84
SECTION 33 82 53 CABLE PULLING LUBRICANTS .............................................. 87
APPENDIX A – WTS DEFINITION AND CHECKLISTS FOR MER & TR ACCEPTANCE ........ 89
APPENDIX B – GLOBAL STANDARD MATRIX FOR CRITICAL TECHNOLOGY SPACE BUILDS
.......................................................................................................................... 90
APPENDIX C – FACEPLATE CONFIGURATIONS ........................................................ 91
APPENDIX D – GENERAL IDENTIFICATION STANDARD ............................................ 92
APPENDIX E – MATERIALS ................................................................................... 93
APPENDIX F – WTS DATA CLEAN SPECIFICATION & CLEANING POLICY FOR MER’s AND
TR’S .................................................................................................................... 94
APPENDIX G – WTS BIDDER PRICING FORM .......................................................... 98
APPENDIX H – WTS Cable Design and Engineering Installation Standard - WAP .......... 99
APPENDIX I – WTS Cable Design and Engineering Patching Standard ...................... 100
APPENDIX J – MER, TR AnD Technology Lab Security Design Standard .................... 101
APPENDIX K – EXCEPTION APPROVAL ................................................................. 102
APPENDIX L ................................................................................................. 103
3
FOREWORD
(This foreword is not part of this Standard)
Approval of Standard
These Standards were approved by the JPMorgan Chase & Co. Global WTS (Workplace Technology
Services) Cable Design and Engineering and the Remote Site Operations (RSO) teams. The teams
review and update these Standards on an as-needed basis in order to create a consistent technology
framework in JPMC properties. Suggested updates to be considered for the next revision should be sent
to any member of the WTS Cable Design and Engineering and/or the Remote Site Operations team.
Background
The Global WTS organization is comprised of many groups that encompass the JPMC technology
delivery from a Design / Build / Operate perspective. The varied perspectives provide enrichment to this
Standard. The Design group focuses on the engineering and design of structured cabling and support
infrastructure for all of our Technology Spaces (e.g., Main Equipment Rooms, Telecommunications
Rooms, Co-Lo facilities, etc.). The Build group provides the Project Management services for our Global
Technology Infrastructure (GTI) Global Real Estate (GRE) and various Line of Business (LOB) projects.
The Operate group provides the day-to-day control and operations for all Technology Spaces.
This document must be used as the Standard for; designing the structured cabling infrastructure, and
planning Critical Technology Spaces (CTS). Its purpose is to define the Standard baseline design and
utilization criteria for; structured cabling infrastructure designs, and three types of Critical Technology
Spaces (CTS) in order to make them easier to specify, utilize, and manage. To promote wide
understanding it is built upon a foundation of recognized industry Standards and best practices. This
document is not intended to replace the specific needs of those planning equipment for CTS areas or
design coordination. It shall be used in conjunction with those needs and proper design coordination.
If an element of this Standard cannot be met during the design and planning phases; the group
accountable to meet the requirement shall submit a request for exception approval prior to proceeding
with a deviation from this Standard. The request must be submitted via EURC (the End User Request
Center is an internal JPMC application) using the service titled 'Exception Approval - GTI-WTS Global
Standard for Critical Technology Space Builds'. The EURC request will be routed to the exception
approvers who will review the request, approve or deny, and document any exceptions for historical
record of the sites configuration. Due to varying business requirements and Business Continuity Plans
(BCP) affecting uptime needs, LOB's must be consulted for their uptime requirement to determine if the
level of resiliency needed is greater than the base requirement. A need for enhanced resiliency may also
inform other components of the design (i.e. risers, utility feeds, etc.). All appendices are normative and
are considered to be a mandatory part of this Standard.
4
SECTION 01 00 00 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
This document is intended to provide the information necessary to allow the construction team to plan
and implement telecommunications cabling infrastructures and to ensure that all new installations and
renovations are uniform and consistent with company-wide Standards. This document identifies the
telecommunications infrastructure requirements for Corporate MER, TR, and Co-Lo facilities.
It is envisioned that not all buildings will require the complete range of services and telecommunications
infrastructure described in this document. The exact solution that suits each particular building will be
defined at the commencement of each project by the project team.
CRITICAL TECHNOLOGY SPACES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 PURPOSE
A. This Standard for Critical Technology Spaces and Infrastructure Cabling Design document is
intended as a standard. Its purpose is to define the baseline design and utilization criteria for three
types of Critical Technology Spaces (CTS) in order to make them easier to specify, utilize, and
manage, and to state the cabling infrastructure standards associated with these spaces. To
promote wide understanding it is built upon a foundation of recognized industry standards and best
practices.
This document must be used as a tool to plan Critical Technology Spaces based on WTS
operational standards. This document is not intended to replace the specific needs of those
planning equipment for CTS areas or associated design coordination. It must be used in
conjunction with needs assessment and proper design coordination.
If a standard cannot be met during the planning and design phases, the group accountable to meet
the requirements must submit a request for exception approval prior to proceeding with a deviation
from the standard. The request must be submitted via EURC (the End User Request Center is an
internal JPMC application) using the service titled “Exception Approval – GTI – WTS Global
Standard for Critical Technology Space Builds” (See Appendix K). The EURC request will be routed
to the exception approvers who will review the request, approve or deny, and document any
exceptions for historical record of the site’s configuration.
Due to varying business requirements and Business Continuity Plans (BCP) affecting uptime
needs, Lines of Business (LOB) must be consulted for their uptime requirement to determine if
the level of resiliency needed is greater than the base requirement. A need for enhanced
resiliency may also inform other components of power and cooling systems (i.e. risers, utility
feeds, etc.).
1.2 CRITICAL TECHNOLOGY SPACE DEFINITIONS
The three types of critical technology spaces, Main Equipment Room, Telecommunications Room, and Co-
location Space are defined below. Note that while the Main Equipment Room and Co-location Space are
not data centers, they may exhibit some characteristics of a data center, either through defined functional
requirements or through requirements set forth in this document.
A. MAIN EQUIPMENT ROOM (MER):

An MER is a critical technology space of a building serving as a common network distribution point
for the Telecommunications Rooms within that building (see “TR” definition below). The
5
SECTION 01 00 00 – CRITICAL TECHNOLOGY SPACES
MER provides access to internal and external services and applications via WAN and PSTN.
Associated functions within the MER include:
• Aggregation point for backbone cabling to TRs
• Network Core access and connectivity to Data Centers
• Telecommunications equipment location for WAN vendors
• Local building/campus PBX, in-building cellular, Wi-Fi, etc.
• Limited amount of server/computing equipment – only equipment with technical adjacency
requirements. Limited amount of server/computing equipment – only equipment with
technical adjacency requirements that have an approved RSO location waiver via the
Prime process.
• Vendor equipment specific to that floor, building or campus (e.g. analog/digital video
recording, etc.).
• Horizontal cable distribution from access switches to user locations when the MER is in
proximity to user space.
• Information outlet faceplates
• Pre-connectorized cables
• Patch panels
• Racks
• Cabinets
B. TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM (TR):

A TR is a critical technology space of a building serving a floor - or portion of a floor – that provides
an access point for end user connectivity. A TR is for the exclusive use of JPMC, with an exception
in some cases for use by its business partners. A TR shall only serve end user connectivity outlets
on the same floor that the TR is located on, not multiple floors.
(NOTE: A Common Telecommunications Room is a shared space in a multi-tenant building and
must not be used for JPMC equipment or connections.)
Associated functions include:
• Horizontal cable distribution from access switches to user devices.
• Backbone connectivity to the MER for network core access and to telecommunications
equipment.
• Connectivity for multimedia equipment specific to the floor or area the TR serves.
C. CO-LOCATION SPACE (CO-LOCATION FACILITY):

A Co-location space is a dedicated information technology space in a shared facility. The space
supports servers providing business application access to a user population. The Co-location
space may be used for the following:
• Provide connection to a Core Data Center
• Provide primary business critical services for a specific country or region.
• Act as a ‘Specialty’ or ‘Hub’ Data Center providing non-primary, niche business critical,
proximity or peripheral services.
6
1.3 TERMINOLOGY
A. The following terms identify an obligatory item: must, shall, will, is required, are required,
mandatory.
B. The following terms identify an optional item: can, may, should, preferably, prefers, desired,
desirable.
C. Code refers to requirements that are legally binding.
D. Regulation(s), Regulatory refer to requirements that may be legally binding, or that may be
imposed by a non-governmental authority.
E. NEC and NFPA 70 are used interchangeably to identify the National Electrical Code.
F. Authority Having Jurisdiction (“AHJ”) is as defined by Article 100 of the National Electrical Code
(NFPA 70), including the associated Fine Print (Informational) Note.
G. “ICT” stands for “Information and Communication Technology”.
H. Access Provider is an entity, such as a Carrier, that provides physical connectivity into a building
for the delivery of ICT services. The services may be offered by an Access Provider itself or by
third parties using an Access Provider’s facilities.
1.4 CODES, REGULATIONS, STANDARDS, AND PRACTICES
A. All aspects of construction and installation must meet applicable local, state, and federal laws, as
well as any regulations specific to a site. Legally binding requirements must prevail if there are any
conflicts with requirements stated or implied in this document. The AHJ will be the arbiter in
situations where interpretation is necessary to clarify information, or to resolve conflicts involving
legally binding requirements.
B. Work safety must be in compliance with Public Law 91-596, Occupational Safety and Health Act
(OSHA). As applicable, requirements of the NFPA 101 Life Safety Code must be followed.
C. Codes, regulations, standards, and industry practices documents explicit to this Standard are
listed in SECTION 01 00 00, but they are not exhaustive. Even when not explicitly cited within this
document, there is an implied requirement of compliance with industry norms reflected in
recognized standards and practices, as well as requirements based in law.
D. Codes, regulations, standards, and industry practices documents change over time. Current
governing Codes and regulations at a site location, and the most recent edition of standards and
practices documents (including errata, annexes, and amendments) must be used at the time
facilities are designed and when they are utilized.
E. Although a number of standards and practices are cited in this document, ANSI/TIA-569
“Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways” has both explicit and implicit
threads throughout.
F. Additionally influencing this standard are accepted industry practices documents such as those in
the NECA/BICSI-568 “Standard for Installing Commercial Building Communications Cabling”, and
the BICSI “Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)”.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – see attachments
7
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 ARCHITECTURAL
A. ROOM SIZE AND QUANTITY

Applicability: See below.
1. This document does not prescribe space sizes, but it is recommended that – as applicable to
space type and function - ANSI/TIA-569 guidelines be followed.
2. For MER: Minimum of one MER per building. Each building shall be evaluated for risk and
resiliency expectations with project stakeholders and business units to determine any MER
redundancy requirement.
3. For TR: There must be a minimum of one TR per floor – rectangular in shape - and it must be
large enough to house equipment and cabling for the floor, or floor area, it serves. The quantity
of TRs per floor must be based upon cable distance limitations.
4. For Co-location: Quantity and size will be determined by functional requirements.
B. ROOM LOCATION
Applicability: See below
1. The location of MER, TR, and Co-location spaces must follow industry best practices, as well
as applicable ANSI/TIA-569 and ANSI/TIA-942 standards guidelines (including those in
associated informational annexes). Among these are:
2. For MER, TR and Co-locations:
a) Avoid locations that are restricted by building components, such as elevators, core, outside
walls, or other fixed building walls that limit expansion.
b) Avoid locations with large trunk ductwork, piping, or other items that cannot be relocated.
c) For the delivery of large equipment, location decisions should factor in the need for
accessibility.
d) Close proximity to backbone cabling pathways is desirable.
e) Never locate a room below grade, in flood zones, or near spaces that may present a threat
of water infiltration unless preventive measures against water infiltration are employed.
f) Components not related to the support of the room and its equipment (e.g. water supply
pipes, drain pipes, miscellaneous piping, ductwork, pneumatic tubing, etc.) must not be
installed in, pass through, or enter the room.
g) Rooms must be located away from sources of electromagnetic interference. Special
attention should be given to electrical power supply transformers, motors and generators,
x-ray equipment, radio or radar transmitters, and induction sealing devices.
h) Rooms must not be a pass through to other rooms, and rooms must not be located behind
other rooms that act as a pass through (e.g., MEP trades should not use rooms as a pass
through to other rooms, etc.).
i) Areas susceptible to heat gain from sunlight require mitigation to counter potentially
undesirable effects.
j) Rooms must not have any windows.
8
3. Additionally, for TR:

a) TRs must be positioned in an accessible area, such as a common hallway.
C. FLOORING
The determination for whether a floor is raised or on-grade is made by GRE, and is a function of
cooling and other factors.
Applicability: MER, TR, Co-location
1. GENERAL
a) Flooring must be a static dissipative type.
b) Point to point, and point to ground resistance must be in the 106 to 109 ohms range,
measured per ANSI/ESD STM7.1 and/or ASTM F150 standards as appropriate to the
product.
c) Installation must follow the manufacturer’s instructions, including the manner of connection
to ground.
d) Flooring must be suited to the loading and durability requirements at a site, including those
in seismic zones. It must meet Codes, regulations, and industry standards and norms for
durability, material composition, dimensional stability, flame resistance, flame spread,
volatility, chemical resistance, static load, and installation.
2. VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (VCT)

a) Flooring may be static dissipative Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) utilizing copper grounding
straps, and must meet applicable ASTM standards.
3. ACCESS FLOORING (RAISED TILE)

Flooring may be an access type (raised tile) with the following characteristics and requirements:
a) Must comply with design requirements to cool initial and future ICT loads.
b) Must comply with design requirements for depth of floor.

c) Pedestals and stringers must be grounded.
d) The surface must be finished with a high pressure laminate.
e) Materials must either be non-combustible or have a flame spread index of 25 or less as
defined in the ASTM E84 and UL 723 standards regarding surface burning characteristics
of building materials.
f) The surface of the floor supporting the access tiles must be sealed to minimize dust.
g) Pedestals and stringers must be installed as per the selected raised floor design to support
anticipated rolling loads, and seismic loading (where applicable).
h) There must be underfloor smoke detection, if required by code.

i) Leak detector must be installed.
9
4. SERVICES BELOW ACCESS FLOORING

a) Power distribution (conduit, cabling, etc.) should be installed below an access floor and it
must be routed in a manner that minimizes interference with airflow.
b) Information and Communication Technology (ICT) cable within critical technology spaces
if routed under access floors should cross at right angles to power cables. The tray used
for ICT cable should be above power cables and conduits, and ICT and power cable
separation should follow ANSI/TIA-569 and ANSI/TIA-942 guidelines.
5. ACCESS FLOOR (RAISED TILE) LOADING

a) A structural engineer must be consulted during the design to specify the floor loading limit.
The minimum distributed floor loading capacity must be 150 lb/ft2 (7.2 kPA), although it is
recommended that it be at least 250 lb/ft2 (12 kPA). Sections of floor must be appropriately
reinforced if equipment loading exceeding these limits is anticipated initially or at later time
(e.g. due to equipment relocation). If extensive reconfiguration – including equipment
relocation - is anticipated, the entire floor must be appropriately reinforced.
b) The floor must have a minimum of 1.2 kPA (25 lb/ft2) capacity for supporting loads that are
suspended from the bottom of the floor (for example, cable ladders suspended from the
ceiling of the floor below). The recommended minimum hanging capacity of the floor is 2.4
kPA (50 lb/ft2). Access floor support elements must have similar load carrying capabilities.
D. CEILING
1. Critical technology spaces must not have a suspended ceiling.
2. Height of the room from finished floor to the underside of the ceiling floor slab must be at least
3.05 m (10 ft).
3. Unobstructed ceiling height must be at least 2.74 m (9 ft), although at least 3.05 m (10 ft) is
desirable.
4. Exposed ceilings and sprayed on fireproofing in an exposed ceiling must be treated to mitigate
dust.
NOTE: The assumptions under which the minimum allowed ceiling height is based are that: a)
the space for cable pathways and other items above racks and cabinets will be adequate for
current and future needs; b) it allows adequate access for maintenance and other functions; c)
it meets the requirements of this document; d) the space allows for an efficient flow of return
air to air conditioning units. If any of these conditions is not true, then the minimum unobstructed
ceiling height must be increased.
E. WALLS
1. For MER and TR:
a) All walls must extend slab to slab and be at least 1 hour fire rated..
10
b) All walls must be treated to mitigate dust. Where no equipment is intended to be mounted,
drywall (wallboard, plasterboard) walls must be taped, spackled and sanded to a smooth
finish, and painted a light color to enhance room lighting.
c) All metal wire mesh cages (if required) must extend slab to slab.
2. For Co-location:
a) If the Co-location space is contained within a metal wire mesh cage, the space in the facility
in which the cage is contained must have at least 1 hour fire rated walls.
b) If the Co-location space has one or more slab to slab walls, then the walls must be at least
1 hour fire rated.
c) All metal wire mesh cages (if required) must extend slab to slab.
F. DOORS
Doors on MER and TR spaces must comply with the following requirements. Doors on Co-location
spaces must comply with these requirements as applicable to the space.
1. Swinging doors must be fire rated with a UL classification label, and have been tested compliant
with the UL10C standard. In no case must a door in a 1 hour fire rated wall have less than a 1
hour fire rating.
2. For all spaces the door size must be at least 0.91 m (3 ft) wide and 2.44 m (8 ft) high and not
have a center support.
3. A doorway must not have a sill.
4. Code permitting, swing doors must open outward.
5. Doors must automatically close.
6. Doors must be equipped with floor sweeps to contain air, minimize dust infiltration, and
minimize external noise.
7. The quantity of doors will be defined by Code and by ingress and egress requirements.
8. Spaces with multiple doors must have only one designated primary entrance/exit door.
Secondary doors must be used only as emergency exits (see Security – Room Access and
Appendix J).
9. All doors must have a lock (see Security – Room Access and Appendix J for additional
requirements for primary and secondary doors, including CARD Reader / PIN Pad).
G. LIGHTING
1. LIGHTING SOURCE, CONTROL, AND PROXIMITY
Lighting must:
a) Be controlled from occupancy sensors providing coverage throughout the space.
b) Not be on dimmer switches.
c) Not be on the same electrical panel as the ICT equipment.
d) Be kept at least 305 mm (12 in) away from cable pathways, racks, cabinets and equipment.
11
e) Be controlled by one or more switches located near the entrance door(s) to the room.
f) Be located in aisle ways and coordinated with cabinet and rack layout.
2. ILLUMINATION LEVEL
a) Per the ANSI/TIA-569 standard requirements, light intensity measured in the middle of rack
and cabinet aisles 0.91 m (3 ft) above the finished floor must be at least:
• 500 lux (50 foot-candles) in the horizontal plane
• 200 lux (20 foot-candles) in the vertical plane
3. EMERGENCY LIGHTING
a) For MER, TR, and Co-location: Sufficient emergency lighting and signs must be properly
placed such that an absence of primary lighting will not hamper emergency exit. These
must be compliant with Code or AHJ requirements. If no generator is present, lighting must
be on battery-backup.
b) For MER and Co-location: Lighting must be on the building backup generator. If no
generator is present, lighting must be on battery-backup.
H. PLYWOOD
1. For all spaces, as a minimum, plywood must be:
a) compliant with Codes
b) kiln dried (15% max. moisture)
c) 19 mm (¾”) thick A-C grade (mounted with best side facing the room), or FSC Certified
board
d) fastened securely to a wall
e) Either;
i. Fire rated (with a UL FR-S classification), or FSC Certified - covered with two coats of
white fire retardant paint on both sides and edges. For fire-rated plywood the
classification stamp must not be obscured.
And/Or;
ii. In accordance with the AHJ’s guidance.
2. For MER: At least two contiguous sheets of plywood 1.22 m (4 ft) wide and 2.43 m (8 ft) high
and beginning 153 mm (6 in) above the finished floor must be installed on a wall in a location
best suited for their use.
3. For TR: At least one sheet of plywood 1.22 m (4 ft) wide and 2.43 m (8 ft) high and beginning
153 mm (6 in) above the finished floor must be installed on a wall in a location best suited for
its use.
4. For Co-location: There is no requirement for plywood.
12
I. SIGNAGE
Spaces must be identified with a sign outside doorways. When applicable to the site, the location,
size, and other attributes of the sign must comply with requirements of the Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA).
1. For MER and TR:
Room Naming Convention
• Building abbreviations should also come from GS&I
• Room Type should reflect Technology room definitions as identified in the space
classification document (TR for Telecommunication Room or MER for Main Equipment
Room)
• Identifier should be included if there are more than one TR located on the floor and can be
listed in Numbers, Letters, or Colors (i.e. “1, 2, A, B, Orange, Blue, etc.)
Updated signage should also accompany the activation of any new technology rooms. The
room signage should be in compliance with existing standards as provided by facilities. It
should not change the look and feel of the existing floor signage within the office space, but
should clearly indicate the room names in accordance with the GTI technology space
classification as illustrated below:
2. For Co-location: Coordinate with the Co-location facility provider
13
3. Additionally, for all spaces, secondary exit only doorways must have a sign:
• On the ingress side stating “No Entry – Emergency Exit Only”
• On the egress side stating Emergency Exit Only – Alarm Will Sound”
J. COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS IN ROOM

1. Wall mounted telephones inside of the room near each entrance, and strategically throughout
the room for technician access. The outlet mounting height must ensure that the phone keypad
and controls will be no greater than 1,372 mm (54 in) above the finished floor to comply with
requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
2. Wireless Access Points for JPMC wireless network access must provide coverage within the
room at sites where wireless access is deployed, but not necessarily physically located in the
room.
K. STORAGE AND STAGING AREA

1. For TR: There are no storage and staging area requirements for TR’s, but a TR itself must not
be used for these functions.
2. For MER: A secure storage and staging room should be planned adjacent to the MER.
3. For Co-location: A secure storage and staging room should be planned in proximity to the co-
location room (cage).
4. A storage and staging room:

a) Should include a 1.83 m (6 ft) wide x 0.91 m (3 ft) deep work surface, and one 2.13 m (7
ft) high x 1.22 m (4 ft) wide shelving unit.
b) For MER and Co-location facilities built to house above 20 rack or cabinet positions, the
secure storage and staging room should be at least 14.86 m2 (160 ft2).
c) For MER and Co-location facilities built to house less than 20 rack or cabinet positions, the
secure storage and staging room should be at least 9.29 m2 (100 ft2).
d) Must be outfitted with an ingress card reader.
3.2 SECURITY – ROOM ACCESS See Appendix J

A. All spaces must have a single point of entry with a Card Reader / PIN Pad on the ingress side and
only a Card Reader on the egress side of the door.
B. Unless otherwise prohibited by Code, in the event of a power outage affecting entry security
components, the combination Card Reader and entry door lock must default to a locked condition.
Egress from the room must not be impeded.
C. Any secondary doors that lead into the room must be treated as emergency exits and must have a
door contact, local alarm sounder, signage, no handle on the hallway side of the door, and a crash
bar on the inside of the door.
14
D. Cameras must be placed both on the inside and the outside of the entrance door and any secondary
exits that the room might have.
E. All doors leading into the space must be monitored for immediate forced open and door held open
(longer than 60 seconds) alarms.
F. Access records from the Card Reader / PIN Pad will be the logging system. An adjunct or alternate
logging method is not required.
3.3 ELECTRICAL
A. ELECTRICAL POWER
1. UTILITY FEED
a) For MER and Co-location: These spaces require N+1 utility feeds, where N denotes the
number of feeds needed to satisfy the base requirements. Feeds must have diverse
routing into the facility.
b) For TR: Only a single utility feed is required.
2. GENERATOR
a) For MER and Co-location: The spaces which have been determined to need generators
will require generator backup in the event of utility feed failure. Only “N” generators are
required, where “N” denotes the minimum number needed to meet the base requirement.
Generators must activate automatically in response to a power failure, and the startup
delay must be well within the hold time of shorter duration uninterruptible power sources
(UPS) that respond to the initial failure.
b) For TR: UPS, generation, static transfer switches (STS), etc. should be provisioned when
required by the specific LOB’s resiliency, redundancy, and disaster recovery plans
(recommended groups typically requiring UPS, generation, and STS’s are trading floors,
call centers, and any other groups deemed critical requiring this additional resiliency).
3. UNINTERRUPTIBLE ELECTRICAL POWER

Uninterruptible power sources, when included to avoid disruption during a power outage or
abnormal supply condition, must be provided to critical technology spaces at the room level,
not at the rack or cabinet level [central or building UPS or rack mounted UPS is not part of the
requirement] See Appendix E for a list of power strips).
a) For MER and Co-location:
i. Critical loads in MER and Co-location spaces must be backed up by an uninterruptible
power source (UPS) serving these rooms. UPS must be in an N+1 configuration where
N denotes the minimum number necessary to satisfy the base requirement. The
required duration of backup is a design decision for these spaces.
ii. Uninterruptible power must automatically come online after a primary electrical supply
failure - and switch back after restoration - rapidly enough so that equipment operation
is not disturbed.
15
iii. The power capacity of the uninterruptible power supply system must be sized to handle
the maximum expected equipment load.
iv. An uninterruptible power source system, and any of its components, may only be
housed within an MER or Co-location space if it is dedicated to serving that space.
Otherwise it must not be housed within these spaces. Additionally, it is recommended
(per ANSI/TIA-569) that a UPS with a rating over 100kVA not be located within an MER
or Co-location space.
v. UPS systems must not compromise required electrical system transient voltage surge
suppression (TVSS).
b) For TR:
Uninterruptible power is not a requirement for a TR. A TR may take advantage of the
availability of uninterruptible power sources if it is in a facility that can provide
uninterruptible backup power in the same manner as required for MER and Co-location
spaces. UPS, generation, static transfer switches (STS), etc. should be provisioned when
required by the specific LOB’s resiliency, redundancy, and disaster recovery plans
4. STATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

a) Static transfer switches are used to enhance electrical system maintainability. When
installed in the output path of UPS systems these must be configured with 2N redundancy,
where N denotes the number of static transfer switches needed to satisfy the base
requirements. Static transfer switches should be certified to the UL1008 standard
requirements. UPS, generation, static transfer switches (STS), etc. should be provisioned
when required by the specific LOB’s resiliency, redundancy, and disaster recovery plans
5. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
a) Electrical circuits powering equipment in MER, TR, and Co-location spaces must be
protected with Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) devices. These must be effective
at the breaker panel level (branch circuit distribution), but should also be present at each level
of electrical distribution.
6. AC ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
a) For all types of spaces ICT equipment must be powered from dedicated circuits. In this
document a “dedicated circuit” is defined as a circuit that must be on its own breaker, and
have both a separate neutral conductor and a separate equipment grounding conductor
(EGC) that are not shared with any other circuits.
b) Branch circuit distribution must be redundant:
i. For MER and Co-location: Circuits must be redundant and diversely fed.
ii. For TR: The lowest acceptable level of redundancy is two separately wired circuits
derived from a common breaker panel (panel board). However, advantage must be
16
taken of whatever redundancy in the electrical system is available at a site beyond the
minimum required, and what is practical to upgrade at a site to provide greater
redundancy and diversity.
c) Isolated (Insulated) Ground (IG) electrical circuits and receptacles (IGR) must not be
specified unless required by a manufacturer for a specific piece of equipment or system.
IG circuits must conform to NEC requirements (also as a reference for usage, IEEE
Standard 1100 “The Emerald Book”).
d) Lighting, air conditioning and other HVAC and mechanical systems must not share
transformers and breaker panel feeds and circuits with ICT equipment.
e) All spaces must have duplex 20 Amp convenience outlets spaced at Code compliant
intervals and height around the room on walls and/or columns - as appropriate to the space
– but at intervals no greater than:
i. For MER and Co-location: 3.66 m (12 feet) as per ANSI/TIA-942
ii. For TR: 1.83 m (6 feet) as per ANSI/TIA-569
7. DC POWER
Applicability: MER, Co-location
When it is necessary to provide DC power instead of AC power:
a) The DC source must:
i. Be derived from diverse electrical utility feeds
ii. Have a nominal voltage of 48V DC unless a specific piece of equipment has special
requirements, or by 3-phase AC to DC conversion is required.
iii. Be connected by the largest cable size practical (e.g. 750 MCM) to allow power
upgrades without replacing power cables
b) Bulk DC power feeds (100A – 600A) must terminate on JPMC BDCBB(s).
8. EMERGENCY POWER FOR HVAC

a) For MER and Co-location: Air conditioning and other critical environmental services may
be briefly interrupted after an initial power failure, but must automatically come back online
from emergency power before environmental conditions in a room deteriorate below
acceptable levels.
b) For TR:
Emergency power backup for air conditioning and other critical environmental services:
i. Is not required if equipment in the TR is not provided with backup power
ii. Is required if equipment in the TR is provided with backup power via a generator, or a
UPS, or a combination of both. In situations where a TR is on a limited duration backup
power source (e.g. on UPS only), air conditioning and other critical environmental
services need only be provided with backup power for the same period of time.
17
9. EMERGENCY POWER SHUTDOWN

a) A means for emergency power shutdown, when required either by design or by Code (e.g.
facility covered under Article 645 of the NEC and the NFPA 75 standard), must be in
accordance with the following:
b) Installed with a flip-up protective cover as part of a dual action station to reduce the
possibility of false activation.
c) One normally open/normally closed dry contact shall change state upon EPO activation.
d) Labeled clearly as to function, such as “Emergency Power Off (EPO)” or “Remote
Emergency Power Off (REPO)”, or “Remote Emergency Module Office (REMO)”.
10. LOCAL POWER DISTRIBUTION AND DEPLOYMENT

a) Equipment should be dual corded.
b) At each network equipment cabinet and rack footprint PDUs (Power Strips) (see
Appendix E, of the WTS Cable Design and Engineering Standards) shall adhere to the
following requirements:
- 208V/3-phase 30A, with 208V/single phase/20 or 30A being allowable based on site
specific requirements, (or country specific equivalent) (In North America 120V power
must also be provided at the local Power Distribution Unit (PDU) level.
- Minimum (24) C-13 receptacles
- Minimum (6) C-19 receptacles
- Minimum (2) 5-20 receptacles (in NA only)
- Locking input power cords
- Integral breakers or fuses when required by Code
- Ability for metering (including each phase with true RMS reading of current and
voltage)
- Ethernet port allowing remote readout of PDU parameters.
a) Load balancing must be performed to prevent excessive phase unbalance.
b) Power receptacles must be:

i. Mounted on a separate c-channel independently supported below ladder rack and
above rack. The receptacle facing the rack/cabinet in the hot aisle (equipment air-
exhaust side of cabinet, with electrical sockets facing the hot aisle, not the ceiling or
floor).
Except
ii. If an access floor (raised tile) is present and is used for electrical power distribution,
then receptacles must be mounted on a bracket installed between the floor support
pedestals in the hot aisle.
c) Receptacle faceplates and rack and cabinet Power Distribution Units (PDU) must be
labeled with the breaker panel ID and circuit # from which they are fed.
d) Faceplate labeling for receptacles and for PDUs wired from breaker panels on each leg of
diverse power feeds (i.e. has an “A-side” and a “B-side” feed) must be distinguished in the
following manner:
i. “A-side” must use black lettering on a white background label
ii. “B-side” must use white lettering on a black background label
18
e) Equipment with dual power cords for use with diverse power feeds must:
i. Use special ordered White cords to plug into the “A-side” feed
ii. Use Black cords to plug into the “B-side” feed
f) RACK AND CABINET MOUNTED POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (“PDUs”)
All rack and cabinet PDU’s must:
i. Be certified compliant with UL 60950-1 for safety of information technology equipment.
ii. Be sized in power rating to properly handle expected loads.
iii. Use 208V AC (or country specific equivalent).
iv. Be equipped with [vertical power strips]:

a) Minimum (24) C13 receptacles
b) Minimum (6) C19 receptacles
c) Minimum (2) 5-20R receptacles (North America only)
d) Locking type input power cord
e) Integral circuit breakers or fuses compliant with applicable NEC and UL
requirements when the PDU is rated for greater than 20 amps.
f) Integral true RMS reading meter(s) capable of measuring each phase –and
displaying voltage, current and other parameters.
g) IEEE 802.3 compliant Ethernet network port allowing remote readout of - as a
minimum - currents, voltages, and other parameters available on the integral
display.
v. For rack installations, power strips are to be installed at the rear of the rack, one on
each side on the outside of the frame with the electrical sockets facing the hot aisle at
a distance from the rear rail that prevents the likelihood of power cords protruding into
the aisle way.
vi. For cabinet installations, power strips are to be installed at the rear of the cabinet, one
on each side, with the receptacles facing the middle of the cabinet.
vii. Tool-less button tabs for mounting
11. GROUNDING BUSBARS (SBB AND PBB)

A. For MER: An MER must contain at least one Secondary bonding busbar (SBB), and may
contain a Primary bonding busbar (PBB) depending upon the room’s location and function at
a site.
B. For TR: A TR must contain at least one SBB.
C. For Co-location: A Co-location space must provide a means for the SBB function. This may
be via a physical SBB busbar, or by a readily accessible – Code and standards compliant -
grounding system (e.g. under raised floor grid) to which items within the Co-location space can
be bonded to ground.
D. Secondary bonding busbars (SBB) and Primary bonding busbar (PBB) must conform to the
physical, electrical, and installation requirements of the NEC, the ANSI/TIA-607, and
ANSI/NECA/BICSI-607 standards and – as applicable - follow their guidelines and
recommendations.
19
E. PBB and SBB busbars must be listed to the UL 467 standard.

F. A SBB mounting location must be such that it does not intrude on space for other functions,
but it must be readily accessible for use and not force convoluted and lengthy paths for
grounding wires.
G. The PBB location must be properly coordinated with respect to the building grounding electrode
system to which it must be connected to meet Code and standards requirements.
H. SBB and PBB busbars must be labeled per the requirements of this document.
I. All open frame racks shall be equipped with horizontal rack mounted ground busbars (RBB),
for the grounding of network equipment. Horizontal rack mounted ground busbar shall be
mounted on the rear of the cabinet/rack.
12. GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Grounding and Bonding must be compliant with the NEC and other applicable Codes, and with
the ANSI/TIA-607 and ANSI/NECA/BICSI-607 standards.
B. All racks, cabinets, metallic pathways, metallic cable trays, and metallic cable shields must be
bonded to appropriate Ground via an insulated #6 AWG (or larger conductor) copper cable in
compliance with applicable Codes, standards, or manufacturer’s requirements if they are more
stringent, using UL listed components. The bend radius of a grounding cable must be at least
eight (8) times its diameter.
13. ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI)

Potential sources of EMI must be minimized within MER, TR, and Co-location spaces.
Requirements and guidelines of the ANSI/TIA-569 standard should be followed, as well as
requirements in sections of this document regarding room location and separation of cable
pathways from lighting.
3.4 MECHANICAL (COOLING AND ENVIRONMENTAL)
A. PRIMARY COOLING
1. For MER and Co-location: These spaces require “N+1” independent Computer Room Air
Handlers (CRAH) or Computer Room Air Conditioners (CRAC) - as applicable to the site -
where “N” denotes the number of units needed to satisfy the base requirements. However,
only “N” associated conveyance components (e.g. ducts, etc.) are required.
2. For TR: “N” CRAH or CRAC units and “N” conveyance components are required, where “N”
denotes the minimum number of units needed to satisfy the base requirements.
B. BACKUP COOLING
1. For MER and Co-location: The requirements for primary cooling cover backup.
20
2. For TR: Portable air conditioning unit(s) must be provided along with associated means for
exhausting hot air and disposing of condensate. These units must not be stored in a TR or in
an MER.
C. PIPING LOCATION
Piping for chilled water or glycol coolant must be routed outside the room and penetrate the room
at the shortest path – compliant with other requirements of this document - to connect to
CRAH/CRAC units.
D. LEAK CONTAINMENT
A condensate containment pan and/or curb wall with leak detection is required for floor/wall
supported CRAH/CRAC units. A drip pan with leak detection is required for ceiling mounted
CRAH/CRAC units. Ceiling mounted cooling units should be installed outside the room and ducted
in.
E. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. Environmental conditions must be kept within the “Recommended” range for all “A Classes”
per ASHRAE TC9.9 “2011 Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments” which
include:
a) Humidity Range, Non-Condensing: 20% to 80% Relative Humidity with 17⁰C (62.6⁰F)
Maximum Dew Point
2. Additional restrictions of ASHRAE TC9.9 must be applied as applicable to the site.
3. Measurement of temperature and humidity must follow ANSI/TIA-569 and ASHRAE
requirements and guidelines.
3.5 CRITICAL SYSTEMS MONITORING

Monitoring must be implemented to the extent necessary – or required by Code - to determine status,
and to detect alarms and malfunctions in critical systems and their environment (i.e. temperature,
humidity, fire and smoke, fluid leak, and other criteria applicable to a particular site). Monitoring
requirements for critical systems will be determined by those owning and operating these systems.
A. LEAK DETECTION
Leak detection must be installed in drip pans, around fluid piping and other locations with the
possibility of a leak threat.
3.6 FIRE SUPPRESSION
A. SUPERVISION
1. For MER and TR: Fire suppression systems must be in GRE controlled space.
2. For Co-location: Fire suppression systems will be in Co-location facility controlled space.
21
B. SPRINKLER AND OTHER SYSTEMS

1. MER, TR and Co-location spaces must have sprinkler systems or, when AHJ required, a
gaseous fire suppression system instead.
2. Sprinkler heads must have a protective cage to prevent accidental contact and activation.
Above racks and cabinets there shall be no joints to prevent against the potential for leaks from
wet systems.
3. Additionally, for MER and Co-location:
a) A sprinkler system must be pre-action type.
b) The space must be designated as a separate fire zone.
4. Fire suppression for all critical spaces must be compliant with local Codes and with the NFPA
13 standard for sprinkler systems (when applicable)
5. Cable trays must be installed 101.6 mm – 152.4 mm (4 in – 6 in) above cabinets and racks. Cable
trays must be routed to avoid conflict with door opening(s), and should incorporate elevation
transitions only when necessary to mitigate any potential conflicts.
6. Sprinkler associated piping must not be routed directly above ICT equipment or enclosures,
but instead must be routed in aisles for optimal clearance.
7. Spaces built for compliance to NEC Article 645 (Information Technology Equipment) must
comply with the NFPA 75 “Standard for the Protection of Information Technology Equipment”
requirements as well.
C. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1. All spaces must have ready access to a listed portable fire extinguisher compliant with the
NFPA 10 standard, local Codes and OSHA requirements. Extinguishers must not use dry
chemicals, and must have a suitable tank capacity, and appropriate fire type category ratings
per the UL 711 standard.
3.6 INTERNAL CABLE PATHWAYS, SUPPORT, ROUTING, AND MANAGEMENT
A. General
Cable trays, raceways, routing assemblies, and other pathway and cable support products for use
within MER, TR, and Co-location spaces:
1. Manufacture compatible waterfalls or radius drop-outs must be installed in a manner that
ensures that the bend radius of cables will be compliant with the ANSI/TIA-568 group of
standards, or manufacturer’s requirements if those are stricter.
2. Must utilize installation components that are manufacturer approved for the specific product,
and that are compliant with Codes and standards applicable to these components. They must
not compromise the Code or standards compliance of the product.
B. Metallic Cable Trays
1. Cable tray systems must be compliant with NEC Article 392.
2. Cable tray systems must be planned for at least 15% growth, with a maximum allowable fill of
50%, unless restricted by the NEC or by the ANSI/TIA 569 standard (whichever is stricter) to
a lesser fill amount for the particular type of cable tray, its usage, or it’s environment.
22
3. Cable trays must be independently supported from the ceiling and/or walls and not via
attachment to cabinets and racks.
4. Cable trays must be installed in a manner that allows at least 305 mm (12 in) of clearance
above the top of the tray.
5. Cable trays must be installed 101.6 mm – 152.4 mm (4 in – 6 in) above cabinets and racks.
6. Metallic cable tray must be compliant with the NEMA VE-1 standard. Installation should follow
the guidelines and recommendations – as applicable – in the NEMA VE-2 standard.
7. All metallic cable trays must be bonded to ground per NEC requirements. When tray sections
are not mechanically continuous, bonding conductors must be installed across the sections.
This includes trays whose section connecting hardware is not approved as a means for
providing ground continuity.
3.7 Non-metallic Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies
NOTE: Aside from fittings, assembly details, and structural properties, the primary difference between
Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies is that Raceways are enclosed and Cable Routing
Assemblies are channels that may or may not be enclosed (i.e. has a removable cover).
Non-metallic Raceways and Cable Routing assemblies:
A. May be attached to cabinets and racks when intended for patching or other local connections
within a row. Otherwise they must be independently supported and – as applicable - meet the
requirements of Item #’s 4 and 5 in Section 3.6 above for metallic cable trays.
B. Must be listed to UL2024 or UL2024A standards as appropriate to application, including fire
resistance.
C. Must be compliant for the intended use with the appropriate NEC Article (which may vary
depending upon the governing NEC edition at a site), and with the NEC required fire rating for the
environment it will employed in (i.e. plenum, riser, general purpose).
D. Must be planned for 15% growth, with a maximum allowable fill of 50% unless restricted to less
by the NEC or the ANSI/TIA-569 standard for the type of application.
3.8 EXTERNAL CABLE PATHWAYS AND SUPPORT STRUCTURES
All cable pathways (e.g. conduit), cable support structures (e.g. cable tray), and sleeves penetrating
the walls of MER, TR, and Co-location spaces:
A. Must be firestopped per the requirements of this Standard, ATSM E814, UL1479, and the
manufacturer.
B. Must meet the applicable requirements for internal cable pathways in Section 3.6 of this
document.
C. Must be installed in a manner that ensures that the bend radius of cables will be compliant with
the ANSI/TIA-568 group of standards, or manufacturer’s requirements if those are stricter.
D. Must be planned for 15% growth, with a maximum allowable fill of 50% unless restricted to less
by the NEC or ANSI/TIA-569 for the type of application.
E. Must not contain Carrier or other Access/Service Provider cabling and JPMC structured cabling
(i.e. must not be shared).
3.9 ACCESS PROVIDERS (CARRIER & OTHER)
A. A minimum of two Access Providers are required. The physical entry points of their cabling into a
building must be separated by at least 65 feet (20 meters).
B. Within a building Access Providers cabling must be diversely routed in rigid metallic conduit that
complies with prevailing Codes. Flexible/corrugated metallic conduit must not be used.
4.0 BACKBONE
23

A. Between MER and Access Provider:
1. Backbone cable from Access Provider space (e.g. Carrier Entrance Room) to an MER must
be routed in metallic conduit, and a separate conduit must be provided for each Access
Provider to the MER.
B. Between Co-location and Access Provider:
1. Backbone cables from Access Provider space must be diversely routed
2. Fiber cables must be routed in metallic conduit from Access Provider space to JPMC secure
space
3. Fiber cables may be non-armored within JPMC secure space
C. Between MER and TR:
1. Backbone cable between an MER and a TR in a multi-tenant building must be routed in
diverse metallic conduit.
2. For buildings occupied exclusively by JPMC, cable may be routed exposed vertically through
sleeves/slots and horizontally through conduit, cable tray and other pathways and support
structures compliant with the NEC and the ANSI/TIA-569 standard.
3. Whenever backbone conduit is installed for ICT cabling, it must be pre-provisioned with
flexible fabric innerduct (e.g. MaxCell). Separate conduit should be provided for copper and
fiber cables.
4.1 RACKS AND CABINETS
A. General
1. Racks and cabinets must be EIA/ECA-310 standard compliant, and white in color.
2. Racks and cabinets must be level.
3. Racks must be securely fastened to the floor, and if deemed prudent, secured with additional
bracing.
4. In seismic zones suitable racks and cabinets must be chosen and installed in a manner
appropriate to that zone, including special bracing when deemed prudent, necessary, or
required by Code and regulations.
5. Cabinets must not be installed in a manner that allows them to be freely moved after
installation. Cabinets must either be fastened to the floor or sit on leveling feet that prevent
free motion.
6. Racks and cabinets must be bonded appropriately to Ground. If necessary to make a good
connection, paint must be scraped away to expose bare metal.
7. Racks and cabinets must be labeled per the requirements of this document.
8. Racks and cabinets must be located away from potential sources of electromagnetic
interference (EMI). They should be kept at least 1.22 m (4ft) away from transformers, motors,
and other potentially strong sources of EMI. Their location should not compromise associated
cabling pathways with regard to EMI related separation requirements and guidelines of the
ANSI/TIA-569 standard.
B. Rack and Cabinet Location (Layout)
1. Racks and cabinets must be arranged in a hot aisle/cold aisle row configuration
2. Equipment air intakes at the front of racks and cabinets must not face rear equipment
exhaust from a neighboring row.
3. Side mounted air baffles must be installed to redirect hot air to the rear of racks and cabinets
when equipment has a side exhaust.
4. Room design must account for and coordinate the placement of CRAC/CRAH components
delivering cool air and capturing return air with the layout of racks and cabinets.
C. Rack and Cabinet Elevation Planning
24

To allow room for growth, rack and cabinet elevations must be planned as follows:
1. Racks and cabinets provisioned for network equipment (e.g. switches), and for use as
patching frames, must be planned for 50% growth.
2. Server cabinets for an MER must be planned for 20% growth, and for 50% growth in a Co-
Location space.
D. Network Racks
1. Network racks are only for use with network devices and cabling equipment, not for servers.
2. In addition to meeting the general requirements, network racks must:
a) Be an open type 482.6 mm (19 inch) 4-post rack
b) Have 45 Rack Units (RU) of mounting space.
c) Have fixed rails with a minimum depth of 736.6 mm (29 in) measured from the outside of
the front rail to the outside of the rear rail (i.e. distance between rail equipment mounting
surfaces)
d) Have vertical mounting for two PDU’s at the rear, one on each side
e) Be equipped on both right and left sides of the rack with full height vertical cable manager
mounted for use on the front (cold aisle/air intake) side of the rack. The depth of the
manager must not encroach on the space reserved for PDU mounting and must leave at
least 152 mm (6 in) for this purpose.
f) Be equipped with appropriate air baffles if equipment is mounted side by side in adjacent
racks.
g) Racks must not be used in buildouts that require air containment.
E. Carrier (Access Provider) Racks
1) Racks provided for Carrier (Access Provider) equipment must meet the general
requirements, and are subject to requirements provided by Transport, including that they:
Either is:
A 584.2 mm (23 in) 2-Post unequal flange rack, 45 RU heights, with 152 mm (6 in) vertical
cable managers at both front and rear on both left and right sides.
Or:
A 584.2 mm (23 in) 2-Post unequal flange seismic rack, with minimum 45 RU heights, and
152 mm (6 in) vertical cable managers at both front and rear on both left and right sides.
2. Existing/legacy rooms: If a carrier rack is not available, carrier equipment should be wall
mounted.
F. Cabinets
Cabinets must be provided for server and switch equipment. Server cabinets shall not have
switches installed in them, as they are only for servers and cabling to support the servers uplinks,
not workstation cabling. In addition to meeting the general requirements of Section 4.1.A above,
these cabinets must:
1. Be between 711 mm (28 in) to 813 mm (32 in) wide, and be between 1168 mm (46 in) to
1219 mm (48 in) deep
2. Have 45 Rack Units (RU) of mounting space.
3. Have 101.6 mm (4 in) lacing bars on both sides at the front (cold aisle air intake side)
4. Have vertical mounting for two PDU’s at the rear, one on each side
5. Have vertical cable managers at the rear, one on each side. Vertical cable managers shall
not be so deep as to encroach upon power strip placement.
6. Have an air dam kit
25
7. Have perforated single front and double rear doors, each with a lock
8. Have side panels
9. Cabinets for use in air containment buildouts must use blanking panels to close off empty
mounting spaces.
G. Clearances
Room size and layout, and rack and cabinet locations, must provide:
1. A minimum of 915 mm (3 ft) of clearance in front and in back of racks and cabinets. More
clearance must be provided when deemed prudent or necessary for use, installation, and
removal of equipment, or to meet thermal requirements.
2. A minimum of 1219 mm (4 ft) of clearance at the end of a row of racks or cabinets.
3. A minimum of 305 mm (1 ft) additional clearance from a Carrier (Service Provider) wall field
beyond the minimums specified for racks and cabinets.
4. At least 610 mm (2 feet) of clearance above racks and cabinets, with cable support systems
being the only allowable exception.
5. In access floor environments, at least one full floor tile must be free of obstruction in front and
in back of a row of racks or cabinets to allow under floor access.
4.2 FIRESTOPPING
A. All through-penetrations and membrane-penetrations of fire rated walls and floors must be
firestopped. Installation methods and firestopping materials and systems must be qualified for the
specific circumstances under which they will be used. Firestopping must, as a minimum, preserve
the fire rating of the penetrated surface(s).
B. Firestopping materials, systems, and installation methods must adhere to the requirements of
governing Codes, the ANSI/TIA-569 standard, and the manufacturer required and recommended
procedures.
C. Through-penetration firestop systems must be qualified to the ASTM E814 and UL1479
standards. “F”, “T”, and “L” ratings must be chosen as required by Code and/or an AHJ, and must
be appropriate to the situation. Where water penetration is of concern, the firestop should have a
“W” rating as well.
D. See Section 21 07 16 for additional requirements.
4.4 CONNECTIVITY
A. Fiber based connectivity must be presented for use on LC connectors and must:
1. Between critical spaces (e.g. MER to TR): Utilize LC adapter (coupler) panels connected via
fiber cables with field terminated LC connectors.
2. Utilize appropriate adaptation patch cords when necessary to convert to an LC from a
different connector type (e.g. SC, ST).
B. ICT infrastructure cabling must be separated by a minimum of 305 mm (12 in) from electrical
power cables.
C. Copper cable terminated on modular 8-pin (“RJ45” style) jacks must use the T568B pin/pair
assignment as per the ANSI/TIA-568 standards.
4.5 PATCHING
A. Centralized patching fields (cross-connect) must be implemented only if approved by the OPR or
management and must be:
1. LC connector based for fiber
2. Modular 8-pin (“RJ45” style) based for copper
3. DS-3 Coax (where applicable)
26
B. All equipment locations (rack, cabinet, wall field) must have dedicated connectivity to the
centralized patching fields with cable media suited to the type of equipment and
speeds/bandwidth to be hosted at the location.
C. Chassis based access switch copper (RJ45) port cards must be port replicated to the centralized
patching field. (If required)
D. Stackable switches must follow the WTS patching scheme illustrated in the diagram in Appendix I
of this document.
E. As appropriate and necessary for a neat and manageable installation, patch cords must be
supported in wire managers.
F. Patch cords must be routed neatly and in a manner that does not obstruct access to equipment
and the cabling infrastructure.
G. Patch cord minimum bend radius requirements per manufacturers specifications and the
ANSI/TIA-568 standards must not be violated.
H. Patch cord length must not be excessive. Plan for no more than 0.305 m (1 ft) of slack on either
end.
I. ICT equipment patch cords and power related cords and cables must utilize separate pathways.
4.6 Labeling and Administration
See Section 27 05 53 and Appendix D
4.7 Design Tools
A. AutoCAD is the minimum required design software. The project engineer must identify to the
project team the AutoCAD save version necessary to share files.
B. When shared electronically, documents must be provided in both PDF and DWG file formats. All
drawings must be scaled and the drawing must identify the scale that is used.
TERMINOLOGY
Within this document:
1. The following terms identify an obligatory item: must, shall, will, is required, are required, mandatory.
2. The following terms identify an optional item: can, may, should, preferably, prefers, desired, desirable.
3. Code refers to requirements that are legally binding.
4. Regulation(s), Regulatory refer to requirements that may be legally binding, or that may be imposed
by a non-governmental authority.
5. NEC and NFPA 70 are used interchangeably to identify the National Electrical Code.
6. Authority Having Jurisdiction (“AHJ”) is as defined by Article 100 of the National Electrical Code (NFPA
70), including the associated Fine Print (Informational) Note.
7. “ICT” stands for “Information and Communication Technology”.
8. Access Provider is an entity, such as a Carrier, that provides physical connectivity into a building for
the delivery of ICT services. The services may be offered by an Access Provider itself or by third
parties using an Access Provider’s facilities.
9. “Standard” refers to this “Critical Technology Space and Infrastructure Cabling Design” document.
GLOSSARY
27
A. As-Built Documentation that indicates cable routing, connections, systems, and

blueprint attributes upon job completion that reflects changes from the
planned to the finished state.
B. CM Construction Manager
C. Co-Lo A Co-location space is a dedicated information technology space in a
shared facility. The space supports servers providing business
application access to a user population. The Co-location space may be
used for the following:
• Provide connection to a Core Data Center
• Provide primary business critical services for a specific country or
region.
• Act as a ‘Specialty’ or ‘Hub’ Data Center providing non-primary,
niche business critical, proximity or peripheral services.
D. CTR A Common Telecommunications Room (CTR) is a shared space in a
multi-tenant building and must not be used for JPMC equipment or
connections.
E. Contractor The cabling installation contractor
F. DC Data Center
G. DCO Data Center Operations. The JPMorgan Chase organization responsible
for overall operation of JPMorgan Chase data centers.
H. ER An Entrance Room (ER) in a multi-tenant building is a shared space that
is used for Carrier and other access and service provider equipment.
When necessary, JPMC equipment may be placed in this space.
I. Factory terminated Cables that are terminated in the factory by the manufacturer, including
patch cords, patch cord assemblies, and MPO cables.
J. Field-terminated Cables that are terminated in the field after the cable has been installed,
including RJ45 copper and anaerobic or UniCam® terminated fiber (non-
MPO).
K. HC Horizontal Cross-connect
L. IC Intermediate Cross-connect
M. ICT Information and Communications Technology
N.
O. IDF Acronym not used
P. JPMC JPMorgan Chase & Co.
Q. MC Main Cross-connect
R. MDF Acronym not used
S. MPO Multi-fiber Push-On. An optical fiber connector containing a single
ferrule with 12 terminated fibers in a single line or a series of lines
T. MER Main Equipment Room - A MER is a critical technology space of a
building serving as a common network distribution point for the
Telecommunications Rooms within that building (see “TR” definition
below). The MER provides access to internal and external services and
applications via WAN and PSTN. Associated possible functions within
the MER include:
• Aggregation point for backbone cabling to TRs
• Network Core access and connectivity to Data Centers
• Telecommunications equipment location for WAN vendors
28
• Local building/campus PBX, in-building cellular, Wi-Fi, etc.

• Limited amount of server/computing equipment – only equipment
with technical adjacency requirements (i.e., local security servers,
and possibly local file/print servers – all server installs in a MER
require formal server exemption review.)
• Vendor equipment specific to that floor, building or campus (e.g.
analog video recording, etc.).
• Horizontal cable distribution from access switches to user
locations when the MER is in proximity to user space.
U. OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
V. OM1 Optical fiber Multimode 62.5 µm
W. OM2 Optical fiber Multimode non-laser optimized 50 µm
X. OM3 Optical fiber Multimode laser optimized 50 µm 10 Gb/s up to 300 m
Y. OM4 Optical fiber Multimode laser optimized 50 µm 10 Gb/s up to 550 m
Z. OPR Owner’s Project Representative. JPMC’s designated representative
responsible for a successful project outcome.
AA. OS1 Optical fiber Single-mode
BB. OS2 Optical fiber Single-mode
CC. Owner JPMorgan Chase & Co.
DD. Pre-terminated Cables that are pre-terminated in the factory, including DS-3 coaxial
(BNC)
EE. Project Documents All documents that pertain to the project, including, but not limited to,
project drawings and these Specifications.
FF. Specifications This document, which outlines general installation requirements.
GG. TR Telecommunications Room - A TR is a critical technology space of a
building serving a floor - or portion of a floor – that provides an access
point for end user connectivity. A TR is for the exclusive use of JPMC,
with an exception in some cases for use by its business partners.
Associated possible functions include:
• Horizontal cable distribution from access switches to user devices.
• Backbone connectivity to the MER for network core access and to
telecommunications equipment.
• Connectivity for multimedia equipment specific to the floor or area the
TR serves.
GENERAL NOTES
COMPLIANCE WITH THIS STANDARD
Contractor shall comply with and enforce all requirements specified in this Standard including defined
materials and acceptable practices. In the same token, materials and practices that are not specified
(e.g. splitting copper terminations across multiple jacks, implementation of a MUTOA), or are missing
from this Standard shall not be deployed. As a general rule, any deviations from this Standard that may
result in a performance impact are not permissible except when waived as specified herein.
This requirement may be waived only via written approval by a member of the Remote Site Operations
and/or Cabling Engineering team. Contractor failure to comply with this requirement may result in
immediate removal from the JP Morgan Chase Preferred Cabling Contractor Master List.
29
COPPER AND FIBER SYSTEMS

Copper and fiber systems shall be installed as specified by the Infrastructure Cabling Design Engineer,
Only Contractors that are manufacturer certified to deliver extended warranties on the specified
infrastructure will be utilized. Proof of proper manufacturer training is required for Contractors that install
and maintain intelligent patching systems.
Owner’s objective is to secure materials that fulfill the requirements of the environment at the lowest
available price within the service levels required.
Fiber Infrastructure
For fiber infrastructure, Owner has negotiated discounted pricing with the suppliers listed
below. For all legacy infrastructure installations (typically Corning) contractor shall match
existing manufactures solution to ensure operational efficiencies and compliance to
manufactures warranties.
Fiber suppliers: Corning Cable Systems, CommScope
Copper Infrastructure
For copper infrastructure, Owner has negotiated discounted pricing with the suppliers listed
below. For all legacy infrastructure installations (typically Systimax) contractor shall match
existing manufactures solution to ensure operational efficiencies and compliance to
manufactures warranties.
Copper supplier: CommScope, Berk-Tek-Leviton
COMPLETE SYSTEM
Specifications contained herein are intended to result in a complete, fully functional telecommunications
infrastructure. Even though some materials (e.g. bolts, cage nuts) may not be expressly specified in this
Standard, Contractor is expected to furnish and install all necessary miscellaneous materials to ensure a
fully functional infrastructure.
OWNER PREFERRED PRODUCT PRICING AND DELIVERY

Owner’s objective is to secure materials in accordance with schedule requirements and at the lowest
price. Owner has negotiated discounted pricing with our manufacturing and distribution partners.
Contractor has the option of procuring materials through other approved distributors in order to achieve
best pricing and service levels.
Manufacturing Partners
Chatsworth
Glen Ter Horst
708-990-0798
GterHorst@chatsworth.com
Mike Tully
609-354-8800
mtully@chatsworth.com
CommScope
Rich Cohen
917-468-7445
rcohen@commscope.com
Corning
Brad Bookless
614-246-8004
Bradley.bookless@corning.com
30
JT Kosty
817-807-2169
James.Kosty@corning.com
Berk-Tek Leviton
Mike Brady
201-341-6105
Mbrady@triadinfosys.com
John Russell
972-660-6300
jon@datacomsales.com
Distribution Partners
Anixter
Craig Carter
614-210-2515
Craig.carter@anixter.com
Eric Lawell
224-521-4487
Eric.Lawell@anixter.com
WESCO Distribution (WESCO)

[Formerly Communications Supply Corp. (CSC)]
Jeffrey Green
508-271-5778
jtgreen@wescodist.com
Larry Paniccia
631-297-5202
lpaniccia@wescodist.com
Graybar
Lance Gross
216-573-6107
Lance.Gross@graybar.com
Scott Berwick
732-978-0050
scott.berwick@gbe.com
SUBCONTRACTORS
JPMC infrastructure projects as defined by this Standard shall only be implemented by contractors on the
Preferred Cabling Contractor Master List. The installation contractors on this list shall not subcontract
work to others without prior written OPR approval. Failure to comply with this requirement may result in
removal from consideration for future JPMC projects. Contractor shall evaluate staffing requirements for
contemplated JPMC projects, and submit request for said OPR approval at the time that they tender their
initial proposal.
LEGACY INFRASTRUCTURES
In cases where the cabling infrastructure is being installed in a building not currently occupied by JPMC,
or where the new infrastructure is part of a strategic refresh of the entire existing (Legacy) infrastructure,
31
the infrastructure design and installation (including architecture and hardware components) shall follow
the current prevailing version of this Standard. In cases where the new infrastructure is being installed in
a building currently occupied by JPMC, and is not part of a strategic refresh of the entire existing (Legacy)
infrastructure, Contractor shall furnish to OPR a detailed written report describing deviations from the
prevailing Standard, and OPR will furnish direction regarding which elements of the project shall follow
the Legacy Standard, and which elements of the project shall follow the prevailing Standard. In no case
shall JPMC Standard architectures be waived.
In cases where JPMC is acquiring new space that has existing infrastructure, JPMC may consider the
retention of the existing infrastructure (not dependent on manufacturer). The determination of whether or
not JPMC retains the existing infrastructure or not will be based on sample testing, warranty transfer, etc.,
and may result in full testing and re-labeling. A new wireless heat map will be done which may require
some re-cabling to accommodate JPMC’s needs.
CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL
Access to JPMC facilities is controlled, and Contractor personnel must undergo security screening before
facility access may be permitted. Access to our Technology Rooms is provided on an escort basis.
CONTRACTOR NOTICE TO PROCEED

Contractor notice to proceed may be in the form of a properly executed agreement or valid purchase
order. Contractor shall not proceed with any work until they are in receipt of a valid PO or notice to
proceed. JPMC Preferred Contractor status will not be affected by Contractor’s refusal to begin a project
when they have not received a valid notice to proceed.
CONTRACTOR COMMUNICATION
While Contractor is expected to communicate with site users to ensure their needs are met, a successful
project outcome is determined in the sole discretion of JPMC technical project personnel. Accordingly,
Contractor shall minimally furnish to OPR and other designated personnel progress reports, including, but
not limited to, installation details on a daily basis or as otherwise approved in writing by OPR. OPR may
further define other reasonable reports and communication deliverables that Contractor shall substantially
provide. Misrepresentation of progress, which might result in project delay, may result in a probation
event.
The Contractor shall immediately advise JPMC of; any changes made to your firm’s escalation points of
contact, associations, organization, or certifications.
CONTRACTOR ADVERTISING
Contractor shall not solicit written or verbal testimonials from JPMC personnel at any time. Contractor
shall not install or post in JPMC properties any form of signage that contains Contractor name, address,
telephone number, or logo. Photographs within JPMC buildings including technology spaces are strictly
prohibited without prior approval of JPMC IT Risk Management and the local JPMC Site Manager. All
requests shall be submitted to the OPR for routing.
CONTRACTOR BADGING
When working in JPMC properties, contractors should wear either badges or clothing that displays their
employer’s name. Where badges are employed, they should be worn in a conspicuous location on the
contractor’s shirt, and on outerwear if it is worn over the shirt.
OMISSIONS
Contractor omission of any requirement described in Project Documents shall not be construed as to
relieve Contractor of any responsibility or obligation required to affect the complete and satisfactory
delivery, operation, and support of any and all materials or services.
32
INTERPRETATION
Contractor is solely responsible for developing a structured cabling bill of materials from design
documents provided. In all cases where Contractor identifies unclear or imprecise drawings or
Specifications during the bidding or quotation process, Contractor shall contact OPR, who shall furnish
appropriate interpretation. Upon award, Contractor assumes responsibility for correcting any and all
inconsistencies at no additional cost to Owner.
Where the requirements of certain sections of the Specifications are more stringent than applicable
codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances, the Specifications shall apply.
If the contractor should note items in the drawings or the Specifications, construction of which would
result in code violations, the contractor shall promptly call them to the attention of the OPR in writing.
EQUIVALENTS
It is the sole responsibility of Contractor to ensure that all products installed at this facility are compatible
with the application. Owner makes no representation regarding the accuracy of the part numbers listed.
SUBSTITUTIONS
Materials shall be as listed or shall be equivalent products of other manufacturers meeting the intent and
quality level of this specification. Materials must be compatible with the end-to-end solution being
proposed. Proposals for equivalent products must be presented to the OPR via RFI’s, Submittals, and/or
Shop Drawings. OPR written approval is required before any substitutions are made.
NEW MATERIALS
All cable and materials shall be new, unless previously approved in writing by OPR. New equipment and
materials shall be without blemish or defect. New equipment and materials shall be Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) labeled and/or listed where specifically called for, or where normally subject to
such U.L. labeling and/or listing services.
GENERAL CABLING
The inside/outside wiring plant shall be installed per requirements of these Specifications using materials
and methods that meet all applicable TIA/EIA, ISO-IEC 11801 Generic Cabling for Customer Premises,
and BICSI reference manuals.
Unless approved in advance by OPR, all products shall be brought to the job site in original
manufacturer's packaging. Electrical components shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories label. All
communications cable shall bear flammability testing ratings as follows:
- CM Communications Cable
- CMR Riser-rated Communications Cable
- CMP Plenum-rated Communications Cable
- LSZH Cable rated according to IEC test:
- IEC 754 part 2
- IEC 1034 part 2: smoke emission
- IEC 60332-1: Flammability and fire retardant
- NES 713: Toxicity index.
CABLE PROTECTION
All cabling runs that remain within JPMC areas shall be properly supported in accordance with all JPMC
Standards. All cabling that is run in common building areas and other tenant spaces must be in conduit
for the full run outside of JPMC areas such that no JPMC cabling is accessible to anyone other than
JPMC personnel. Junction and pull boxes and other access points required in common areas shall be
provided with locks so that the cabling is inaccessible to anyone other than JPMC personnel.
33
QUALITY CONTROL
Initial Cable Inspection: Contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify that it is identified
properly on the reel identification label, that it is of proper gauge, containing the correct number of pairs,
etc. Note any buckling of the jacket, which would indicate possible problems. Damaged cable, and/or
any other components failing to meet Specifications shall not be used in the installation.
CHANGE CONTROLS
Work within operational JPMC technology spaces including TRs, MERs, and Co-Lo’s should be preceded
via implementation of the Enterprise Change Management (ECM) process, which results in issuance of a
change control number. The ECM record may limit work to specific categories, locations, dates and times.
This process is administered by JPMC, and provides a consistent method of tracking work that may have
an impact on technology production. It is Contractor's responsibility to request and retain change control
numbers before performing work in these technology spaces. If Contractor is informed by JPMC
personnel that an ECM is not necessary, it is in Contractor's best interest to solicit written confirmation to
avoid impact to Contractor standing. Other Contractor actions may be required In addition to ECM as
part of access to, and conduct of work within technology spaces, and Contractor is encouraged to ask
about such requirements during initial engagement on each project.
PREFERRED CONTRACTOR LIST

JPMorgan Chase’s Infrastructure Cabling Design Team maintains the Preferred Contractor List that
identifies cabling contractors that are properly and technically qualified to install products specified within
this Standard, have the financial strength to perform projects without disruptions, and have a documented
history of success in previous projects. The Infrastructure Cabling Design Team is the subject matter
expert within JPMorgan Chase, regarding matters including, but not limited to qualifying certified
contractors. The list identifies if a contractor is qualified to perform work in our corporate facilities, and/or
our retail facilities. Great care and constant attention is given to the maintenance of this list, and
conditions for probation and elimination from our list based on contractor performance is contained within
the Preferred Contractor Master List.
SITE SAFETY
Contractor shall provide safety cones, barricades, caution tape, or other safety equipment or devices to
direct personnel around the work area in order to protect personnel and property. All aspects of
construction and installation must meet applicable local, state, and federal laws, as well as any
regulations specific to a site. Legally binding requirements must prevail if there are any conflicts with
requirements stated or implied in this Standard document. The AHJ will be the arbiter in situations where
interpretation is necessary to clarify information, or to resolve conflicts involving legally binding
requirements.
Work safety must be in compliance with Public Law 91-596, Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
As applicable, requirements of the NFPA 101 Life Safety Code must be followed.
MATERIAL INTERPRETATION
Contractor should not assume that materials listed in this specification must be installed merely because
they are listed in this specification. Project-specific detail on required materials is further defined in the
accompanying project specific drawings.
PROJECT SCHEDULE
Provision of a quotation for a project indicates that Contractor understands its scope, and has included in
their quote sufficient monies to provide the labor and materials necessary to install a top-quality, fully-
functional system while meeting all scheduled deadlines.
34
INSTALLATION
All projects should be considered to be “showcase” installations. Accordingly, all work shall be superior
both functionally, and wherever possible, aesthetically. All cables shall be dressed in accordance with
manufacturer’s Standards to insure that performance characteristics of the cable are supported. All
hardware should be mounted plumb and level, and where multiple hardware units are installed, spacing
should be uniform from unit to unit so as to ensure a visually pleasing appearance. Contractor shall take
care to prepare cable lengths that are neither too shortresulting in kinks and out-of-specification bends
 nor too long  resulting in difficult cable management and sloppy appearance. Manufacturer’s
Standard pulling tension and minimum bend radii shall be complied with at all times.
Cable Lubricants: Lubricants specifically designed for installing communications cable may be used to
reduce pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit. After installation, exposed cable and
other surfaces shall be cleaned free of lubricant residue. See Sections 01 45 23 and 33 82 53 for further
detail.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

Changes to the telecommunications infrastructure specifications, drawing details, and products shall be in
writing, and are not valid until approved in writing by the OPR. The CM shall incorporate all valid changes
into the Project Documents within five (5) business days of receipt by the CM.
TESTING
The OPR shall be furnished a minimum of 24 hours’ notice prior to any and all cable testing. The OPR
may attend and/or participate in some or all testing.
Contractor shall be available during equipment installation and testing to help isolate faults that may exist
in the cabling system installation.
Contractor shall coordinate with other vendors where necessary to resolve any discrepancies between
the cabling system and the vendors’ cabling or equipment.
PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
Extreme care shall be taken by Contractor to protect all components of the property from damage.
Contractor shall replace any damaged ceiling and floor tiles that are broken during cable installation.
Contractor shall provide all protective devices and coverings required to protect areas adjacent to the
work area. Contractor shall repair damage to areas adjacent to the work area at no cost to the Owner, or
the Owner shall make the repairs and back charge against the Telecom Contractor. Contractor shall
assume complete responsibility for damages to third parties incurred as a result of Contractor’s work in
this project. Protection of property shall include, but not be limited to, the following protective measures:
- Keeping the Co-Lo’s, TR, and MER free of food and drink at all times.
- Leaving Co-Lo’s, TR, and MER doors closed at all times.
- Employing HEPA vacuum whenever drilling, cutting, coring, or performing any work that will
impact air quality.
- Vacuuming the top surface and edge area of all floor tiles with a HEPA vacuum before removing
them from floors to prevent false alarms.
- Minimizing the size of floor tile cutouts to limit the unnecessary loss of cooling air and static
pressure.
- Coordinating bypass or disabling of fire detection systems before removing floor or ceiling tiles to
prevent false alarms.
- Removing no more than six raised floor tiles at any time in any one area to ensure maximum
static pressure and uphold the structural integrity of the floor, and for as short a period of time as
practicable.
- Removing no raised floor stringers, except under approval and supervision of OPR.
- Replacing all previously cut floor tiles no longer in use with full tiles to prevent the loss of static
35
pressure and to increase the efficiency of the cooling system.

- Preserving the location of perforated floor tiles in their current location, except in coordination with
OPR.
- Storing no items beneath the access floor.
It is Contractor’s sole responsibility to secure, read and understand all relevant JPMC Standards, and
execute installations in accordance with said Standards.
PARTIAL OCCUPANCY
Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the work at any stage as
determined by the OPR. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is
substantially complete. Unless agreed in writing otherwise, partial occupancy or use of a portion or
portions of the work shall not constitute acceptance of the work’s non-compliance with the requirements
of the Project Documents. Corrective work required in these areas shall occur so as not to disturb Owner
or Owner’s operations.
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
Structured cabling performance is subject to degradation when exposed to contaminants including dust.
Fluctuations in temperature and humidity may also impact cabling longevity and performance.
Accordingly, where environmental quality within a space may reasonably be determined to have a
negative impact on structured cabling, Contractor shall not place structured cabling and associated
hardware in said space unless permitted in writing by OPR.
CLEANING AND TRASH

Contractor shall clean the work areas on a daily basis at the end of each work shift. Debris shall not be
left in public areas at any time and debris shall not be left loose in work areas when Contractor is not
working. Contractor is responsible for all trash disposal costs including dumpsters and dump fees. All
trash is to be removed from the Project site the same night. Contractor should manage and dispose of
trash in an environmentally responsible fashion.
STORAGE AND STAGING

The unpacking and removal of equipment from pallets is preferred to be done off-site from the installation
location. Should on-site unpacking of equipment including removal from pallets need to occur on-site,
areas shall be designated by OPR for Corporate sites. Materials awaiting installation shall not be stored
in said areas for periods greater than five working days. Corridors and other public areas shall not be
used for materials storage or staging.
WORK SCHEDULE
The work shall be scheduled and coordinated with the OPR, who shall approve all phasing and
scheduling of the work. The OPR shall be notified in writing at least two business days prior to the start of
demolition or construction.
WORK HOURS
Any work in spaces occupied by Owner shall be coordinated with the OPR. Work requiring disruption of
electrical power shall be scheduled at least one week in advance with the OPR and shall only be
performed on the weekend and not exceeding eight hours. Any work generating noise, dust, or
inconvenience to Owner or other tenants, at the sole discretion of the OPR, will be performed during
either nighttime hours or on weekends. Contractor shall coordinate with the OPR to assure work is
accomplished during approved change control (ITSM) work windows.
36
ACTIVITY TRACKING
When performing work in MERs, TRs, or Co-Los, the Project Manager shall be notified at the
commencement of daily installation work, before such work begins, and at the conclusion of daily
installation work, before departing the facility.
FINAL AUTHORITY
Owner has final authority on all issue resolutions.
REFERENCES
Unless otherwise specifically stated in this document, all work shall be performed in full compliance with
the requirements set forth in the following reference Standards. In any case where regional Standards
disagree, local codes and Standards apply. Even when not explicitly cited within this Standard document,
there is an implied requirement of compliance with industry norms reflected in recognized Standards and
practices, as well as requirements based in law. Current governing codes and regulations at a site
location, and the most recent edition of Standards and practices documents (including errata, annexes,
and amendments) must be used.
A. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA)
B. ANSI/ESD STM7.1 Standard Test Method for the Protection of Electrostatic Discharge
Susceptible Items - Floor Materials - Resistive Characterization of Materials
C. ASHRAE TC9.9 2011 Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments
D. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
E. ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
F. ASTM E814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems
G. ASTM F150 Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of Conductive and Static
Dissipative Resilient Flooring
H. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, (Current edition)
I. CENELEC prEN 50173-1(Current edition), Information Technology—Generic Cabling
Systems—Part 1: General Requirements.
J. CENELEC prEN 50173-2(Current edition), Information Technology—Generic Cabling
Systems—Part 2: Office Premises.
K. EIA/ECA-310 Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
L. European Union Regulation No. 305/2011 – Construction Product Regulation (CPR)
M. IEEE 802.3 Ethernet (group of Standards)
N. IEEE Standard 1100, “The Emerald Book” Recommended Practice for Powering and
Grounding Electronic Equipment
O. ISO/IEC 11801(Current edition), Information Technology—Generic Cabling for Customer
Premises.
P. ISO/IEC 14763-1(Current edition), Information Technology—Implementation and Operation of
Customer Premises Cabling—Part 1: Administration.
Q. ISO/IEC TR 14763-2(Current edition), Information Technology—Implementation and Operation
of Customer Premises Cabling—Part 2: Planning and Installation of Copper Cabling.
R. ISO/IEC TR 14763-3(Current edition), Information Technology—Implementation and Operation
of Customer Premises Cabling—Part 3: Testing for Optical Fibre Cabling.
S. ISO/IEC 18010(Current edition), Information Technology—Pathways and Spaces for Customer
Premises Cabling.
T. National Electric Code (NEC) (Current edition)
U. National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines (NUSIG)
V. NEMA VE-1 Metal Cable Tray Systems
W. NEMA VE 2(Current edition) Cable Tray Installation Guidelines
X. NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
37
Y. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems

Z. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (version as applicable to site location)
AA. NFPA 75: Standard for the Fire Protection of Information Technology Equipment
BB. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
CC. Public Law 91-596, Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
DD. TIA/EIA-526-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant
EE. TIA/EIA-526-14B Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant
FF. TIA 568-C.0 - Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises
GG. TIA-568-C.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
HH. TIA-568-C.2 - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards
II. TIA-568-C.3 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
JJ. TIA -569-C Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
KK. TIA/EIA-606-B Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure
LL. TIA-607- Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
MM. TIA/EIA-72 Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines
NN. TIA/EIA-758-B Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard
OO. UL 2024A Optical Fiber Cable Routing Assemblies
PP. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Cable Certification and Follow up Program
QQ. UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
RR. UL 263 Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
SS. UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment
TT. UL 711 Standard for Safety Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers
UU. UL 723 Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
VV. UL 1008 Transfer Switch Equipment
WW. UL 1479 Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops
XX. UL 2024 Standard for Cable Routing Assemblies and Communications Raceways
YY. UL 2024A Outline for Investigation of Cable Routing Assemblies
ZZ. UL 60950-1 Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: General Requirements
ACCEPTANCE
System is considered to be accepted when the following items are satisfactorily completed: 1) as-builts
furnished and accepted; 2) test results furnished and approved; 3) infrastructure checklist and signoff
worksheet signed off with no open items; 4) all punch list items resolved; 5) warranty documentation
furnished. Final contractor payment shall be withheld pending completion of all acceptance criteria. In
the sole judgment of OPR, the acceptance process may be comprised of multiple intermediate steps
followed by final acceptance, or final acceptance only.
ACCEPTANCE INSPECTIONS
All inspections (intermediate or final) shall employ the WTS Definition and Checklists for MER and TR
Acceptance found in Appendix A of this document. Inspections will consist of an initial review of the
project installation progress, giving specific attention to technical installation issues, locations, and
Standards referred to in the Project Documents. Any installation deficiencies will be documented and
forwarded to the appropriate party (e.g. Contractor foreman, GC) for action.
38
FAULT CORRECTION PROCEDURE

The CM and Contractor are responsible for correction of all faults identified as a result of Acceptance
Inspections within five (5) business days of receipt of notification. Within five (5) days of the correction of
all faults, the CM will notify the OPR in writing of said corrections.
ROOM TURNOVER AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

There are (3) room ready check points at specific stages of construction based on the level of completion
defined within the check lists. These are Shell Ready, Room Ready, and Production Ready. Each of the
check point inspections is required prior to project closure.
AS-BUILTS
Any and all costs for document processing and conversion (if necessary), printing, etc., are the
responsibility of Contractor. Contractor shall provide drawings that include final single line diagram(s);
floor plan(s) showing final cable locations and all cable pathways that are utilized by the project; TR and
MER plan views showing pathways, new racks and cabinets; rack, cabinet, and wall elevations showing
equipment, hardware and cabling that has been installed as part of the project. Contractor shall keep all
documentation current throughout the installation and build-out process. If changes occur which affect
any documentation, the Contractor shall formally re-issue the affected documentation. Contractor shall
submit drawings to the OPR in AutoCAD 2013 version. JPMC utilizes a Secure Drop Zone email system
for large file exchanges, with attachments that are up to 1GB.
TEST RESULTS
Upon project completion, and before issuance of final payment, Contractor shall provide complete test
results as defined in 01 45 23 of this specification.
TRANSFER OF INFRASTRUCTURE OWNERSHIP

When the installation of the infrastructure is completed, or in the case of larger projects, in phases as
defined by OPR, Contractor shall provide as appropriate, all relevant extended warranties to the OPR.
Upon OPR receipt of warranty documentation, Owner will assume ownership of all items identified in this
step.
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTATION

Contractor shall furnish project close-out documentation within 60 days of written notification by OPR that
the project is considered complete. Project close-out documentation is not considered complete until
approved by OPR. Project close-out documentation is comprised of as-builts and warranty documents as
defined in this Standard, and any documentation that may have been defined by the OPR on a project-by-
project basis.
39
SECTION 01 45 00 – QUALITY CONTROL
SECTION 01 45 23
TESTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Prior to the testing commencing, the Contractor is to provide a comprehensive testing
methodology document for approval, prior to any testing commencing. This document shall
include the following information:
1. Brief overview of the project (location, scope etc.)
2. Overview of the testing procedure including supporting documentation, onsite equipment
calibration/ referencing and cleaning procedure.
3. Details of the equipment to be used.
4. Calibration requirements and certification for the equipment to be used
5. Test result backup procedure
6. Details of procedure for remediating any test results which do not pass the required tests
7. A program of works for the testing, should this not be clear in the overall installation
program
B. All electronic and optical measuring (test) equipment shall be within 12 months of a calibration
that has been carried out by an approved calibration house. All calibration certificates shall be
available on site during the testing phase. All test results shall identify the equipment serial
number (local and remote) of test equipment used
C. The “Store plot data” function of the tester must be enabled prior to any testing commencing.
This is to enable electronic re-testing at a later date should this be required. Test results issued
without the plot data enabled will be considered non-compliant and re-testing will be required
at the contractors cost.
D. All marginal (or star *) passes shall be considered fails and will require remediation until a pass
is achieved.
E. Once all products (i.e. cables and associated hardware) have been fully installed in their final
locations and labelled, testing of all cores/ cables may commence.
F. All cables/ cores shall be 100% tested in accordance with the sections below.
G. It is the contractor’s responsibility to remediate all faults found whilst testing at its own expense.
All test equipment shall be by the contractor.
H. JPMC may choose to witness test random elements of the installation, which should have
already been allowed for in the costs. The contractor shall provide 2 testing engineers and all
equipment required to undertake the witness testing (including fully charged test equipment).
Channel testing (including existing previously installed infrastructure may also be required as
part of the witness testing, to ensure that the full channel is compliant.
I. The project shall not be considered complete until all SCS infrastructure has been 100% tested
and test result issued to JPMC in both tester and PDF format. Test results are to be broken
down into 10Mb file sizes and emailed (FTP sites, CDs or flash drives are not permitted).
40
SECTION 01 45 23 TESTING
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 The Following products should be used when testing Structured Cabling Infrastructure:
A. Test equipment which is capable of electronically storing test result data. The tester shall
exceed ANSI/TIA-1152 Level 2G
B. Category 6 and Category 6A permanent and channel adapters
C. Single-mode and multi-mode fiber adapters
D. Encircled flux reference cords
E. Fiber inspection probe/ microscope
F. Appropriate connector cleaning tools/ tapes
G. 2m Category 6 patch leads if channel testing Category 6 cabling
H. 2m Category 6A patch leads if channel testing Category 6A cabling
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Fiber Testing (Pre-terminated Fiber)
A. Tests shall be carried out at 850nm and 1300nm for multi-mode testing and 1310nm and
1550nm for single-mode testing in one direction.
B. The fiber manufacturer’s warranty conditions shall be used to perform all fiber testing. These
standards are more stringent than International and National standards. The contractor is
required to perform custom tests using the tester and is therefore to adjust the contactor loss
values in the tester software accordingly.
C. Should installed fibers be required to be connected directly into a switch in a harness link
topology, all fibers will be patched prior to testing commencing, then individually un-patched,
tested, and finally re-patched. This is to mitigate polarity concerns.
D. When referencing fiber optic testers the 1 jumper (Method B) methodology shall be employed.
E. Fiber testers shall be compliant with encircle flux launch sources/ conditions. Encircled flux
testing patch leads shall be used and should not be mated beyond the maximum of 500 times.
F. Delivered cable tests are not required, however a Certificate of Conformance shall be supplied
with each trunk cable and copies made available on site and provided in the final handover
documentation.
G. Individual cable runs shall be traceable to the delivered trunk certification.
3.2 Fiber Testing (Field Terminated Fiber)
A. Multimode Optical Fiber OM3/OM4: The mandatory unidirectional, power meter and light
source field test in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14 in accordance with launch
conditions specified within TSB-178 shall verify link attenuation scaled to the installed cable
length (dB/km), connector and splice attenuation using the following formulas:
1. Loss Budget @ 850 nm ±30 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14 Factory

terminated
a. Optical Fiber Attenuation = [Link distance in meters] x .003 dB
b. Connector Attenuation = [Qty of modules or harness/fanout assemblies] x .5 dB
c. Splice Attenuation = [Qty of splices] x .3 dB
41
d. Loss Budget (±10%) = [Optical Fiber Attn] + [Connector Attn] + [Splice Attn] Field
terminated
e. Optical Fiber Attenuation = [Link distance in meters] x .00350 dB
f. Connector Attenuation = [Qty of connector pairs] x .75 dB
g. Splice Attenuation = [Qty of splices] x .3 dB
h. Loss Budget (±10%) = [Optical Fiber Attn] + [Connector Attn] + [Splice Attn]
2. Loss Budget @ 1300 nm ±20 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14

Factory terminated
a. Optical Fiber Attenuation = [Link distance in meters] x .001 dB
b. Connector Attenuation = [Qty of modules or harness/fanout assemblies] x .5 dB
c. Splice Attenuation = [Qty of splices] x .3 dB
d. Loss Budget (±10%) = [Optical Fiber Attn] + [Connector Attn] + [Splice Attn] Field
terminated
e. Optical Fiber Attenuation = [Link distance in meters] x .0015 dB
f. Connector Attenuation = [Qty of connector pairs] x .75 dB
g. Splice Attenuation = [Qty of splices] x .3 dB
h. Loss Budget (±10%) = [Optical Fiber Attn] + [Connector Attn] + [Splice Attn]
NOTE: Module and harness/fanout assembly connector attenuation includes

attenuation due to one (1) MPO connector pair and one (1) LC connector pair.
B. Single-mode Optical Fiber OS1: The mandatory unidirectional, power meter and light source
field test in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-7 shall verify link attenuation scaled to the
installed cable length (dB/km), connector and splice attenuation using the following formulas:
1. Loss Budget @ 1310 nm ±10 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-7 (Indoor
Cable)
Factory terminated
- Optical Fiber Attenuation = [Link distance in meters] x .00075 dB (Indoor Cable)
- Connector Attenuation = [Qty of modules or harness/fanout assemblies] x 1.3 -
Splice Attenuation = [Qty of splices] x .3 dB
- Loss Budget (±10%) = [Optical Fiber Attn] + [Connector Attn] + [Splice Attn] Field
terminated
- Connector Attenuation = [Qty of connector pairs] x .75 dB
- Splice Attenuation = [Qty of splices] x .3 dB
- Loss Budget (±10%) = [Optical Fiber Attn] + [Connector Attn] + [Splice Attn]
2. Loss Budget @ 1550 nm ±20 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-7 Factory

terminated
- Connector Attenuation = [Qty of modules or harness/fanout assemblies] x 1.3 dB
- Loss Budget (±10%) = [Optical Fiber Attn] + [Connector Attn] + [Splice Attn] Field
terminated
- Connector Attenuation = [Qty of connector pairs] x .75 dB
42

- Loss Budget (±10%) = [Optical Fiber Attn] + [Connector Attn] + [Splice Attn]
A. NOTE: Module and harness/fanout assembly connector attenuation includes attenuation due
to one (1) MPO connector pair and one (1) LC connector pair.
3.3 Category 6 and Category 6A Testing

A. Permenant link and channel testing should be performed in accordance with the following
standrads per region:
1. ISO/IEC 11801
2. ANSI/TIA 568
B. Permanent link testing should be performed between a patch panel and an RJ45 outlet.
C. Channel testing should be performed between a patch panel and a factory terminated RJ45
plug (when a Harness link or consolidation point has been deployed). Channel testing between
two RJ45 outlets is not typically required.
D. System acceptance tests for Category 6 and Category 6A are detailed below:
Category 6 Category 6A
1. Wire Map 1. Wire Map

2. Length 2. Length
3. Propagation Delay 3. Propagation Delay
4. Delay Skew 4. Delay Skew
5. DC Loop Resistance – recorded for 5. DC Loop Resistance
information only
6. DC Resistance Unbalance within a pair
6. DC Resistance Unbalance – recorded for
7. DC Resistance Unbalance between pairs
information only
8. Insertion Loss
7. Insertion Loss
9. NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk)
8. NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk)
10. PS NEXT (Power Sum Near-End
9. PS NEXT (Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk)
Crosstalk)
10. ACR-N (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio
11. ACR-N (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio
Near-End) – recorded for information only
Near-End)
11. PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation to
12. PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation to
Crosstalk Ratio Near-End) – recorded for
Crosstalk Ratio Near-End)
information only
13. ACR-F (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio
12. ACR-F (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-
Far-End)
End)
14. PS ACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation to
13. PS ACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation to
Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
15. Return Loss
14. Return Loss
16. TCL (Transverse Conversion Loss)
15. TCL (Transverse Conversion Loss) –
recorded for information only 17. ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse
Conversion Transfer Loss)
43
16. ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse 18. PS ANEXT (Power Sum Alien Near-End
Conversion Transfer Loss) – recorded for Crosstalk)
information only
19. Average PS ANEXT (Average Power Sum
Alien Near-End Crosstalk)
20. PS AACR-F (Power Sum Alien Attenuation
to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
21. Average PS AACR-F (Average Power
Sum Alien Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-
End)
E. All marginal (or star *) passes shall be considered fails and will require remediation until a pass
is achieved
3.4 Copper Backbone Testing (Category 5e)
A. The mandatory field test shall verify:
1. Wire Map
2. Correct installed length
3. Correct attenuation scaled to the installed cable length
3.5 Coaxial Testing
A. DS-3 coaxial backbone. The mandatory field test shall verify:
1. Cable length does not exceed the Coaxial Cable Grading Schedule in Section 27 13 34
2. Center conductor continuity to the remote end
3. Shield continuity to the remote end
4. Shorts between the center conductor and the shield
5. Impedance of 75Ω ±3Ω
6. Link attenuation no greater than 6.9 dB
3.6 DOCUMENTATION
A. All test results are to be issued in the tester software and PDF format a maximum of two days after
final completion of the testing. The project will not be considered complete and invoices will not be
paid until this is achieved.
B. Tester Software and PDF file sizes are to be no greater than 10Mb as email is the only option of
issuing them. Paper copies are not required.
C. The test results in the pdf document are to be sequenced in numerical order, and the port
description should match the labelling nomenclature. It is imperative that the test results detail the
local length measurement units (Metres for EMEA and APAC and Feet for the US).
D. It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure all ports have been 100% tested prior to submitting the
test results.
END OF SECTION
44
45
SECTION 01 78 36
SUPPORT AND WARRANTY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General System Warranty: Contractor is responsible for the successful delivery of extended
labor and materials warranties. In all cases, extended warranties are furnished and
supported by the manufacturer. Contractor shall not provide structured cabling services to
JPMC where Contractor is not certified by the manufacturer to offer an extended warranty for
the cabling that they are installing.
B. The warranty for work not otherwise listed shall be one (1) year following the date of
acceptance. Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for providing this paperwork and
delivering to Owner. Final payment may be withheld until said paperwork is delivered to
Owner.
C. Contractor shall deliver manufacturer's warranties to Owner in addition to the General System
Guarantee. These warranties shall be submitted on each item in list form with shop
drawings. Where appropriate, Contractor shall detail individual system components that are
subject to separate warranty. Contractor shall warranty proprietary equipment and systems
involved in this contract during the warranty period. Final payment may be withheld until said
paperwork is delivered to Owner.
D. If, in the judgment of the OPR, sub-Standard materials or workmanship are identified during
the course of Contractor’s work, Contractor will be instructed to correct such defects, up to
and including removal and replacement of defective items, at the sole cost of Contractor.
E. Warranty-related defects shall be corrected by the end of the first business day following the
date Contractor has been notified of the defect.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not used
PART 3 - EXECUTION – Not used
END OF SECTION
46
SECTION 21 00 00 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
SECTION 21 07 16
FIRESTOP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Contractor shall properly fill with firestop compound any firewall breaches created, opened,
expanded, used, or otherwise provided for telecommunications pathways, including all floor
penetrations. Fire-stopping shall be provided for all penetrations of conduit, wireways, bus
ducts, cable trays, etc., through fire-rated walls and floors and other fire-rated separations.
Floor penetrations provided by others but used for telecommunications cable are the
responsibility of Contractor regarding proper firestopping practice. The Standards of the local
governing code and all governing agencies are to be adhered to with respect to the materials
used, the method of installation, and the maximum allowable space permitted between
openings and the installed item and between installed items. Firestop compound shall
conform to both flame and temperature ratings as required by local building codes and as
tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests.
B. Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for firestopping firewall breaches associated with
third party installation of cable tray.
C. All horizontal cable penetrations through rated walls shall be sealed in a manner that will
provide a fire rating equal to the wall construction, and shall have both sides firestopped.
D. All vertical cable penetrations through slabs shall be sealed in a manner that will provide a
fire rating equal to the slab construction, and shall have one side of the slab firestopped.
E. All firestopping materials shall be easily removable without damaging the cables after being
set or cured for at least one week.
F. Where mechanical firestopping systems are employed, Contractor shall adhere to all
manufacturer specifications. Particular attention shall be paid to limiting the quantity of
cables passing through each mechanical firestop assembly to the maximum capacity
designed in the firestop plans.
G. All conduits and sleeves whether used or not shall be firestopped.
H. Use of different firestopping manufacturer products on a site is not permitted.
I. Engineering judgements can only be made by the manufacturer of the firestopping system.
J. A firestop label must be located at all high-traffic firestop system penetrations, and a library
must be maintained on-site recording all materials used and their locations in the building.
The label must be updated or replaced if changes are made to the firestop system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. SpecSeal
47
SECTION 21 07 16 FIRESTOP
B. STI
C. Hilti
D. 3M
2.2 EQUIVALENT MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be as listed or shall be equivalent products of other manufacturers meeting

the intent and quality level of this specification. Materials must be compatible with the end-to-
end solution being proposed. Proposals for equivalent products must be presented to the
OPR via RFI’s, Submittals, and/or Shop Drawings. OPR written approval is required before
any substitutions are made.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. See Appendix E for product listings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Where mechanical firestop assemblies are employed, Contractor shall familiarize themselves
with the proper procedure for construction of assemblies before beginning system installation.
At a minimum, installers should review manufacturer-provided video tutorial that
demonstrates the installation process.
B. Contractor shall avoid penetration of fire-rated walls. Sleeving shall be installed for access
where necessary.
C. Any penetration through fire-rated walls (including those in sleeves) will be resealed with an
Underwriter Laboratories (UL) approved sealant. Contractor shall also seal all floor, ceiling,
and wall penetrations in fire or smoke barriers and in TRs, and MERs.
D. Sleeves shall not be over-populated with cables. Sufficient spare capacity shall be allowed in
each sleeve to accommodate appropriate firestopping materials in accordance with
manufacturer specifications and the UL Fire Resistance Directory. Note that manufacturers
typically specify a 20% to 40% sleeve fill for their products.
E. Any poke-thrus shall be properly firestopped per manufacturer specifications.
END OF SECTION
48
SECTION 27 00 00 - COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION 27 05 26
GROUNDING (EARTHING) INFRASTRUCTURE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. JPMC’s Real Estate group is responsible for proper installation of a grounding (earthing)
backbone that has been designed and installed in accordance with J-STD-607 or equivalent
regional Standard. If such grounding (earthing) backbone does not appear to be in place,
Contractor shall inform OPR, who will take action as appropriate.
B. All bonding and grounding (earthing) shall track methods and procedures described in J-
STD-607 or equivalent regional Standard.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
B. Materials shall be as listed or shall be equivalent products of other manufacturers meeting

A. Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing a Secondary Bonding Busbar (SBB) at
all new equipment racks and cabinets per design documents. Each rack-mounted SBB shall
be bonded to the SBB that has been installed in the room.
B. A # 6 conductor shall be bonded to each rack-mounted SBB, then coiled and stored neatly at
each rack for future use.
C. Contractor is responsible for bonding sections of cable tray together utilizing #6 grounding
(earthing) straps, then installing a # 6 grounding (earthing) conductor between the tray and
the SBB that has been installed in the room.
D. If grounding (earthing) must be applied to a location where bare metal is not exposed, the
covering (e.g. paint) shall be fully removed to expose bare metal and facilitate bonding. At
each such bonding point, no greater than 12 mm (.5 in) and no less than 6 mm (.25) in of
exposed metal shall remain after bonding is completed.
E. Where armored cable is deployed, it shall be bonded to ground (earth) at one end in
accordance with AHJ and in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines.
F. The Rack Bonding Busbar (RBB) must be cleaned and have anti-oxidant applied prior to
fastening any connectors to the busbar.
49
SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING (EARTHING) INFRASTRUCTURE
G. Rack bonding busbars (RBB) are recommended for cabinets and racks that need to support
bonding for multiple pieces of equipment or patch panels for shielded cabling. When used,
the RBB must be bonded to the rack. The telecommunications equipment bonding conductor
(TEBC) connects the RBB, on the rack/cabinet, to the primary or secondary busbar in the
distributor room.
END OF SECTION
50
SECTION 27 05 28.29
NON-CONTINUOUS CABLE SUPPORTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Non-continuous cable supports are employed to carry cable vertically or horizontally in

applications where conduit or other more costly cable supports can be avoided, thereby
reducing project costs.
B. Non-continuous cable supports shall be designed for the purpose.
C. Care shall be taken in the design of non-continuous cable support infrastructure to ensure
that they do not de-rate the performance of copper cables (e.g. Category 6).
D. Non-continuous cable supports may be used to support fiber cable located in innerduct,
provided spacing does not exceed 1.2 m (4 ft.).
PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.2 MATERIALS
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Cable shall not be laid directly on ceiling tile or rails. Cables routed below access floor shall
be supported in such a fashion such that cables do not touch the concrete sub-floor. Non-
continuous cable support shall be placed in accordance with requirements in this Section 27
05 28.29.
B. Nothing (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall depend on conduits,
raceways or cables for support. Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended
ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster, as well as splines, runners, bars, ducts and the like in the
plane of the ceiling).
C. Support larger runs directly from structural slabs, decks or framing members.
D. As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to the attachment points is 45 kg (100 lbs) or
less, and in coordination with a structural engineer, fastened to building elements of 1)
Wood—with wood screws; 2) Concrete except pre-cast and solid masonry—with bolts and
51
SECTION 27 05 28.29 NON-CONTINUOUS CABLE SUPPORTS
expansion shields; 3) Hollow construction—with toggle bolts; 4) Solid metal—with machine

screws in tapped holes or with welded studs.
E. In TRs, cables shall be Velcro tied to ladder racks, trays, cabinets, strain relief bars, etc. at
intervals not to exceed 600 mm (24 in.). Tie wraps are not acceptable.
F. See Section 27 05 28.35 for minimum clearances between cables and floor tiles.
G. When supporting cable above ceiling tiles, a minimum of 75 mm (3 in.) clear vertical space
shall be available above the ceiling tiles for the horizontal cabling and pathway.
H. An independent ceiling support rod or wire shall be used to mount appropriate cable
fasteners loaded with multiple cables up to the total weight for which the fastener is
approved. The fastener design shall not interfere with the inserting or removing of the ceiling
tile.
I. Non-continuous cable supports should be located at intervals not to exceed 1.5 m (60 in.).
J. Non-continuous cable supports shall be located so as to accommodate manufacturer

specified minimum cable bend radii and pulling tension.
K. All components of the non-continuous cable support shall be free of burrs, sharp edges, or
projections that can damage cable insulation. Abrasive supports (e.g., threaded rod) shall
have the abrasive portion protected with a smooth, non-scratching covering so that cable can
be pulled without physical damage.
L. Where innerduct or cable is supported to access floor pedestals without the use of pre-
fabricated J-hooks, they shall be secured to pedestals using Velcro® or Millepede® Mille-Ties
releasable cable ties for easy modification as needed.
M. Cables may be bound together with properly rated Velcro® or Millepede® Mille-Ties
releasable cable ties for neatness between support structures.
END OF SECTION
52
SECTION 27 05 28.30
SLEEVES AND SLOTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RESPONSIBILITY
A. The labor and materials associated with work described in this Section may be furnished by
other trades.
A. Contractor is responsible for satisfying all structural concerns before floor penetrations are
implemented.
B. Performance requirements: Strict adherence to prevailing fire codes and Standards is

required. If and when fire barriers are breached, it is the sole responsibility of Contractor to
post guards at breach points and place permanent or temporary firestops immediately upon
development of the breach, if and when specified by prevailing codes and Standards
including but not limited to NEC 800.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit plans for location of all sleeves and slots to the building’s structural
engineer for approval, in the form of three copies of the appropriate drawings. Upon
approval, one copy will be returned to Contractor, at which time Contractor shall be permitted
to commence cutting.
B. Where x-rays are required, original films shall be transferred within three days of completion
of coring or cutting to Building Owner.
C. Prior OPR written approval of Contractor-furnished sleeve assignment schedule is required

before Contractor may install any cables or innerducts (where applicable) in sleeves.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials required for installation of sleeves are the responsibility of Contractor. This
includes, but is not limited to conduit, clamps, and approved firestopping materials. See
Section 21 07 16 for firestop detail.

3.1 HOURS OF WORK
53
SECTION 27 05 28.30 SLEEVES AND SLOTS
A. In occupied buildings, core drilling shall be completed after regular office hours and under the
supervision of a structural engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Sleeves or slots shall not be left open except during cable installation and shall be properly
firestopped per applicable codes.
B. Where a slot is used, it shall have a minimum 25 mm (1 in) curb around the top of the slot.
Where a sleeve is used, it shall extend 25-75 mm (1-3 in) above the floor.
C. Cutting and patching: Provide, per the OPR’s requirements, cutting, core drilling, and related
patching.
D. Do not sleeve, cut, or drill structural members or footings without architect/owner/structural

engineer’s written approval.
E. When developing penetrations through solid walls, caulk conduit penetrations for full
thickness of the wall to ensure adequate waterproofing. At fire-rated floors and partitions,
pack the sleeves with approved packing for the full depth of the sleeve, including caulking
both ends.
F. Brace all systems to withstand lateral and vertical forces that result from earthquake or wind,
in accordance with NUSIG guidelines.
END OF SECTION
54
SECTION 27 05 28.31
GRIPS
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. All vertical cables shall be supported so as to ensure a structurally sound cable plant. Grips
shall be placed so as to ensure that the failure of a single grip will not cause a “cascade”
failure down the riser stack.
B. Groups of cables may be gripped, provided manufacturer specifications are complied with.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior OPR written approval of Contractor-furnished grip schedule is required before

Contractor may install any cables in sleeves.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Grips shall be secured to surfaces that have been verified to support the rated capacity of the
grip(s). These surfaces may be walls or floors or vertical ladder racks. Grips shall not be
supported by sleeves.
B. Where grips are placed to support cables located in conduit, they shall be located in
accessible pull boxes.
C. If, in the opinion of the OPR, additional cable strain relief is required, Contractor shall provide
additional grips.
D. Kellems® grips shall be taped at the bottom with friction tape to prevent slippage.
E. Equivalent components or support methodology is acceptable if approved in writing by the

OPR.
END OF SECTION
55
SECTION 27 05 28.32
POKE THRU
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RESPONSIBILITY
A. The labor and materials associated with work described in this Section are typically furnished
by other trades.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not used.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wherever poke thru devices are employed, particular care shall be taken to ensure that the
cable routing through the poke thru is terminated in the TR that serves that floor. In no case
shall cables served via poke thrus be terminated in the TR on the floor below the poke thru
outlet location.
B. Where poke thru cabling penetrates into space that is not occupied by JPMC, reasonable
steps shall be taken to mitigate Information Technology risk associated with access to JPMC
infrastructure by others.
C. In all cases, proper firestopping procedures shall be employed in the installation and
administration of poke thrus. See Section 21 07 16 for additional information.
END OF SECTION
56
SECTION 27 05 28.33
CONDUITS AND PULL BOXES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RESPONSIBILITY
A. The labor and materials associated with work described in this Section are typically furnished
by other trades.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior OPR written approval of Contractor-furnished conduit assignment schedule is required

before Contractor may install any cables or innerducts (where used) in conduits.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not used
3.1 GENERAL
A. Installation of cables shall follow the completion of the items identified for Shell Ready in
Appendix A – WTS Definition and Checklists for MER and TR Acceptance.
B. Utilize nylon snakes or metallic fish tapes with ball type heads to set up for pulling.
C. In raceways 2” trade size and larger, utilize a pulling assembly ahead of wires consisting of a
suitable brush followed by an 85% diameter ball mandrel. Submit certifications that
mandreling has been performed as specified.
D. Slack on cables located in cabinets and pull boxes shall be formed and set in place in
groupings corresponding to their occupancy of raceways. They shall also be arranged, with
insulators and supports provided where necessary, such that cable shims or other such
temporary expedients do not have to be left permanently in place to prevent the cable from
shifting when covers or trims are removed.
3.2 PULL TENSION
A. Conduit sizing is directly related to the planned diameter of the cable and the maximum pull
tension that can be applied to the cable without degradation of the cable transmission
properties. The pull tension limit is based on the strength of the conduit (including sidewall
pressure), the strength of the pull line, the geometry of the conduit system, and the strength
of the cable. The position of the bends and length of the conduit system will affect the pull
tension that will be imposed on a cable. For instance, pulling cable in one direction may
cause a cable pull tension of 2700 N (600 lbf) whereas pulling from the opposite direction
may cause a tension of 1350 N (300 lbf). The pull tension of the planned cable to be installed
shall be calculated in both directions. The greater of the calculated pull forces shall not
exceed the pull force requirements of the planned cable to be installed. To reduce friction
during pulls, see Section 33 82 53.
END OF SECTION
57
SECTION 27 05 28.34 INNERDUCT
SECTION 27 05 28.34
INNERDUCT
PART 1 – GENERAL
To allow for future communication upgrades, including transitioning from multi-pair copper cables to
optical fiber media, a specific number of conduits shall be dedicated for that purpose. And to further that
effort and achieve maximum conduit utilization, those conduits shall contain innerduct.
A. Innerduct is a nonmetallic raceway placed within a larger raceway. For the purposes of this
Section, it may be hard-sided (hereinafter referred to as “innerduct”), or soft-sided flexible
textile raceway (hereinafter referred to as “Soft Duct”). If multiple cables are to be pulled
through a single innerduct or Soft Duct cell, they should be pulled at the same time. Soft
Duct provides multiple sleeves within conduits and empty cells should be provided for future
growth.
B. Innerduct is employed when fiber optic cables are routed in unprotected areas.
C. Copper cables do not require the use of innerduct.
D. The only permissible application for Soft Duct is within conduit.
E. Contractor should coordinate a site visit from the Soft Duct manufacturer to oversee the
installation when 1) the contractor has never utilized this product in the past; or 2) when the
aggregate length of the installation exceeds 1,500 m (5,000 ft).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE RATING
A. Innerduct shall be rated for the purpose. Innerduct listed in this section is not plenum rated.
Contractor shall exercise diligence in ensuring that the innerduct installed meets the
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Local or national codes may or may not require plenum or Low Smoke Zero Halogen in some
applications. It is Contractor’s responsibility to install materials that are appropriate to the
environment. If Contractor installs innerduct or Soft Duct that is inappropriate to the
environment (e.g. plenum-rated in spaces that do not require plenum, or non-plenum-rated in
spaces that require plenum), Contractor shall be expected to remove the inappropriate
innerduct or Soft Duct and install appropriate innerduct or Soft Duct at their sole expense.
2.2 SIZING
A. Consistent use of innerduct can result in rapid exhaustion of cable pathways. Accordingly,
contractor shall always employ the smallest diameter innerduct for the purpose of the project.
B. Contractor shall seek OPR approval before employing 50 mm (2 in) diameter innerduct.
C. Except as noted herein, conduit that is 50 mm (2 in) in diameter should be equipped with 2”
3-cell Soft Duct quantity 1. Conduit that is 75 mm (3 in) should be equipped with 3” 3-cell
58
Soft Duct, maximum quantity 2; and 100 mm (4 in) in diameter should be equipped with 3” 3-
cell Soft Duct, maximum quantity 3.
D. When 3” 3-cell Soft Duct is too small to accommodate large diameter cables and large O.D.
factory terminated pulling grips, conduit that is 75 mm (3 in) should be equipped with 4” 3-cell
Soft Duct, maximum quantity 1; and 100 mm (4 in) in diameter should be equipped with 4” 3-
cell Soft Duct, maximum quantity 2.
E. The outside diameter of pulling grips associated with factory terminated fiber trunk cables will
affect the selection of Soft Duct. See Table 1 for detail,
TABLE 1 – SOFT DUCT SIZING GUIDELINE

Maximum Cable/Grip
Cell size
Diameter per Cell mm(in)
18 (.7) 2”
26 (1.03) 3”
34 (1.34) 4”
> 34 (1.34) See OPR
A. The MaxCell soft duct shall be as specified herein.

2.4 MATERIALS
A. White polyester and nylon resin polymer.

B. See Appendix E for product listings.
2.5 SOFT DUCT
A. Standard Outdoor Textile Innerduct: Micro (33mm), 2-inch, 3-inch and 4-inch single or multi-
cell polyester/nylon textile innerduct containing 1250lb polyester flat woven pull tape.
B. Detectable Outdoor Textile Innerduct: Micro (32mm), 2-inch, 3-inch and 4-inch single or multi-
cell polyester/nylon textile innerduct containing 1250lb polyester flat woven pull tape, and a
solid copper, polyvinyl color coated conductor (19AWG minimum) for tracing and rated for a
minimum of 6 amps and 600 volts. Conductor shall be placed in the sidewall edge fold of the
textile sleeve.
C. Indoor Textile Innerduct (Riser-listed): Micro (32mm), 2-inch, 3-inch and 4-inch single or
multi-cell nylon textile innerduct containing 1250lb polyester flat woven pull tape which meets
UL2024A for flame propagation and smoke density values for general applications.
D. Plenum-Listed Textile Innerduct: Micro (32mm), 2-inch and 3-inch single or multi-cell nylon
textile innerduct containing 200lb nylon-resin flat woven pull tape which meets UL2024A for
flame propagation and smoke density values for use in air handling spaces.
2.6 TEXTILE INNERDUCT FITTINGS
A. Conduit Plugs: Compression-type conduit plugs with locking nuts for sealing and securing
one or more textile innerducts within a 4-inch inside diameter conduit, e.g.:
59
a. 4-inch plug with nine holes for cables in a 3 pack (9-cell) configuration
B. Termination Bags: Inflation-type bags for sealing and securing around one or more textile
innerducts and cables within 2-inch outside diameter or larger conduit.
2.7 PULL TAPE
A. Pull Tape: measuring and pulling tape constructed of synthetic fiber, printed with accurate
sequential footage marks. Color-coded.
2.8 PENETRATION SEALING MATERIALS
A. Duct Water Seal: products suitable for closing underground and entrance conduit openings
where innerduct or cable is installed, to prevent entry of gases, liquids, or rodents into the
structure.

A. The MaxCell soft duct shall be as specified herein.
3.1 INSTALLATION - INNERDUCT
A. Protect products from the effects of moisture, UV exposure, corrosion and physical damage
during construction.
B. Where practical, plan the installation of innerduct in ladder rack and cable tray so that innerducts
are installed and secured to one side of the ladder rack and cable tray, stacked where possible,
to reserve space for other cable types.
C. Where innerduct is installed below access floors, preserve cabinet and vertical manager space by
stubbing the innerduct within 50 mm (2 in) of its emergence through the access floor.
3.2 INSTALLATION – SOFT DUCT
A. Provide textile innerduct in conduit and wire ways, and place textile innerduct within and under
cable trays using continuous un-spliced lengths of textile innerduct between maintenance holes,
pull boxes, and/or termination points as indicated on the drawings.
B. Make a 2" incision, approximately 18" from the end of textile innerduct. Pull out and cut off
approximately 2 feet of pull-tape. Thus allowing the pull tape ends to retract back into the cells.
C. Using approximately 6 feet of pull tape, tie a non-slip knot to the incision. Then tie 3 to 6 half-hitch
knots down to the end of textile innerduct. Apply black vinyl tape over all knots and the end of
textile innerduct. Using a Bow Line knot tie a swivel to the end of 3 feet pull tape. For multi-pack
installations one swivel is sufficient with staggers in each textile innerduct.
D. Using a Bow Line knot, attach the pull rope located in the rigid conduit to the other end of the
swivel. Install textile innerduct – ensuring that no twist is introduced to the innerduct.
E. Provide suitable textile innerduct slack in the maintenance holes, hand holes, pull boxes, and at
turns to ensure there is no kinking or binding of the product.
60
F. Textile Innerduct Mountings, Hangers and Attachments: When exposed indoors or in

maintenance holes, hold firmly in place using independent support.
1. Design & install hangers and other similar fittings adequate to support loads and so as to not
damage innerduct.
2. Do not fasten textile innerduct to steam, water, or other piping, ductwork, mechanical
equipment, electrical equipment, electrical raceways, or wires
3. When appropriate, use the following cable ties to secure textile innerduct through previously
created incisions:
a) Plenum areas: plenum-rated plastic or stainless steel
b) Non plenum areas: Conventional flame retardant nylon ties
c) Underground locations : Conventional plastic cable ties
G. Maintenance Hole and Hand Hole Installation:
1. At locations where textile innerduct will be continuous through a manhole or hand hole, allow
sufficient slack so that the innerduct may be secured to the side of the vault maintaining the
minimum bend radius.
2. At maintenance holes serving as the junction location, pull the exposed end of the innerduct
to the far end of the vault, install termination bag, and secure to the vault.
H. Cable Tray and Runway Installation: Cut incisions every 24 inches into the edge of the textile
innerduct and cable wrap to one side of vertical ladder rack or horizontal ladder-type cable tray at
each incision.
3.3 Penetrations – SOFT DUCT
A. Seal all conduit and textile innerduct entering structures at the first box or outlet to prevent
entrance into the structure of gases, liquids or rodents.
B. Inspect fire stopping installation by others between building structure and conduit, wire way, and
cable tray to verify integrity of installation.
C. Exposed Textile Innerduct Penetrations: Install conduit sleeves or fire barrier sealing systems in
all openings where open and exposed textile innerduct passes through fire-rated walls and floors.
After installation, install intumescent fire barrier penetration sealing material (Hilti system)
between textile innerduct and sleeves or fire barrier system.
D. Raceway Penetrations: After textile innerduct installation, install intumescent fire barrier
penetration sealing material (Hilti system) between textile innerduct and conduit or wire way at all
exposed penetration locations.
E. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during water seal or fire stop installation. Repair any
damage.
F. Document entire installation process for future referral.
END OF SECTION
61
SECTION 27 05 28.35
ACCESS FLOOR
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. An access floor is a system consisting of completely removable and interchangeable floor

panels that are supported on adjustable pedestals and stringers to allow access to the area
beneath.
1.2 CLEARANCES – OUTSIDE CRITICAL TECHNOLOGY SPACES
A. Minimum clearance from the bottom of the access panel to any cables or innerduct located
beneath the floor shall be 20 mm (0.75 in)
B. There shall be a minimum of 50 mm (2 in) of free space between the top of the cable tray
side rails and the underside of the stringers.
C. If cable trays with covers or raceways are used under the access floor, the free space above
the tray shall allow for easy removal of covers.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not used.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Telecommunications cables below access floors shall be routed below the floor parallel to
floor grid lines, never diagonally between end points.
B. Stringers form a framework of receptacles into which tiles are inserted. They provide lateral
support by interlocking with the pedestals. Stringers shall not be removed unless previously
approved on a per-case basis by OPR.
C. From time to time, it will be necessary to cut floor tiles in order to create a pathway between
the space below the access floor and the space above the access floor. Floor tiles shall not
be cut within the TR, MER, or Co-Lo space. Cutting and other fabrication shall be performed
in designated areas.
D. Cutouts in floor tiles shall be protected with permanent grommets to prevent harm to
personnel or property.
E. To contain under-floor static air pressure, cutouts in access floors shall be equipped with “L”
shaped grommets and brushes, which limit the escape of air but allow installation of cables
through the openings as needed.
END OF SECTION
62
SECTION 27 05 53
IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. System Acceptance shall be withheld until OPR has reviewed and approved all labeling as
defined elsewhere in this section.
B. In cases where the cabling infrastructure is being installed in a building that is not currently
occupied by JPMC, the identification methodology shall follow the current prevailing version
of this Standard. In cases where new infrastructure is being installed in a building that is
currently occupied by JPMC, Contractor shall follow the labeling methodology employed in
the pre-existing infrastructure.
C. Because the cable infrastructure is a comprehensive, integrated design, proper and

comprehensive labeling is critical. To ensure the success of this component of the system
design, all labels shall be fully compliant with the requirements set forth in this section.
Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing all labels and label holders as specified
herein.
D. All labels shall be installed in accordance with information contained in project drawings and
termination schedules as specified in this Section.
E. All labels shall be indelible, pre-printed (not hand-written), and permanent, using Brady
printer or equivalent, Arial font or equivalent. The text color shall be black, unless affixed on
a black surface, in which case the label shall be black and text shall be white. Text and label
colors may be modified when reflecting cable route diversity as defined elsewhere in this
Section 27 05 53.
F. Where route diversity is employed, and the near and far end locations are identical, route
diversity shall be indicated through the use of blue and white labels, where white indicates
the primary route and blue indicates the diverse route.
G. Cable jackets shall be labeled for all factory-terminated and pre-terminated cables.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.2 MATERIALS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
63
SECTION 27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION
A. For corporate sites, the following infrastructure components shall be included and fully
labeled in the identification schema:
- Information outlet faceplates

- Pre-connectorized cables
- Patch panels
- Racks
- Cabinets
3.2 INFORMATION OUTLET FACEPLATES
A. Each information outlet identifier shall be numbered in accordance with the Identification
Standard (see Appendix D), using paper labels and clear windows included with each
appropriate information outlet faceplate. Where clear windows are not applicable, Contractor
shall coordinate a compliant label that is resistant to damage or degradation over time (e.g.
vinyl). Text height and positioning shall be in accordance with the Faceplate Configuration
Standard (see Appendix C).
B. Information outlets shall be located in each faceplate in accordance with the Faceplate
Configuration Standard (see Appendix C).
3.4 PRE-CONNECTORIZED CABLING
A. Pre-connectorized cabling shall be fully compliant with the Identification Standard (see
Appendix D).
B. Cable labeling shall be accomplished via pre-printed wrap-around self-adhesive labels in

accordance with OPR direction.
C. Labels shall be affixed to both ends of each pre-connectorized cable conspicuously displayed
just prior to each cable being routed into the termination device.
3.5 PRE-CONNECTORIZED CABLES
A. All cable numbering shall be fully compliant with the Identification Standard (see Appendix D).
B. Break-out cabling (e.g. one 36-strand fiber cable under a single sheath, furcated into three
12-fiber fan-outs, each of which is separately sheathed) should be labeled at the largest
incremental level, not at the sub-group level.
C. Cable labeling shall be accomplished via pre-printed wrap-around self-adhesive labels in

accordance with OPR direction.
D. Labels shall be affixed to both ends of each riser, horizontal, and tie cable conspicuously
displayed just prior to each cable being routed into the termination device.
3.7 COPPER PATCH PANELS
A. Copper patch panel port identification shall be fully compliant with the Identification Standard
(see Appendix D).
B. If label is affixed to a black or dark gray surface, label information shall be white in color. If
label is affixed to beige or light-colored surface, label information shall be black in color.
64
SECTION 27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION
C. Copper patch panel labels shall employ manufacturer-supplied labeling materials and covers
(if applicable), affixed to each panel in accordance with manufacturer specifications.
D. Copper patch panel labels shall be black and text shall be white. Text and label colors may
be modified when reflecting route diversity as defined elsewhere in this Section 27 05 53.
3.8 FIBER PATCH PANELS
A. Fiber patch panel strand identification shall be fully compliant with the Identification Standard
(see Appendix D).
B. If label is affixed to a black or dark gray surface, label information shall be white in color. If
label is affixed to beige or light-colored surface, label information shall be black in color.
C. Self-adhesive laser-printed sheet affixed to the inside door of the patch panel enclosures.
Affixed sheet shall be sized 10 mm (½ in.) smaller in the vertical and horizontal dimension
than the fiber patch panel door (e.g. 130 mm H X 500 mm W (5.25” H X 19” W) door = 120
mm H X 490 mm W (4.75” H X 18.5" W) label). Use of more than one label sheet per panel
is permissible.
D. Fiber patch panel labels shall be white in color.

END OF SECTION
65
SECTION 27 11 23 - RELAY RACKS, NETWORK
CABINETS, LADDER RACK,
CABLE TRAY
SECTION 27 11 23
RELAY RACKS, NETWORK CABINETS, LADDER RACK, CABLE TRAY
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Ladder rack and cable tray are employed to carry bulk volumes of cable vertically or
horizontally in applications where conduit can be avoided, thereby reducing project costs.
B. Relay racks and network cabinets offer a uniform location for the mounting and servicing of
telecommunications equipment.
C. Unequal flange relay racks are employed to accommodate Direct Current wiring that may
route within the channels of the rack. The large flange is positioned at the front and the small
flange is positioned at the rear.
D. In some regions, cabinets are utilized in lieu of racks for some applications. Cabinets and
patching frames other than those listed within this Standard may be considered, provided
they have been reviewed and approved through the exception process.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
B. As part of their base quotation, Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing all
miscellaneous hardware (e.g. cage nuts, screws), required to accomplish a complete’
working installation.
C. Materials shall be as listed or shall be equivalent products of other manufacturers meeting

2.2 CABLE PATHWAY REQUIREMENTS
A. Cable pathway specified herein includes overhead wire basket tray, ladder rack, fiber patch
cord tray, under floor wire basket tray, under floor mat, and cable channel. Only cable
pathway products defined herein are acceptable for deployment within JPMC facilities.
B. Cable pathway specified herein shall be sized to accommodate the initial calculated fill plus a
minimum growth factor of 25%.
66
CABLE TRAY
2.3 OVERHEAD - WIRE BASKET TRAY MATERIALS
A. Full support across the base of the tray is required. For overhead support, trapeze mount is
preferred. Center tray support of overhead tray is not acceptable.
B. Wire diameter shall be 5 mm - 6 mm.
C. Mesh size shall be 50 mm x 100 mm (2 in x 4 in).
D. Product shall be available in 3m (118 in – 120 in) lengths.
E. Construction shall be welded steel.
F. Where tray is exposed, it shall be powder coated or OEM painted in a color that matches the
racks/cabinets color scheme. If the wire basket tray is located in air handling space,
treatment shall be pre-galvanized or powder coated or OEM painted in a color that matches
the racks/cabinets color scheme.
G. When supporting from below with threaded rod, employ only 16 mm (⅝ in) threaded rod.
When supporting from above with threaded rod, employ only 13 mm (½ in) threaded rod.
2.4 LADDER RACK MATERIALS
A. Full support across the base of the ladder rack is required. For overhead support, trapeze
mount is preferred. Center tray support of overhead tray is not acceptable.
B. Rail dimensions shall be 25 mm H x 13 mm W (1 in x .5 in).
C. Rungs may be spaced between 225 mm and 300 mm (9 in - 12 in).
D. Standard widths shall be 300 mm, 450 mm, and 600 mm (12 in, 18 in, 24 in).
E. Construction shall be welded solid bar steel.
F. At 1500 mm (5 ft) support intervals, ladder rack shall be capable of supporting a minimum of
1367 N/m (217 lbs/ft)
G. Where ladder rack is exposed, it shall be powder coated or OEM painted in a color that
matches the racks/cabinets color scheme. If the ladder rack is located in air handling space,
treatment shall be powder coated or OEM painted in a color that matches the racks/cabinets
color scheme.
H. When supporting from below with threaded rod, employ only 16 mm (⅝ in) threaded rod.
When supporting from above with threaded rod, employ only 13 mm (½ in) threaded rod.
2.5 FIBER PATCH CORD TRAY MATERIALS
A. Standard sizes shall be 100mm W x 100mm D (4 in x 4 in), 150mm W x 100mm D (6 in x 4

in), and 300mm W x 100mm D (12 in x 4 in).
B. Fiber patch cord tray is constructed of plastic. Metal hardware (e.g. screws) may be used to
assemble and mount the tray.
C. Tray covers shall not be provided.
67
CABLE TRAY
D. The tray color shall match the racks/cabinets color scheme.
2.6 UNDER FLOOR - WIRE BASKET TRAY MATERIALS
A. Wire diameter shall be 5 mm – 6 mm.
B. Mesh size shall be 50 mm - 100 mm (2 in - 4 in).
C. Side rails shall be a minimum of 25 mm (1 in) and a maximum of 150 mm (6 in) High.
D. Construction shall be welded steel.
E. To mitigate accumulation of metal whiskers when the space below the access floor is utilized
for air handling, only pre-galvanized and powder-coated finish are acceptable. Where access
floor tray is powder coated or OEM painted, the color may indicate its function.
2.7 UNDER FLOOR - FLOOR MAT MATERIALS
A. Floor mat may be used in EMEA and APAC regions when necessary. It is used for placing
cables directly on the permanent floor.
B. Floor matting should be a minimum of 13mm (1/2”) thick and fill the aisle between the floor
pedestals.
C. Where floor matting is deployed, it shall be secured to the sub-floor using manufacturer
approved materials to prevent lifting where few or no cables are present, and to prevent
disturbance of the under floor airflow.
D. Foam matting shall comply with the fire performance requirements for the space it occupies,
and as further dictated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
2.8 CABLE CHANNEL TRAY MATERIALS
A. Cable channel tray may also be referred to as trunking or duct. It is comprised of bottom,
sides, and a top cover, all of which are constructed of solid, non-vented metallic materials. It
is typically located below the access floor and in other areas where it is necessary to isolate
cable from surroundings, typically for reasons of security or code compliance.
B. Standard sizes are 100 mm x 100 mm (4 in x 4 in) and 150 mm x 150 mm (6 in x 6 in).
C. Where channel tray is exposed, it shall be powder coated or OEM painted in a color that
identifies its function. If the channel tray is located in air handling space, construction shall
be aluminum, pre-galvanized, or powder coated or OEM painted in a color that identifies its
function.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Deliver materials to the site in Standard lengths, and store where continuously protected from
moisture and weather.
B. Receiving and unloading, storage, installation, maintenance, and installation of cable in

ladder rack and tray shall follow guidance found in NEMA Standards Publication VE 2-2006
which is available for free download from National Electrical Manufacturers Association at
http://www.nema.org/.
68
CABLE TRAY
C. All relay racks, cabinets, ladder rack, and cable tray shall be bonded to ground (earth) in
accordance with manufacturer specifications, and prevailing codes and Standards.
D. Ladder rack shall be assembled as specified by the manufacturer, including using

manufacturer-approved clamps, angles, brackets, clips, and assemblies; routing racking
level, following building lines, and creating an overall professional appearance. All cable
trays shall be supported at intervals not to exceed 1.5m (5 ft.).
E. The inside of the cable tray, cable runway and wireway shall be free of burrs, sharp edges, or
projections that can damage cable insulation. Abrasive supports (e.g., threaded rod) shall
have all visible portions, including the portion within the tray, protected using threaded rod
cover as specified herein for the purposes of cable protection and aesthetics. All basket tray
shall be cut so that the exposed wire end is square (not pointed or “V” shaped), and all sharp
edges removed.
F. In all cases, cables that enter ladder rack or basket tray from below shall employ appropriate
means of support to ensure proper cable performance, such as radius drops and dropouts as
listed above. In no case shall cables enter basket tray from below over the top edge of
basket tray side rails. This requirement does not relieve contractor of the requirement to
neatly dress cables as specified in this section 27 11 23.
G. Where relay racks are equipped with significant quantities of fiber or copper patch panels,
cables terminated into the back of the panels shall be routed through vertical managers
employing careful planning, so as to result in efficient use of vertical manager space, and
reduction or elimination of “dead spots” where space is present but cannot practically be
used. In such cases, where cables route into vertical managers from above, the bottom-most
panel shall be cabled first, then the panel above it, and so forth. Where cables route into
vertical managers from below, the opposite practice shall be employed.
H. All relay rack configurations shall be compliant with Uniform Building Code, ANSI-T1E1, and
Telcordia NEBS Standards compliant regarding seismic activity. Seismic zone 1 racks shall
have side restraints. Seismic zone 2-4 racks shall be of heavy-duty construction with side
restraints, and shall be equipped with additional floor anchor points wherever required.
I. Relay racks shall be assembled and mounted in locations shown in the Drawings and as
described herein. Each rack shall be assembled in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations. Each rack shall be mounted such that the side rails are
plumb. Bolts shall be tightened to the extent that it holds the mounting hardware firmly, but
not so tight as to distort the hardware or strip the threads. Equipment racks are to be co-
located with power outlets to allow for easy connection of rack-mounted equipment to the
power system. Racks and cable management hardware shall be securely bolted together.
J. The rack should be attached to TR and MER floors with ⅜ in threaded rod and anchors
designed for the purpose. The floor under the rack should be level within 5 mm (3/16 in). Use
a floor-leveling cement compound if necessary. Where the MER and TR are served by
access floors, lag screws shall be extended through the access floor into the concrete slab
below.
K. Support tray so that the ends of the section are not directly on the support or at mid-span.
The support span should not be greater than the straight section length or as otherwise
specified by the manufacturer. No more than one splice shall be located between supports.
L. Where the TR, MER, or Co-Lo is served by access floors that are mounted less than 900 mm
(36 in) above the subfloor, rack shall be supported to the concrete slab below using ⅜ in
69
CABLE TRAY
threaded rod and anchors designed for the purpose. When the rack is secured to the access
floor by means of threaded rod protruding through the rack base plate mounting hole and is
secured by a nut, the threaded rod shall protrude no more than 13 mm (.5 in) above the nut
and all sharp edges shall be removed. For access floors that are 900 mm (36 in) or more
above the subfloor, see OPR personnel for attachment requirements. In all cases,
requirements regarding environmental contaminants shall be adhered to as described in
Protection of Property at the beginning in Section 01 00 00 above.
M. Threaded rod that is suspended from overhead to support trapeze mounted tray shall
protrude no more than 13 mm (.5 in) below the lowest nut.
N. All overhead cable trays shall be located at the same height above the finished floor. Where
obstacles are present along the path of the tray, Contractor shall document such obstacles
and necessary adjustments in tray design, submitting said documentation to OPR for written
approval before proceeding.
O. The mounting height of wire basket tray that is installed below the access floor shall be
closely coordinated with the project team in order to avoid air dams and conflicts with other
below-floor infrastructure (i.e. power whips, smoke detectors). Where possible, the tray
bottom should be located at a depth equal to 150 mm (6 in) plus the depth of the tray below
the access floor tile.
END OF SECTION
70
SECTION 27 13 14
COPPER BACKBONE
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Category 5e voice-grade backbone is designed to accommodate services with bandwidth of up

to 100 MHz, including analog voice services, plain old telephone service (POTS), 56k digital
leased lines, and 128k Basic Rate ISDN (BRI). This backbone is composed of one or more
multi-pair 24 AWG 100-ohm Category 5e cables. Category 5e backbone cables shall contain
pair counts of 25 pair or greater.
B. All backbone cables are terminated, one pair per port on RJ-45 Patch panels.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE RATING
A. Appendix E includes part numbers for CMP, CMR, and LSZH cable. Local or national codes
may require specific cable grading in specific applications. It is Contractor’s responsibility to
install cable that is appropriate to the environment. If Contractor installs cable that is
inappropriate to the environment (e.g. plenum-rated cable in spaces that do not require plenum
cable or riser-rated cable in spaces that require plenum cable), the Contractor shall be
expected to tear out the inappropriate cable and install appropriate cable at their sole expense.
2.2 PATCH CORDS
A. Utilize Category 6 patch cords between backbone and horizontal patch panels.
2.3 MATERIALS
B. Materials shall be as listed or shall be equivalent products of other manufacturers meeting the
intent and quality level of this specification. Materials must be compatible with the end-to-end
solution being proposed. Proposals for equivalent products must be presented to the OPR via
RFI’s, Submittals, and/or Shop Drawings. OPR written approval is required before any
substitutions are made.
2.4 EXPOSED CABLING
A. In legacy installations that include visually exposed cables, the cable jacket color should match
the color of the existing cable jackets.
71
SECTION 27 13 14 COPPER BACKBONE
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Sleeves shall not be over-populated with cables. Sufficient spare capacity shall be allowed in
typically specify a 20% to 40% fill for their products.
B. Backbone cabling shall be terminated on RJ-45 Patch panels in the TRs and MER.
C. Cables shall be dressed-in, Velcro® or Millepede® Mille-Ties releasable cable ties, and
secured to the ladder rack, plywood backboard, and/or other suitable surfaces to ensure a
professional appearance and run straight, level, and parallel to building lines, with 90°
corners where possible. Contractor shall comply with manufacturer’s Standard pulling
tension and minimum bend radii at all times.
D. See 27 11 23 regarding cable routing and management when employing ladder rack and
basket tray.
E. Contractor shall furnish and install adequate cable strain relief (e.g. cable dropouts) to
accommodate the anticipated magnitude of cabling. Wherever fiber and copper cables are
segregated, strain relief shall be provided, including adequate provision for cable route
diversity where applicable.
END OF SECTION
72
SECTION 27 13 24 MULTIMODE FIBER BACKBONE
SECTION 27 13 24
MULTIMODE FIBER BACKBONE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Multimode fiber backbone is designed to accommodate applications up to 1 GHz in

bandwidth. Actual system bandwidth is a function of the fiber bandwidth and performance of
the transmitter (wavelength, spectral width, and rise/fall time).
B. Cables leaving the MER are routed directly to one or more evenly dispersed Intermediate
Cross-connects or Horizontal Cross-connects. In keeping with established Standards, the
segments or links will be limited to no more than two hierarchical levels of cross-connects in
this backbone cabling. Therefore from the Horizontal Cross-connect, only one cross-connect
point can be passed through to reach the MER, and interconnections between any two
Horizontal Cross-connects will pass through three or fewer cross-connects.
C. Field terminated fiber employing the manufacturer’s system should be performed by properly
trained personnel using approved tools and methods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE RATING
inappropriate to the environment (e.g. riser-rated cable in spaces that require plenum cable),
Contractor shall be expected to tear out the inappropriate cable and install appropriate cable
at their sole expense.
2.2 LEGACY INFRASTRUCTURES
A. Existing infrastructures that employ OM1 or OM2 fiber should be replaced with new
OM3/OM4 fiber. Materials listed presume use in a 100% new infrastructure.
B. It is contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the fiber cable type is compatible with the
environment.
2.3 TERMINATION TYPE
A. Only factory terminated and field terminated fiber may be utilized in JPMC facilities. Fiber that
is pre-terminated (e.g., patch cords created by personnel not directly employed by the
manufacturer) is not permissible, unless previously approved in writing by OPR.
B. Field-terminated fiber is the preferred termination method. Fusion, anaerobic or UniCam®
terminations are permitted.
2.4 MULTIMODE FIBER CONNECTOR TYPES
A. Multimode fiber shall be terminated into LC connectors unless approved in writing by OPR.
73
2.5 CABLE JACKETING
A. Cable jacketing may or may not be armored, depending upon the environment and the
application. See OPR for direction on cable jacketing requirements.
2.6 CABLE GRADING
A. The fiber infrastructure serving each facility shall utilize the grade of cable that
accommodates the worst-case (longest) channel length required for that specific facility. At
the commencement of the installation process, Contractor shall identify and measure the
linear distance of the longest cable channel serving the facility (including appropriate length
patch cords at both ends), and establish the appropriate cable grade using Table 2 below as
appropriate. Contractor shall submit their findings and recommendations in writing to OPR.
Final assignment of cable grading shall be made in writing by OPR.
TABLE 2 – MULTIMODE FIBER CABLE GRADING SCHEDULE – CORPORATE

If longest channel is… Use this grade
151-300m (493-984 ft.) OM3
300-550m (984-1800 ft.) OM4
Greater than 550 m (1800 ft.) See OPR
2.8 MATERIALS
A. In cases where the cabling infrastructure is being installed in a building not currently occupied
by JPMC, or where the new infrastructure is part of a strategic refresh of the entire existing
(Legacy) infrastructure as part of the project, competitive quotations including comparative
products from Corning and Systimax shall be furnished.

2.9 INTELLIGENT PATCHING
A. Where an active or passive intelligent patching system is installed, it shall be deployed in

accordance with this Standard. Initial deployment shall be preceded by a management-
approved business case that includes the incremental increase in one-time costs and all
recurring costs including administrative labor and maintenance agreement for the projected
life of the infrastructure.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Sleeves shall not be over-populated with cables. Sufficient spare capacity shall be allowed in
typically specify a 20% to 40% fill for their products.
74
SECTION 27 13 24 MULTIMODE FIBER BACKBONE
B. After fiber cable has been successfully tested in accordance with 01 45 23, all connector dust
covers shall be securely restored.
C. When employing factory-terminated cables, contractor shall take into consideration

manufacturer lead times (and intervals associated with pre-installation testing as specified in
01 45 23) when planning orders.
D. Whenever ordering factory-terminated cables, Contractor shall order cable in the exact length
desired, making allowance for slack requirements as set forth elsewhere in this section.
E. For new infrastructure, contractor shall practice care in installation of connectorized cable, as
any defective strands tested post-installation and pre-acceptance shall result in the
replacement of the entire defective cable / connector assembly at Contractor’s sole expense.
F. Manufacturer’s Standard pulling tension and minimum bend radii shall be complied with at all
times. Cables shall be dressed-in, Velcro® or Millepede® Mille-Ties releasable cable tied,
and secured to the ladder rack, plywood backboard, and/or other suitable surfaces so as to
ensure a professional appearance, run straight, level, and aligned with building lines, with 90°
corners where possible, bearing in mind manufacturer's recommended bend radii.
G. See 27 11 23 regarding cable routing and management when employing ladder rack and
basket tray.
H. In spaces where any airborne dust or contaminants may be present, especially during
construction, Contractor shall fully and properly protect any and all connectorized cables to
avoid transmission performance degradation associated with dust coming in contact with
connector contact points. If at all possible, and where allowed by the project timeline,
Contractor’s first choice should be to avoid this problem by refraining from installing any such
components until the risk of airborne dust and contaminants is eliminated (e.g. after floors
and ceilings are treated, and walls receive the final coat of paint).
I. Empty adapter panel ports shall be equipped with blank panels.
J. Contractor is solely responsible for securing factory-terminated fiber cables to fiber housings
in accordance with manufacturer requirements. This includes furnishing and installing
appropriate attachment hardware at no additional charge to Owner.
K. Contractor is solely responsible for ensuring compliance with proper polarity utilizing proper
(e.g., Alpha/Beta) orientation of modules.
L. Contractor is solely responsible for populating the infrastructure so that any given Module
Housing contains consistent (e.g., Alpha/Beta) orientation. For example, all 12 modules are
mounted in a sample 4U Module Housing so that that the Alpha designation is located at the
top. Deviations from this requirement are permissible only with advance written OPR
approval. Likewise, where multiple Module Housings are mounted in a cross-connect field,
all modules in all Module Housings shall be populated with consistent (e.g., Alpha/Beta)
orientation.
M. Contractor shall furnish and install adequate cable strain relief (e.g. cable dropouts) to
segregated, dedicated multimode strain relief shall be provided, including adequate provision
for cable route diversity where applicable.
END OF SECTION
75
SECTION 27 13 25
SINGLE-MODE FIBER BACKBONE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Single-mode fiber backbone is designed to accommodate applications 10 GHz or greater

in bandwidth. Actual system bandwidth is a function of the fiber bandwidth and performance
of the transmitter (wavelength, spectral width, and rise/fall time). Single-mode fiber is only
allowed in the backbone in situations that meet the bandwidth and distance minimum
requirements.
B. Switched Ethernet fiber demarcation extensions shall be accomplished via installation of
Single-mode fiber in accordance with requirements set forth in this section 27 13 25.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE RATING
inappropriate to the environment (e.g. riser-rated cable in spaces that require plenum cable)
Contractor shall be expected to tear out the inappropriate cable and install appropriate cable
at their sole expense.
2.2 TERMINATION TYPE
A. Only factory terminated and field terminated fiber may be utilized in JPMC facilities. Fiber that
is pre-terminated (e.g., patch cords created by personnel not directly employed by the
manufacturer) is not permissible, unless previously approved in writing by OPR.
B. Field-terminated fiber is the preferred termination method. Fusion, anaerobic or UniCam®
terminations are permitted.
2.3 SINGLE-MODE FIBER CONNECTOR TYPES
A. Single-mode fiber shall be terminated into LC connectors unless approved in writing by OPR.
B. Single-mode fiber adapters shall be blue in color.
2.4 CABLE JACKETING
A. Cable jacketing may or may not be armored, depending upon the environment and the
application. See OPR for on cable jacketing requirements.
2.5 SINGLE-MODE FIBER IN INNERDUCT
A. Where any part of a fiber cable routes beneath access floor supported by non-continuous
supports, or through more than one space unprotected by conduit, install within innerduct.
76
SECTION 27 13 25 SINGLE-MODE FIBER BACKBONE
2.7 MATERIALS
A. In cases where the cabling infrastructure is being installed in a building that is not currently
occupied by JPMC, or where the new infrastructure will be not connected to an existing
products from Corning and Systimax shall be furnished.
B. See Appendix E for product lists.


accordance with this Standard. Deployment shall be preceded by a management-approved
business case that includes the incremental increase in one-time costs and all recurring costs
including administrative labor and maintenance agreement for the projected life of the
infrastructure.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. When employing factory-terminated cables, contractor shall take into consideration

manufacturer lead times when planning orders for pre-connectorized products.
B. Whenever ordering connectorized cables, Contractor shall order cable in the exact length
desired, making allowance for slack requirements as set forth elsewhere in this section.
C. In new infrastructures, contractor shall practice care in installation of connectorized cable, as

any defective strands tested post-installation and pre-acceptance shall result in the
replacement of the entire defective cable / connector assembly at Contractor’s sole expense.
D. Manufacturer’s Standard pulling tension and minimum bend radii shall be complied with at all
times. Cables shall be dressed-in, Velcro® or Millepede® Mille-Ties releasable cable tied,
and secured to the ladder rack, plywood backboard, and/or other suitable surfaces so as to
ensure a professional appearance, run straight, level, and aligned with building lines, with 90°
corners where possible, bearing in mind manufacturer's recommended bend radii.
E. See 27 11 23 regarding cable routing and management when employing ladder rack and
basket tray.
F. In spaces where any airborne dust or contaminants may be present, especially during
construction, Contractor shall fully and properly protect any and all connectorized cables to
avoid transmission performance degradation associated with dust coming in contact with
connector contact points. If at all possible, and where allowed by the project timeline,
Contractor’s first choice should be to avoid this problem by refraining from installing any such
components until the risk of airborne dust and contaminants is eliminated (e.g. after floors
and ceilings are treated, and walls receive the final coat of paint).
77
SECTION 27 13 25 SINGLE-MODE FIBER BACKBONE
G. Empty adapter panel ports shall be equipped with blank panels.
H. Contractor is solely responsible for securing factory-terminated fiber cables to fiber housings
in accordance with manufacturer requirements. This includes furnishing and installing
appropriate attachment hardware at no additional charge to Owner
I. Contractor is solely responsible for ensuring compliance with proper polarity utilizing proper
(e.g., Alpha/Beta) orientation of modules.
J. Contractor is solely responsible for populating the infrastructure so that any given Module
Housing contains consistent (e.g., Alpha/Beta) orientation. For example, all 12 modules are
mounted in a sample 4U Module Housing so that that the Alpha designation is located at the
top. Deviations from this requirement are permissible only with advance written OPR
approval.
K. Contractor shall furnish and install adequate cable strain relief (e.g. cable dropouts) to
segregated, dedicated single-mode strain relief shall be provided, including adequate
provision for cable route diversity where applicable.
END OF SECTION
78
SECTION 27 13 34
DS-3 COAXIAL BACKBONE
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. The DS-3 backbone is designed to support coaxial-based DS-3 digital services. Cabling for
DS-3 digital circuits is comprised of two discrete coaxial cables for each circuit (one transmit
and one receive).
B. DS-3 coaxial backbone cables shall be equipped with BNC connectors at both ends of each
cable.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE RATING
A. Appendix E includes part numbers for CMP and CMR cable. Local or national codes may
require specific cable grading in specific applications. It is Contractor’s responsibility to install
cable that is appropriate to the environment. If Contractor installs cable that is inappropriate
to the environment (e.g. plenum-rated cable in spaces that do not require plenum cable, or
riser-rated cable in spaces that require plenum cable), Contractor shall be expected to tear
out the inappropriate cable and install appropriate cable at their sole expense.
2.2 PATCH CORDS
A. For patch cords, employ 735 cross-connect cable as specified herein. If DS-3 patch cord
lengths may exceed 6m (21 ft.), see OPR.
2.3 CABLE GRADING
A. The DS-3 infrastructure serving each facility shall utilize either 734 or 735 grade cable, which
shall be determined based upon cable lengths as specified in the Coaxial Cable Grading
Schedule below.
TABLE 3 – COAXIAL CABLE GRADING SCHEDULE

If longest cable link is… Use this grade
0-70 m (0 - 230 ft.) 735 series
71-135 m (231- 450 ft.) 734 series
Greater than 135 m (450 ft.) See OPR
2.4 MATERIALS

79
SECTION 27 13 34 DS-3 COAXIAL BACKBONE
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Where applicable, sleeves shall not be over-populated with cables. Sufficient spare capacity
shall be allowed in each sleeve to accommodate appropriate firestopping materials in
accordance with manufacturer specifications and the UL Fire Resistance Directory. Note that
manufacturers typically specify a 20% to 40% fill for their products.
B. The minimum bend radius for coaxial cable shall not be less than recommended by the
manufacturer. If no recommendation is provided or known, the minimum bend radius shall be
10 times the cable outside diameter under no-load conditions and 20 times the cable outside
diameter when the cable is under a tensile load.
C. BNC connectors shall be matched to the cable type. Manufacturer-approved methods shall
always be employed when mounting connectors on cable ends.
D. See 27 11 23 regarding cable routing and management when employing ladder rack and
basket tray.
E. Except where required to accommodate cable route diversity, coaxial cables routing into the
back of BNC bulkhead panels shall be dressed so that no cables will cross an imaginary
vertical line that bisects the patch panel.
F. Cables shall be dressed-in, Velcro® or Millepede® Mille-Ties releasable cable tied, and
G. For each rack-mounted BNC bulkhead panel, install Chatsworth Wire Management bar, and
neatly Velcro® or Millepede® Mille-Ties releasable cable tie terminated cables to bar in
accordance with requirements as set forth elsewhere in this Section 27 13 34.
H. Contractor shall furnish and install adequate cable strain relief (e.g. cable dropouts) to
segregated, dedicated coaxial strain relief shall be provided, including adequate provision for
cable route diversity where applicable.
END OF SECTION
80
SECTION 27 15 00.19
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. All Category 6 cables originate either in the MER and are routed to work area outlets, or
originate in multiple Horizontal Cross-connects and are routed to work area outlets. In no
case shall Category 6 cable runs exceed 90m (295 ft) in length.
B. T.1 demarcation extensions shall be accomplished via installation of appropriately sized

Category 6 patch panels at the near and far ends, which are interconnected by Category 6
cables in accordance with requirements set forth in this section 27 15 00.19.
C. In all new construction environments, all Category 6 horizontal cable shall be installed in
accordance with this Section 27 15 00.19. Where new horizontal cable is being added to an
existing (Legacy) infrastructure that follows an earlier version JPMC cabling Standard,
Contractor shall furnish to OPR a detailed description of deviations from this Standard, and
upon OPR written approval, follow instead the Legacy Standard. In the case of Legacy
facilities that are served by cable that performs at Category 5e level or less, category 5e
cable shall be installed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE RATING
inappropriate to the environment (e.g. plenum-rated cable in spaces that do not require
plenum cable or riser-rated cable in spaces that require plenum cable), Contractor shall be
expected to tear out the inappropriate cable and install appropriate cable at their sole
expense.
B. Only factory terminated patch cords may be utilized in JPMC facilities. UTP patch cords that
are pre-terminated (e.g., created by personnel not directly employed by the manufacturer) are
not permissible, unless previously approved in writing by OPR.
2.2 PATCH CORDS
A. All patch cords for workstations shall be of length necessary to connect devices.
B. All patch cords for printers, facsimile machines, etc. shall be of length necessary to connect
devices.
C. Quantities and lengths of TR and MER patch cords shall be furnished by the Contractor, to
ensure appropriate lengths and timely material procurement.
81
SECTION 27 15 00.19 CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL
A. Faceplate colors shall be as specified in new construction environments and in other cases
may be modified via written OPR approval to ensure compatibility with the pre-existing
environment.

2.4 MATERIALS

accordance with this Standard. Deployment shall be preceded by a management-approved
business case that includes the incremental increase in one-time costs and all recurring costs
including administrative labor and maintenance agreement for the projected life of the
infrastructure.
2.6 AUGMENTED CATEGORY 6
A. As defined elsewhere within this Standard, Category 6 cable is the default product for all UTP
cabling within JPMC facilities.
B. Category 6A shall be deployed for all new wireless access points and all new security camera
locations, and equipped with all related termination and connection materials. See SECTION
27 21 33 for full requirements for this application.
2.7 EXPOSED CABLING
A. In legacy installations that include exposed cables, the cable jacket color should match the
color of the existing exposed cable jackets.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Category 6 cables shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
B. Bundles of Category 6 cable shall be combed (neatly aligned) and carefully dressed in order
to achieve a desirable aesthetic appearance.
C. Except where required to accommodate cable route diversity, category 6 cables routing into
the back of RJ45 patch panels shall be dressed so that no cables will cross an imaginary
vertical line that bisects the patch panel (e.g. facing the back of a 48 port patch panel, cables
terminated in ports 1-12 and 25-36 shall route to the left vertical manager and cables
terminated in ports 13-24 and 37-48 shall route to the right vertical manager).
D. At the cross-connect point, all conductors of each Category 6 cable shall be terminated.
Refer to design drawings for configuration information.
82
SECTION 27 15 00.19 CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL
E. Category 6 cables shall not be kinked or unduly twisted, nor shall the integrity of the cable
sheath be compromised in any fashion. Cable bundles shall not be clinched together with
excessive force, thereby holding jacket deformation to a minimum. Tie wraps shall not be
employed for securing category 6 cables. Individual cable bend radii may be no less than
four times the cable diameter or 15 mm (0.6 in.), whichever is greater.
F. In spaces where any airborne dust or contaminants may be present, Contractor shall properly
protect any and all connectorized cables to avoid transmission performance degradation
associated with dust coming in contact with connector contact points.
G. All RJ45 terminations employ 568B terminations.
H. Wall mounted patch panels shall be provided with hinged frames or wall mounted enclosures
that swing out to provide rear access to the patch panel terminations.
I. Where the furniture system does not contain an integral raceway, and no apparent cable
management method is provided, cabling shall be neatly dressed and concealed upon review
and approval by the OPR. Velcro, double sided tape or other adhesive materials will only be
accepted if specifically stated by the OPR.
J. Cabling to wall mounted workstation outlets shall terminate in a single- or double-gang box
provided by others. Contractor shall provide the necessary connectors (as described
elsewhere) under a single single-gang faceplate. The type of faceplate to be used shall be
coordinated with the architect for color, finish, etc.
K. Cabling to floor mounted workstation outlets shall be terminated in a flush or surface mounted
poke-thru or service fitting provided by others. All cabling and connectors shall remain within
the poke-thru or service fitting housing. If necessary, the Contractor shall modify the blank
plates provided with the poke-thru or service fitting in order to accommodate the connectors.
See Section 27 05 28.32 for additional information regarding poke-thru fittings.
L. For patch panels mounted on hinged frames or wall enclosures that swing out, cables shall
approach the rear of patch panels from the hinged side to allow the patch panel to swing out
freely, after all cables have been terminated.
M. Cables shall be dressed-in, Velcro® or Millepede® Mille-Ties releasable cable tied, and
N. Contractor shall furnish and install adequate cable strain relief (e.g. cable dropouts) to
segregated, dedicated category 6 strain relief shall be provided, including adequate provision
for cable route diversity where applicable.
END OF SECTION
83
SECTION 27 21 33 CATEGORY 6A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT
SECTION 27 21 33
CATEGORY 6A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT AND SECURITY CAMERAS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Wireless LANs represent information security risk, and should only be deployed under
carefully controlled and properly managed conditions.
B. Each wireless access point (WAP) is connected to the network via two Category 6A
connections that track requirements specified in Section 27 15 00.19. .
C. To maintain plenum rating, the WAP connections shall be terminated into jacks that are
mounted in a metallic faceplate that is installed on a metallic box (WAP Work Station Outlet).
D. All Category 6A WAP cables either originate in the MER and are routed to the WAP, or
originate in the Horizontal Cross-connect and are routed to the WAP. In no case shall
Category 6A cable runs exceed 90m (295 ft) in length.
E. Except as otherwise specified in this Section 27 21 33, WAP cabling shall be integrated with
other elements of the horizontal infrastructure, employing products and execution in
accordance with Section 27 15 00.19.
F. Products and execution of Category 6A wireless access points shall be in accordance with
this Standard, including, but not limited to Sections 01 00 00, 27 05 28.29, 21 07 16, 01 45
23, 27 05 53, and 01 78 36.
NOTE: All new security camera locations shall be equipped with Category 6A and follow
the guidance within this section of the Standard.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PLENUM REQUIREMENTS
A. Where mandated by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, all wireless access point cabling shall
employ plenum rated cable and patch cords.
2.2 PATCH CORDS
A. Patch cords at the wireless access point shall be Category 6A with a preferred length of 1 m
or 2 m (3ft. or 6 ft.) where possible, with slake (service) loops managed in the horizontal
cable. Should conduit be required to the WAP outlet, Category 6A patch cords may be used
up to 5 m (16 ft.) in length to allow for potential repositioning of the WAPs.
A. The cable, information outlets, patch cords, and patch panels (where applicable) shall be as
specified.

84
SECTION 27 21 33 CATEGORY 6A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT
2.4 ASSEMBLY
A. At the WAP Work Station Outlet, materials for each wireless access point shall include
sufficient cable for two Category 6A connections, one deep device box, two information
outlets, one faceplate, and two patch cords of the required length.
B. At the telecommunications room or MER location, materials for each wireless access point
shall include sufficient cable for two Category 6A connections. If no un-terminated RJ45
patch panel ports are available in the serving telecommunications room, one new suitably
sized patch panel shall be installed. All materials including patch cords shall be as specified
in this Section 27 21 33.
2.5 MATERIALS – NEW INFRASTRUCTURES
A. In cases where the cabling infrastructure is being installed in a building not currently occupied
by JPMC, or where the new infrastructure is part of a strategic refresh of the entire existing
products shall be furnished.
2.6 PREFERRED MATERIALS
A. The preferred WAP cable color is white, but must be coordinated with GRE to satisfy
architectural site variations. See Appendix E for product listings.
2.7 EXPOSED CABLING
A. In legacy installations that include exposed cables, the cable jacket color should match the
color of the existing exposed cable jackets.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Where practicable, the WAP Work Station Outlet shall be located no greater than 1 m (3 ft)
from the WAP.
B. The WAP Work Station Outlet shall be attached to approved building elements, using suitable
fastening methods. Attachment to conduit or other pipes is not permissible. Contractor shall
coordinate device box installation details with OPR.
C. To protect cable entering the extra deep device box, pre-install Raco connector or equivalent
in the device box knockout. These connectors are equipped with a screw-down cable clamp.
To avoid de-rating the Category 6A cables, cable jacketing shall not be compressed
whatsoever by the screw-down cable clamp.
D. Except where required to accommodate cable route diversity, Category 6A cables routing into
the back of RJ45 patch panels shall be dressed so that no cables will cross an imaginary
vertical line that bisects the patch panel (e.g. facing the back of a 48 port patch panel, cables
terminated in ports 1-12 and 25-36 shall route to the left vertical manager and cables
terminated in ports 13-24 and 37-48 shall route to the right vertical manager).
85
E. At the cross-connect point, all conductors of each Category 6A cable shall be terminated.
Refer to design drawings for configuration information. In spaces where any airborne dust or
contaminants may be present, Contractor shall properly protect any and all connectorized
cables to avoid transmission performance degradation associated with dust coming in contact
with connector contact points.
F. All RJ45 terminations employ 568B terminations.
G. All cables and outlets shall be labeled in accordance with Section 27 05 53.
H. Completed horizontal cables shall be tested in accordance with Section 01 45 23.
END OF SECTION
86
SECTION 33 82 00 – COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 33 82 53
CABLE PULLING LUBRICANTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. To avoid damage to cables during their installation within conduit, cable pulling lubricants
should be employed. In all cases, this activity shall be closely coordinated with OPR.
B. Another approach that facilitates cable installation in conduit is the pre-installation of

groupings of properly sized innerduct equipped with pull strings within the conduit. See
27 05 28.34 for innerduct requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 See Appendix E for product listings.
2.2 Materials shall be as listed or shall be equivalent products of other manufacturers meeting the
intent and quality level of this specification. Materials must be compatible with the end-to-end
solution being proposed. Proposals for equivalent products must be presented to the OPR via
RFI’s, Submittals, and/or Shop Drawings. OPR written approval is required before any
substitutions are made.
2.3 In regions where the specified aerosol lubricant is not available, See OPR for suitable water-
based lubricant substitute.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. For normal cable pulls, prelubricate the conduit by spraying five to ten squirts of pulling
lubricant into the conduit before pulling. Saturate a wipe by spraying with lubricant and lightly
wipe lubricant on jacket to fully coat the cable as it enters the conduit.
B. For more difficult cable pulls, completely prelubricate the conduit. Squirt appropriate amount
of lubricant into the conduit and pull through a sponge or lubricant spreader to coat the
interior of the entire length. Wipe lubricant on cables as they enter the conduit as described
in above.
C. High efficiency spray pulling lubricants are effective with very thin coats in the range of 1 to 5
mg/cm2 of jacket surface. Estimate lubricant volume for a job using the following formula:
Q=4XnXD
Where:
Q = Quantity of lubricant in fluid ounces per 100 feet
87
n = Number of cables in conduit
D = Average cable diameter in inches
Note: A high volume trigger sprayer injects one fluid ounce per 20 sprays.
D. The appropriate quantity for use on any given pull can vary from this recommendation by
50%, depending on the complexity of the pull. Adjust the volume of pulling lubricant in
accordance with the following modifying factors:
1) Cable weight and jacket hardness – Increase quantities for stiff, heavy cable (e.g.
armored).
2) Conduit Type and Condition – Increase quantities for old, dirty, or rough conduits.
3) Conduit Fill – Increase quantities for conduit fills greater than 40%. Increase quantities
for large bundles of cable and be sure all cables are coated.
4) Number of Bends – Increase quantities for pulls with more than one bend
5) Temperature – Increase quantities for high ambient temperatures (above 27°C/80°F).
END OF SECTION
88
APPENDIX A – WTS DEFINITION AND CHECKLISTS FOR MER & TR ACCEPTANCE
Appendix A_WTS
Definition and Checklists for MER and TR Acceptance_1Jul2018.xlsx
89
APPENDIX B – GLOBAL STANDARD MATRIX FOR CRITICAL TECHNOLOGY SPACE
BUILDS
(MERs, TRs, and Co-Los)
General Notes:
This Standard shall be used as a tool to plan Critical Technology Spaces (CTS) based on WTS operational
standards. This document is not intended to replace the specific needs of those planning equipment for CTS
areas or design coordination. It shall be used in conjunction with those needs and proper design coordination.
If a standard cannot be met during the design and planning phases the group accountable to meet the
requirement shall submit a request for exception approval prior to proceeding with a deviation from the
standard. The request must be submitted via EURC using the service titled 'Exception Approval - GTI-WTS
Global Standard for Critical Technology Space Builds'. The EURC request will be routed to the exception
approvers who will review the request, approve or deny, and document any exceptions for historical record of
the sites configuration.
Due to varying business requirements and BCP plans affecting uptime needs, LOB's must be consulted for
their uptime requirement to determine if the level of resiliency needed is greater than the base requirement.
A need for enhanced resiliency may also inform other components of power and cooling systems (i.e. risers,
utility feeds, etc.)
Definition of Room Type:
A critical technology space that serves a building that is a common network distribution point for the TR’s,
within that building. This room also provides access to services & applications from the Data Center over
the WAN and PSTN.
Services Associated with Room Type:
Consist of; Telecomm equipment for WAN vendors, Core network and network distribution layer, Local
building/campus PBX, in-building cellular, Wi-Fi, etc., Limited server/compute equipment – only equipment
with proven technical adjacency requirements, and Vendor equipment specific to that floor, building or
campus (Analogue VR etc.).
Appendix B_WTS
Matrix_v1.02_1Jul2018.docx
90
Appendices APPENDIX C – Faceplate Configurations
APPENDIX C – FACEPLATE CONFIGURATIONS
Appendix C_STS
Faceplate Configurations.docx
91
APPENDIX D – GENERAL IDENTIFICATION STANDARD
Appendix D_WTS
General Identification Standard_Ver 1.0.3_1Jul2018.docx
92
Appendices APPRENDIX E – Corporate Product List
APPENDIX E – MATERIALS
JPMC has negotiated significant discounts with manufacturers and distributors for materials listed in the
Appendix E. Contractor shall deploy materials as specified in this Appendix except in such cases where
Remote Site Operations or Infrastructure Cabling Design personnel approve specific deviations in writing.
Appendix
E_Materials_1Jul2018.xlsx
93
APPENDIX F – WTS DATA CLEAN SPECIFICATION & CLEANING POLICY FOR
MER’S AND TR’S
Appendix F_STS
Data Clean Specification and Cleaning Policy for MERs and TRs.docx
94
APPENDIX G – WTS BIDDER PRICING FORM
Appendix G WTS
Bidder pricing form v8.xlsx
95
APPENDIX H – WTS CABLE DESIGN AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATION
STANDARD - WAP
Appendix H_WTS
Cable Design and Engineering Installation Standard _ WAP_v6.0.1_Bulletin NEXT.doc
96
APPENDIX I – WTS CABLE DESIGN AND ENGINEERING PATCHING STANDARD
Appendix I_WTS
Cable Design and Engineering Patching Standard_v6.0.1_Bulletin NEXT.docx
97
APPENDIX J – MER, TR AND TECHNOLOGY LAB SECURITY DESIGN STANDARD
Appendix J_Main
Equipment Room, Technology Room, and Technology Lab Security Design Standard Bulletin_NEXT.docx
98
APPENDIX K – EXCEPTION APPROVAL
Appendix
K_Exception Approval.docx
99
APPENDIX L – Low Voltage Responsibility Matrix V1.0
NOTE: The Responsibility Matrix may contain more System & Equipment Categories than may be
required for a given project. In this case rows that are not applicable to the project should be hidden.
Appendix L_Low
Voltage Responsibility Matrix V1.0.xlsx
100
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Key
Project: JPMC Legacy West - Phase 2 Abbreviation Definition Abbreviation Definition
Document: Low Voltage Responsibility Matrix L = Lead Provide design direction S = Specify Ultimate design responsibility (engineer of record/construction documents)
Updated: July 20, 2018 A = Approve Responsibility to approve design F = Furnish Furnish equipment
Verision: 1.0 C = Coordinate Coordinate with designer I = Install Install equipment
D = Design Develop concepts / show on drawings for pricing, but not to be built from
CALLISON / RTKL
BECK (other than
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR
AUDIOVISUAL
ELECTRICAL
SYSKA ICT -
SYSKA MEP
EC/TC/AVC)
3RD PARTY
SYSKA ICT
EXTENETS
JPMC GRE
JPMC DAS
SECURITY
SECURITY
TELECOM
JPMC GTI
VENDOR
VENDOR
KDC
HKS
SYSTEM & EQUIPMENT CATEGORY
1 Structured Cabling (TI Spaces)
a. Copper and fiber optic backbone L/A A A D/S F/I
b. Telecom Room racks L/A A A C C D/S F/I
c. Installation Details L/A A A D/S F/I
d. Telecom Horizontal Cabling, Terminations, & Testing L/A A A C C D/S F/I
e. Telecommunications Cable Trays (within TRs/MERs) L/A A A C C D/S F/I
f. Telecommunications Cable Trays (outside TRs/MERs) L/A A A C C D/S F/I
g. Conduits for Structured Cabling L/A A A C S D F/I
h. Power for IT systems L/A A A C D/S C F/I
i. Switch to Patch Panel Patch Cords L/A A A D/S F/I
i. Desktop Patch Cords L/A A A D/S F/I
j. Grounding – Backbone (to the busbars) L/A A A D/S C F/I
k. Grounding – Backbone (racks to the busbars) L/A A A C D/S F/I
l. Grounding – To chassis switches L/A A A C D/S F/I
m. Non-Mechanical Firestopping of Telecom Pathways L/A A A C C D/S F/I
n. Mechanical Firestopping System L/A A A C C D/S F/I
o. Telecom outlet location and mounting height. L/A A A S C D F/I
p. Supplemental Cooling in Telecommunications Rooms. L/A A A C D/S C F/I
q. Plywood, doors, walls, etc. for TR/MER Construction L/A A A S C D F/I
r. UPS systems L/A A A C D/S C F/I
s. Rack Mounted PDUs L/A A A C D/S F/I
2 IT Equipment
a. LAN/WAN L/A/S/F A A C I
b. Phones L/A/S/F/I A A C
c. Desktop L/A/S/F/I A A C
3 Wireless Network
a. Site Survey / Predictive Survey / AP Location L/A/S A A C C D D/S
b. WLAN APs L/A/F A A C C D I S
c. Cabling to APs L/A A A C C D/S F/I
4 Service Providers
a. Voice Circuits - T1/PRI/SIP/MBLs/POTS L/A/D/S A A C F/I
b. Data Circuits L/A/D/S A A C F/I
c. Conduit Pathways L/A A A C S D F/I
d. Voice demarc extensions L/A A A D/S F/I
5 DAS (Distributed Antenna System)
a. Headend L/A A A C D/S/F/I
b. Floor Distribution (cabling, terminations & cable testing) L/A A A D S F/I
c. Floor Distribution (antennas) L/A A A D F/S I
d. Fiber backbone & fiber terminations/testing L/A A A S D F/I
e. Wireless Providers Connection L/A A A C D/S/F/I
f. Conduit pathways to roof L/A A A S D/C D F/I
g. Programming & Commissioning L/A A A C D/S/F/I
h. Jumpers L/A A A S D F/I
i. Splitters L/A A A C D/S/F I
j. Fiber patch cords L/A A A S D/I F
k. Fiber Remotes L/A A A C D/S/F/I
l. Power for Fiber Remotes L/A A A S C D F/I
6 Life Safety DAS
a. Headend A L/A C C D/S/F/I
b. Floor Distribution (cabling & antennas) A L/A C F/I D/S
c. Antenna to Public Safety System A L/A C F/I D/S
7 Audiovisual
a. Containment Conduit, Junction Boxes, wireways and
other electrical rough-in L/A A A C D C S F/I
b. AC Power Receptacles and related electrical requirements L/A A A C S D F/I
c. lighting fixtures, including wall switches and zoning L/A A A D S C F/I
d. IT and Tele/data as required for AV L/A A A S D F/I
e. Room Construction, including but not liminted to framing,
walls, hanging gyp board, carpet installation, ceiling work L/A A A D/S C F/I
f. Low voltage audiovisual cabling L/A A A D/S F/I
g. Low voltage audiovisual terminations L/A A A D/S F/I
h. Ceiling speakers(with backboxes,transformers and grilles) L/A A A C D/S F/I
i. Shade and lighting control interface to AV control system L/A A A D/S F/I
j. Microphones L/A A A C D/S F/I
k. Control system and audio system programming L/A A A D/S F/I
l. Computers with keyboard and mouse L/A/S/F/I A A D
m. Testing and evaluation of AV system L/A A A D/S F/I
n. Patching of walls, repalcement of ceiling tiles, floor
carpet, etc damaged during the installation L/A A A F/I
o. Conference table connection table box L/A A A D C F/I
p. AV patch cables for end user connections L/A A A D/S F/I
q. Video Camera L/A A A D/S F/I
r. Non-CBC Training Room Camera Box L/A A A D/S I F
s. Audiovisual equipment cabinets L/A A A D/S F/I
t. Blocking for wall mounted displays L/A A A D S F/I
Prepared by Syska Hennessy Group Page 1 of 2

CALLISON / RTKL
BECK (other than
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR
AUDIOVISUAL
ELECTRICAL
SYSKA ICT -
SYSKA MEP
EC/TC/AVC)
3RD PARTY
SYSKA ICT
EXTENETS
JPMC GRE
JPMC DAS
SECURITY
SECURITY
TELECOM
JPMC GTI
VENDOR
VENDOR
KDC
HKS
SYSTEM & EQUIPMENT CATEGORY
u. Wall mounted flat panel displays L/A A A D/S F/I
v. Non-motorized wall mounted flat panel display mounts L/A A A C C C D/S F/I
w. Floor pole mounted flat panel display mounts L/A A A C C C D/S I F
x. Ceiling pole mounted flat panel display mounts L/A A A C C C D/S I F
x. Motorized wall mounted flat panel display mounts L/A A A C C C D/S I F
x. Motorized ceiling mounted flat panel display mounts L/A A A C C C D/S I F
y. Faceplate for wall and floor box L/A A A C C D/S F/I
z. Ladder rack in AV equipment rooms L/A A A D/S F/I
aa. Firestopping L/A A A D/S F/I
bb. Telecom patch cables of appropriate length L/A A A D/S F I
8 Security (Access control / surveillance)
a. Access Control Devices (Card Readers, contacts, etc.) A A D/S F/I
b. Surveillance Devices (CCTV Cameras, Headend) A A D/S F/I
c. Network drops to security panels & IP cameras within
and mounted to the exterior of Buildings B A A S D F/I
d. Access control wiring (Card Readers, Door Contacts,etc.) A A D/S F/I
e. Conduit and Pathways A A S D F/I
9 IT Move Management
a. Network Rack & Stack L/A/D/F A A C C I
b. Desktops / Monitors L/A/D/F/I A A C C C
c. Phone System / handsets L/A/D/F/I A A C C C
10 Miscellaneous
a. Sound Masking A A C F/I
b. Building Automation System A A C D/S C F/I
c. Elevator phones A L/A/D/S C F/I
d. POTS - fire alarm & elevator A L/A/D/S C
e. Lighting Controls A A C F/I
Prepared by Syska Hennessy Group Page 2 of 2

Appendix A
Definition and Checklists for MER & TR

Room Acceptance
GTI/STS-RSO
Version: 1.3.1
Updated: July 1, 2018

Appendix A
Document Status
This document is currently approved and published.
An electronic version of this document is available at:

http://sp001.jpmchase.net/sites/sprkrqjx/Documents1/Forms/AllItems.aspx
Feedback Contacts
Feedback from the readers/users of this document is critical to its value. Such Feedback can include;
- Errors
- Omissions
- Suggestions for Improvement
Please send your feedback to:
Dave Anselmo Chris Pohle

david.anselmo@jpmchase.com chris.pohle@jpmchase.com
Kevin Stewart Martin McMurray

kevin.stewart@jpmchase.com martin.mcmurray@jpmchase.com
Revision History
Version Description Date By
1.0 Developed for review 6/1/2015 D. Anselmo
1.1 Reviewed and approved 6/10/2015 D. Anselmo
1.2 Moved firestopping from shell ready to room ready 8/17/2015 D. Anselmo
1.3 Move cable test review from room ready to prod. Ready 10/5/2015 D. Anselmo
Changed door gaskets being required to only door sweeps,
1.3.1 and changes to the Shell/Room/Production Ready 7/1/2017 M. McMurray
Checklists. Added comments section to inspection tabs.
Removed "(so cabling can commence)" from Acceptance
Sign-off on Shell, Room and Production Checklists. Various
1.3.2 7/1/2018 M. McMurray
changes made to Shell and Room Ready checklists. Added
a new tab "Work to Complete".
Appendix A
How to Use the Tool

1 There are (3) room ready check points at specific stages of construction based on the level of completion defined within the check lists. These are Shell Ready,
Room Ready, and Production Ready.
2 The GTI-RES PM will manage the check list throughout the project performing the following tasks.
A. Distributing the document during initiation to the project team and general contractor.
B. Identifying information identified under 'A' in figure 1 below and distributing to WTS-RSO and GRE representatives by the beginning of the construction
phase.
C. Collecting the completed documents at the completion of walk-throughs and managing any open items identified to completion.
D. Distributing completed documents to the RSO and GRE reps once acceptance has been received and for archiving to RSO's SharePoint site.
3 If an exception has been approved, the GTI-RES PM will identify that by stating the EURC number in the area identified under 'B' in Figure 1 below.
4 Reviewers at the room ready walk through will document their approval of a line item by listing the date in their respective field next to the line item as identified
under 'C' in Table 1.
5 Reviewers may find an entry grayed out under their field for entry as noted under 'D' in Figure 1 below. The reviewer is not expected to be able to provide a
response to these items.
6 Reviewers will sign-for final acceptance at the point they are accepting the state of the room under 'E' in Figure 1 below and submit their forms to the GTI-RES
PM.
7 Sign off at Shell Ready and Room Ready typically signed off by Structured Cabling Engineer (Sitehands may act as a proxy).
8 Sign off at Production Ready typically signed off by RTM.
Figure 1.
STS (CORP-CAB, RSO, GTI-RES PM) Appendix A
Definition and Checklist for MER & TR Room Acceptance

Stage 1 of 3: Shell Ready
Address: Room Name/Number

City: Floor
State:
Punch List Date
GRE Rep: Punch List Complete Date
(First name, Last Name, SID) Acceptance Walkthrough
GTI-RES Rep:
(First name, Last Name, SID)
WTS Rep:
General Construction Approval Initials
Exceptions WTS
Plan Date Actual Date Inspection Item Description (CORP-CAB GRE
EURC # / RSO / GTI-RES PM)
Walls completed with final painting and built deck to deck.
Walls are built w/ 1-hour fire rating or greater if local code is more stringent.
Permanent door and hardware installed with unique temporary core.
Ceiling has been encapsulated to prevent firestopping from flaking and creating dust in the room.
All conduits have been completely installed and labeled in compliance with WTS standard.
Plywood backboard has been installed and painted with fire retardant paint and fire-rating certification stamp is left unpainted.
In raised floor environments, flooring installed completely, grounded, and all tile cuts completed with brushed grommets installed.
In non raised-floor environments, anti-static VCT tile is completely installed and grounded.
All duct work and diffuser installations have been completed and fire dampers installed where required to maintain fire rating of
room.
Permanent lighting and switches installed. Lighting located in aisle ways and coordinated with cabinet and rack layout.
MER/TR is vacuumed, broom swept, and cleaned to a level that is adequate to safely maintain space for pulling and terminating
cable.
Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing Approval Initials
Exceptions WTS
Generator on-site, placed and wired (MER only) (If required by LOB resiliency levels.)
Convenience power outlets have been installed, energized, tested, and labeled.
Electrical panel installed with branch circuitry routed out to cabinets/racks.
Electrical panel and branch circuitry testing completed.

Receptacles at racks or cabinets are mounted on side of overhead cable support system in hot aisle (exhaust side) on "C" channel
supports if power is routed overhead. If power routed under floor, power to be mounted on bracket installed between pedestals in
hot aisle.
Power receptacles labeled as per GRE Standards.
Air handling units have been installed, including leak detection, pipes, valves, drip pans, ductwork, condensate piping, and drains.
Grounding complete, including grounding bus bar inside MER/TR.
Cages over sprinkler heads installed.
BMS devices installed and wired to equipment (If required.).
Fire alarm, smoke detection devices and panels installed and wired, in MER/TR.
Service clearances from MEP equipment (air handlers, UPS, breaker panels) have been met.
Card reader/pin pad back boxes installed, camera backboxes installed and security micro mounted.
Technology Approval Initials
Exceptions WTS
All racks, cabinets and cable management is assembled and in their final positions.
All clearances have been met - 3 ft (915 mm) minimum service clearance from the front of equipment in racks or cabinets. 3 ft (915
mm) minimum service clearance from the rear of equipment in racks or cabinet. 4 ft (1219 mm) minimum service clearance on one
side of the row of racks or cabinets. 1 ft (305 mm) minimum additional service clearance in front of telco wall field.
Racks have been bolted to the floor, and seismic bracing installed if required.
If more than one cabinet, bay and bolt together. Cabinets have been taken off casters, leveled and bolted to slab.
Racks and cabinets have been grounded properly.
Overhead and any under floor pathways (ladder rack or cable tray) have been installed and grounded, inside MER/TR.
Pathways outside MER/TR are installed including; J-hooks, cable tray (overhead/underfloor), and any conduit pathways.
Acceptance Sign-Off
WTS: Date:
(first and last name of approver)
GRE: Date:
Comments
Section / Row Number

STS (CORP-CAB, RSO, GTI RES PM) Appendix A

Stage 2 of 3: Room Ready

City: Floor
State:
Punch List Date
GTI-RES Rep:
WTS Rep:
Exceptions WTS
Data cleaning completed; room is clean and dust free. (Based on Appendix F Requirements)
Any openings or penetrations through walls have been sealed with firestop.
Automatic closer is operational on door and final locking hardware has been installed.
Any secondary doors that lead into the room must be treated as emergency exits and must have a door contact, local alarm sounder, signage,
no handle on hallway side of door, and crash bar on inside of door.
Door sweeps have been installed on doors.
Exceptions WTS
Generator installed, commissioned, and failover tests complete (MER Only) (If required by LOB resiliency levels.).
Permanent UPS system installed, grounded, energized, tested and fully commissioned. (If required by LOB resiliency levels.).
Electrical distribution on permanent power.
EPO button (if required by code) installed, tested, covered, and identified with signage.
BMS system operational to all equipment in MER/TR. (Not monitored)
Piping at air handling units hydrostatically pressure tested throughout.
Air handling units fully commissioned and operational 24 x 7.
Fire alarm and smoke detection devices tested and operational.
Fire suppression system fully tested, commissioned and operational.
Drain flow test complete.
Security camera installed at each door; one inside the room and one outside the room both with a view of the door. (Not operational)
Card reader/pinpad at primary door wired to access control system. (Not operational)
No shutdowns will be accepted, with the exception of the Pull The Plug Tests (minimum 5 days notice to technology and all work needs to be
fully coordinated before proceeding). This test should not impact the critical power in the MER/TR due to the UPS system, but cooling units,
lighting and other non‐UPS equipment may be temporarily shut down until the generators come on line.
Exceptions WTS
Power strips mounted to rear of racks or cabinets where they will not interfere with patching, equipment mounting, or cabling; connected to
branch circuit outlets, and labeled as per the WTS standard.
Structured cabling installation complete on IT room side.
Shell Ready punch list performed and remediation completed on IT room side.
Any armored communications cable jackets have been bonded/grounded (if required).
Racks, cabinets, fiber enclosures, and patch panels labeled as per the WTS standard.
The switch chassis bonding strap has been provided for future connection to the Network Switch Chassis.
Cabling and wallphone plate installed for wall phone(s).
Cabling installed, routed and supported utilizing strain relief in a neat manner that does not block equipment mounting space or interfere with
other systems.
Carrier cabling is pulled into room, terminated, tested, and labeled. (If appropriate).
Acceptance Sign-Off
WTS: Date:
GRE: Date:
Comments

STS (CORP-CAB, RSO, GTI RES PM) Appendix A

Stage 3 of 3: Production Ready

City: Floor
State:
Punch List Date
GTI-RES Rep:
WTS Rep:
Exceptions WTS
EURC # / RSO/ GTI-RES PM)
Unique lock core has been changed to JPMC lock core.
Room signage outside the room (name and number) has been installed as per the WTS standard.
Final data clean has been completed.
Secondary door signage has been installed. (If required)
Exceptions WTS
Fire extinguisher(s), if required by code, have been installed.
BMS system to all equipment in MER/TR, with monitoring operational.
Card readers/pin pads are online and programmed in Passport with the RSO manager assigned as the approver.
Security cameras are online, calibrated, and viewable in Nice Vision.
Door alarms are programmed to monitor for immediate forced open and door held open (60 second alarms).
Exceptions WTS
All technology equipment racked in their final positions.
Floorplan mounted to a wall of the Technology Space (MER/TR).
All technology equipment patched.
All patching utilizes cable management pathways and is neatly managed.
Port replication cables are routed into the switch, neatly managed, with minimal slack. (If required).
Patch cable slack does not exceed more than 1’ on either end of the cable.
No cables are blocking fan trays or blocking equipment mounting spaces.
Structured cabling has received and reviewed structured cabling test results.
Any punch list items found upon cable test review have been corrected.
All equipment connected with the appropriate colored power cords, and neatly managed.
The switch chassis bonding strap has been connected to the Network Switch Chassis.
Wall phone installed inside room and operational.
No plastic tiewraps used to manage power or communications cabling slack or bundles.
Carrier equipment is installed and tested by the carrier and JPMC Network Engineer in its designated position.
All powered IT equipment, aside from audio‐visual or carrier equipment, must be labeled with the devices hostname and a yellow asset tag on the
front (cold aisle) side of the device. A machine generated label indicating the serial number of the device shall also be placed on the front (cold aisle)
side of the device.
All cabinets must have a yellow asset tag at the top of the front door and all racks must have a yellow asset tag at the top front in a visible area that
can be easily accessed with a barcode scanner.
All GTI systems have been entered into TAMS and the equipment inventoried in the room matches the inventory in TAMS.
All RSO signage has been installed within the room.
The red box for media storage has been installed within the room.
Acceptance Sign-Off
WTS: Date:
GRE: Date:
Comments

Critical Technology Space Work to Complete List
Country: WRM:
State:
City:
Address: Date: 6/26/18
Variance Variance
Original New Planned Actual from new from original
Milestone Completion Completion planned milestone
Index Room Acceptance Stage Date Work to Complete Assigned To Date Date completion Verified By Verified On date
1 0 0
2 0 0
3 0 0
4 0 0
5 0 0
6 0 0
7 0 0
8 0 0
9 0 0
10 0 0
11 0 0
12 0 0
13 0 0
14 0 0
15 0 0
16 0 0
17 0 0
18 0 0
19 0 0
20 0 0
21 0 0
22 0 0
23 0 0
24 0 0
25 0 0
26 0 0
27 0 0
28 0 0
29 0 0
30 0 0
31 0 0
32 0 0
33 0 0
34 0 0
35 0 0
36 0 0
37 0 0
38 0 0
39 0 0
40 0 0
41 0 0
42 0 0
43 0 0
44 0 0
45 0 0
46 0 0
47 0 0
48 0 0
49 0 0
50 0 0
51 0 0
52 0 0
53 0 0
54 0 0
55 0 0
56 0 0
57 0 0
58 0 0
59 0 0
60 0 0
61 0 0
62 0 0
63 0 0
64 0 0
65 0 0
66 0 0
67 0 0
68 0 0
69 0 0
70 0 0
71 0 0
72 0 0
73 0 0
74 0 0
75 0 0
76 0 0
77 0 0
78 0 0
79 0 0
80 0 0
81 0 0
82 0 0
83 0 0
84 0 0
85 0 0
86 0 0
87 0 0
88 0 0
89 0 0
90 0 0
91 0 0
92 0 0
93 0 0
94 0 0
95 0 0
96 0 0
97 0 0
98 0 0
99 0 0
100 0 0
Appendix B
MERs (Main Equipment Rooms)
Infrastructure Requirement Accountable Exception Design Review Stage
/ System to Meet Approval
Requirement
Schematic Design Construction
Design Development Documents
Initial Set Final Set
1. Critical Systems ‐ MERs (Main Equipment Rooms)
LOB, GRE,
Utility System N+1 (Diverse routing into facility) GRE Y Y Y
WTS
Generator LOB, GRE,
N GRE Y Y Y
System WTS
LOB, GRE,
UPS System N+1 GRE Y Y Y
WTS, GNS
Primary LOB, GRE,
N+1 with mechanical conveyance at N GRE Y Y Y
Cooling Plant WTS
Emergency power off devices, if required, are to be
installed with up protective cover as part of dual action
Emergency
station to reduce false activation; are normally
Power LOB, GRE,
open/normally closed dry contact and shall change GRE Y Y
Shutdown WTS
state upon EPO activation, and be properly labeled, i.e.,
Management
Emergency Power Off (EPO), Remote Emergency Power
Off (REPO), Remote Emergency Module Office (REMO).
LOB, GRE,
N+1 GRE Y Y Y
WTS
Must be designed to maintain humidity within the
recommended range for all “A Classes” per ASHRAE
TC9.9 2011 (Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing
CRAH/CRAC Environments).
Units LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y Y
Humidity Range, Non‐Condensing: 20% to 80% Relative WTS
Humidity with 17⁰C (62.6⁰F) Maximum Dew Point

Additional restrictions as applicable to site.

When secondary electrical distribution is deployed,
Static Transfer utilize Static Transfer Switches, with 2N redundancy, in LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
Switches the output path of UPS systems to enhance electrical WTS
system maintainability.
Redundant and diversely fed. Must be dedicated
circuits with dedicated neutral and equipment
Branch Circuit grounding conductor (EGC). No Isolated Ground (IG) LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
Distribution circuits unless required for specific equipment. WTS
Protected by Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
(TVSS) device effective at breaker panel level.
All equipment must be dual corded. The primary choice
is 208V/3‐phase power/30A, with 208V/single phase/20
Any
or 30A being allowable based on site specific
equipment
requirements, or its country specific equivalent, must
provider (i.e. LOB, GRE,
Equipment be provided at every cabinet footprint. In North Y
LOB, GNS, WTS
America 120V power must also be provided at the PDU
Transport,
(power strip) level. Proper load balancing must be
Voice, Media)
planned and maintained to prevent excessive phase
unbalance.
Generator supported, but if no generator is present,
lighting must be on battery‐backup. Lighting
occupancy sensors providing coverage throughout
LOB, GRE,
Lighting entirety of room is preferred. Must not be on dimmer GRE Y Y
WTS
switches or on same electrical panel as equipment.
Must be at least 305 mm (12 in) from cable pathways,
racks, cabinets, and equipment.
Installed to the extent necessary to detect critical alarm
Critical conditions (i.e. temperature, humidity, fire/smoke,
LOB, GRE,
System critical equipment malfunction). Requirements will be GRE Y Y
WTS
Monitoring determined by those owning and operating these
systems.
1 of 36 Revision Date: July 1, 2018 Version: 1.0.2

Appendix B
Requirement
1. Critical Systems ‐ MERs (Continued)
A condensate containment pan and/or curbing wall
Leak with leak detection is required for floor/wall supported
Detection for CRAH/CRAC units. A drip pan with leak detection is
required for ceiling mounted CRAH/CRAC units. Ceiling LOB, GRE,
Mech GRE Y Y
mounted cooling units should be installed outside the WTS
equipment/
Piping room and ducted in.

Pre‐Action sprinkler with protective cage to prevent
accidental contact and activation. Each critical
Fire LOB, GRE,
technology room must be designated as a separate fire GRE Y Y Y
Suppression WTS
zone. Gaseous fire suppression must be installed when
required by local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).
Carrier
Diversely routed in rigid conduit (RMC). Flexible LOB, GRE,
Entrances Transport Y Y Y
metallic conduit must not be used. WTS
(PoE)
Access
LOB, GRE,
provider Diversely routed in rigid conduit (RMC). Transport Y Y Y
WTS
Entrances
For access provider space (carrier room)‐to‐MER
cabling, routed in rigid conduit, with separate conduit
from each carrier to each MER. For MER‐to‐TR cabling
in multi‐tenant buildings, routed in rigid conduit, for
buildings occupied exclusively by JPMC, routed exposed Structured LOB, GRE,
Backbone Y Y Y
through sleeves vertically and through conduit, tray etc. Cabling WTS
horizontally. Wherever telecommunications conduit is
installed for backbone or access provider cabling, it
shall be pre‐provisioned with flexible fabric innerduct
(e.g. MaxCell).
For equipment requiring DC power, provide the
following:
* Power provided from diverse electrical facilities
* 48VDC Power or 3 Phase AC (dependent upon facility)
DC power (if LOB, GRE,
* Bulk DC Power (100 – 600 AMP power feeds typical GRE Y Y
required) WTS
terminated from facility to JPMC BDCBB(s)
* JPMC prefers vendor provides the largest cable size
possible (ex. 750 MCM) to JPMC; This will allow power
2. Ancillary Systems ‐ MERs (Main Equipment Rooms)
Provide Racks and Cabinets to match the following
purposes;
* 4‐post open frame racks to be used for Cabling and
Network equipment
* 19 or 23 in 2‐Post unequal flange racks to be used for WTS,
Racks / Carrier equipment, per Carrier requirements Structured
Structured Y Y
Cabinets * Server Cabinets to be used for Cabling and Server Cabling
Cabling
equipment
Existing/legacy rooms: If a carrier rack is not available,
carrier equipment should be wall mounted.


Appendix B
Requirement
2. Ancillary Systems ‐ MERs (Continued)
Provide the following for network device and cabling
equipment: 19 in. 4‐post open rack with fixed rails and
minimum depth 740 mm (29 in) outside of front rail to
outside of rear rail. Vertical cable managers shall be
sized based on cable counts and fill factors. Structured WTS,
Structured
cabling engineer to determine appropriate size based Structured Y Y
Cabling
on site requirements. Be equipped with appropriate Cabling
air baffles if equipment is mounted side by side in
adjacent racks.
Racks to be bolted to floor. Seismic bracing where
applicable. Typical rack/cabinet height is 45 RU.
Provide the following for server equipment: 700 mm
(28 in) to 800 mm (32 in) wide x 1175 mm (46 in.) to
1200 mm (48 in) deep enclosed cabinet with air dam kit
and perforated single front and double rear perforated
Racks /
doors, each with a lock. 4 in (100 mm) wide lacing bars
Cabinets WTS WTS Y Y
on both sides at front (cold aisle/intake side). 2 x PDU
mounting and vertical cable management on rear.
Cabinets to be fastened to the slab, and bayed
together. Seismic bracing where applicable. Typical
rack/cabinet height is 45 RU.
Provide the following for carrier equipment. 19 or 23 in
2‐Post unequal flange rack with Vertical cable managers
shall be sized based on cable counts and fill factors.
Structured cabling engineer to determine appropriate
size based on site requirements. 45 RU rack height. Structured WTS,
Y Y
Racks to be bolted to slab. Based on requirements from Cabling Transport
Transport. Seismic bracing where applicable. If a free
standing carrier rack is not available, carrier equipment
should be wall mounted. Carrier equipment to be
mounted in quad racks in APAC.
All connectivity/patching shall be performed within any Structured
LOB, WTS Y Y
given rack/cabinet and not between rows. Cabling
Connectivity
Fiber links are field terminated, with LC
WTS,
connectors. Connector adaptation (e.g. ST, SC) are
WTS Structured Y Y
accomplished through the use of suitable patch cords
Cabling
when required.
All chassis based copper access switches to be port
replicated into centralized patching field (only is
approved by the OPR or management). All stackable Structured
WTS Y Y
switching to follow WTS patching diagram (see Cabling
Appendix I of the WTS Cable Design and Engineering
Standards).
Patching All patching to be supported, address bend radius, and
utilize cable management solely intended for its use.
Power and data patching to utilize separate pathways. WTS,
Patching shall not be of excessive length, planning for 1' WTS Structured Y Y
of service loop on each end, and be routed neatly Cabling
providing free access for maintenance of equipment
and cabling infrastructure.
Hot/Cold Aisle: GRE,
Coordinate placement of CRAC/CRAH components Structured
GRE Y Y
delivering cool air and capturing return air with the Cabling,
layout of racks and cabinets. WTS
Layout Hot/Cold Aisle: Equipment intakes at the front of racks
GRE,
are not facing rear‐equipment exhaust from a
Structured Structured
neighboring row. Side mounted air baffles must be Y Y
Cabling Cabling,
installed in the instances where equipment is mounted
WTS
side by side in adjacent racks.

Appendix B
Requirement
Rack/cabinet elevations to be planned for growth at
Structured
switch and patching frames, and growth at server GRE, WTS Y Y
Cabling
cabinets.
3 ft (915 mm) minimum service clearance from the
Layout front of equipment in racks or cabinets. 3 ft (915 mm)
minimum service clearance from the rear of equipment
Structured
in racks or cabinet. 4 ft (1829 mm) minimum service GRE, WTS Y Y Y
Cabling
clearance on one side of the row of racks or cabinets.
1 ft (305 mm) additional service clearance in front of
telco wall field.
In access floor environments at least one full floor tile
must be free of obstruction nearest to the front and in Structured
GRE, WTS Y
back of each rack or cabinet in a row to allow under Cabling
floor access.
2 ft (610 mm) service clearance above racks and
Structured
cabinets. Cable support systems shall be the only GRE, WTS Y Y
Cabling
allowable obstruction.
Racks and cabinets must be located away from
potential sources of electromagnetic interference
Clearances
(EMI). They should be kept at least 1.22 m (4ft) away
from transformers, motors, and other potentially strong Structured
GRE, WTS Y Y Y
sources of EMI. Their location should not compromise Cabling
associated cabling pathways with regard to EMI related
separation requirements and guidelines of the
ANSI/TIA‐569 standard.
Fill planned for growth not to exceed 50% fill maximum;
bend radius of cables will be compliant with the Structured
WTS Y Y
ANSI/TIA‐568 group of standards, or manufacturer’s Cabling
requirements if those are stricter.
Conduits and sleeves for carrier media not to be shared Structured
WTS Y Y
with JPMC structured cable media. Cabling
Structured
Service loops are not allowed in the MER WTS Y
Cabling
Metallic Cable Trays:
Should be independently supported from ceiling or
walls, not preferred from cabinets and racks.
Installation must be electrical Code compliant.
Structured
Must be bonded to ground. When tray sections are not WTS Y Y
Cabling
mechanically continuous, or if section connecting
Pathways hardware is not approved as a means for providing
ground continuity, bonding conductors must be
installed across the sections.
Non Metallic Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies
(e.g., Fiber Runner):
May be attached to cabinets and racks when intended
for patching or other local connections within a row.
Structured
Otherwise must be independently supported as per WTS Y Y
Cabling
metallic cable tray requirements.
Must be fire rated as required by electrical code (i.e.
plenum, riser, etc.) and must be UL2024 or UL2024A
listed (as appropriate to application).


Appendix B
Requirement
Single point of entry into the room with a card reader/
LOB, GRE,
pin pad on the ingress and card reader only on the egress GRE Y Y
WTS, GSMA
side of the door. See Appendix J – Security Standard
Card Reader entry door lock must be fail secure in case of
power outage or fire alarm system activation unless LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
dictated otherwise by local code. See Appendix J – WTS, GSMA
Security Standard
power outage or fire alarm system activation unless LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
dictated otherwise by local code. See Appendix J – WTS, GSMA
Security Standard
Security
Cameras covering the entrance door and any other
LOB, GRE,
secondary exits from inside and outside See Appendix J – GRE Y Y
WTS, GSMA
Security Standard
Any secondary doors that lead into the room must be
treated as emergency exits and must have a door
LOB, GRE,
contact, local alarm sounder, signage, no handle on GRE Y Y
WTS, GSMA
hallway side of door, and crash bar on inside of door. See
Appendix J – Security Standard
All doors leading into the MER must be monitored for
LOB, GRE,
immediate forced open and door held open (60 Second) GRE Y Y
WTS, GSMA
alarms. See Appendix J – Security Standard
ITSM/PDPA required upon Production Ready stage and
LOB, GRE,
after for access. Card reader/pin reader will be system GSMA Y
WTS, GSMA
of record for access. See Appendix J – Security Standard
Receptacles mounted on a separate c‐channel
independently supported below ladder rack and above
rack. The receptacle facing the rack/cabinet in hot aisle
(equipment air exhausts side of cabinet, with
GRE GRE, WTS Y
electrical sockets facing the hot aisle, not the ceiling
or floor). If power routed under floor, power to be
mounted on bracket installed between pedestals in hot
Power
aisle, or per local code.
Distribution
Receptacles labeled with panel ID and circuit #. GRE GRE, WTS Y
Where diverse power feeds are deployed A‐side panel
circuits shall use black on white labels to designate the
circuit on the faceplate and B‐side panel circuits to utilize GRE GRE, WTS Y
white on black labels to designate the circuit on the
faceplate.


Appendix B
Infrastructure Requirement Accountable to Exception Design Review Stage
/ System Meet Approval
Requirement
Where diverse power feeds are deployed equipment to
have special ordered white cords plugged into A‐side GRE,
GRE Y
power connections and black cords plugged into B‐side WTS
power connections.
PDUs (Power Strips) (see Appendix E, of the WTS Cable
Design and Engineering Standards) shall adhere to the
‐ 208V/3‐phase 30A, with 208V/single phase/20 or 30A
being allowable based on site specific requirements, (or
country specific equivalent) (In North America 120V
Power
power must also be provided at the local Power
Distribution
Distribution Unit (PDU) level.
GRE,
‐ Minimum (24) C‐13 receptacles WTS Y
WTS
‐ Minimum (6) C‐19 receptacles
‐ Minimum (2) 5‐20 receptacles (in NA only)
‐ Locking input power cords
‐ Integral breakers or fuses when required by Code
‐ Ability for metering (including each phase with true
RMS reading of current and voltage)
‐ Ethernet port allowing remote readout of PDU
parameters.
3. Room Construction ‐ MERs (Main Equipment Rooms)
Naming Convention:

‐ Building abbreviations should also come from and
coordinated with GRE
‐ Room Type should reflect Technology room definitions
as identified in the space classification document (TR for GRE,
Room Signage Telecommunication Room or MER for Main Equipment GRE WTS, Y
Room) LOB
‐ Identifier should be included if there are more than one
TR located on the floor and can be listed in Numbers,
Letters, or Colors (i.e. 1, 2, A, B, Orange, Blue, etc.)
‐Updated signage should also accompany the activation
of any new technology rooms. The room signage should
be in compliance with existing standards as provided by
facilities. It should not change the look and feel of the
existing floor signage within the office space, but should
clearly indicate the room names in accordance with the
GTI technology space classification.
When applicable to the site, sign characteristics must
comply with requirements of the Americans with
GRE,
For secondary exits:
GRE WTS, Y
On the ingress side sign stating “No Entry – Emergency
LOB
Exit Only”
On the egress side sign stating “Emergency Exit Only –
Alarm Will Sound”


Appendix B
Requirement
3. Room Construction ‐ MERs (Continued)
Built deck to deck/slab to slab. All metal wire mesh
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
cages must extend slab to slab.
Minimum 1 hour fire‐rated or greater if local code is
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
more stringent.
All penetrations firestopped to maintain fire rating of
walls, and must be firestopped per the requirements of
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
this Standard, ATSM E814, UL1479, and the
manufacturer.
Where no equipment is intended to be mounted to the
wall, the drywall must be taped, spackled and sanded to
GRE GRE, WTS Y
a smooth finish. The wall must be painted a light color
to enhance room lighting.
Walls
At least two contiguous sheets of plywood 1.22 m (4 ft)
wide and 2.43 m (8 ft) high and beginning 153 mm (6 in)
above the finished floor must be installed on a wall in a
location best suited for their use.
Plywood to be:
‐ compliant with Codes
‐ kiln dried (15% max. moisture)
‐ 19 mm (¾”) thick A‐C grade (mounted with best side GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
facing the room)
‐ fastened securely to a wall
‐ Either fire rated (with a UL FR‐S classification), or if
non‐fire‐rated ‐ and if acceptable to the AHJ ‐ covered
with two coats of fire retardant paint on both sides and
edges. For fire‐rated plywood the classification stamp
must not be obscured.
Doors must be a minimum of 3 ft (915 mm) wide and 8
ft. (2.44 m) high minimum w/ no center support and
hinged to open outward (when permitted by Code).
The door must be fitted with a lock. An integrated
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
strike must be included to accommodate electronic
access control. Doors must be equipped with floor
sweeps to contain conditioned air, minimize dust
infiltration, and minimize escape of noise.
Doors
Automatic closer GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Quantity of doors defined by codes, as well as access
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
and egress requirements.
Swinging doors must be fire rated with a UL
classification label, and have been tested compliant
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
with the UL10C standard. In no case must a door in a 1
hour fire rated wall have less than a 1 hour fire rating.
‐ Suspended ceiling must not be installed in an MER.
‐ Slab to slab height must be at least 10 ft (3.05 m) and
unobstructed height at least 9 ft. (2.74 m). These
heights must be even higher if needed for cable
Ceiling pathways, or for maintenance functions, or for proper GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
air flow to and from air conditioning units.
‐‐ Exposed ceilings and sprayed on fireproofing in an
exposed ceiling must be treated (sealed) to mitigate
dust.

Appendix B
Requirement

A minimum of 500 lux (50 foot‐candles) in the
horizontal plane and 200 lux (20 foot‐candles) in the
vertical plane measured 1 m (3 ft) above the finished
floor in middle of all rack and cabinet aisles. The
lighting must be controlled by one or more switches
located near the entrance door(s) to the
Lighting room. Emergency lighting and signs must be properly GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
placed per Code or AHJ such that an absence of primary
lighting will not hamper emergency exit. Lighting
fixtures must not be powered from the same electrical
distribution panel as information and communication
technology equipment in the MER. Dimmer switches
must not be used.
Raised Access Floor or Static Dissipative VCT (106 to 109
ohms) based on design requirements to cool initial and
future IT loads.
A structural engineer shall be consulted during the
design to specify the floor loading limit. The minimum
distributed floor loading capacity shall be 7.2 kPa (150
lbf/ ft2). The recommended distributed floor loading
capacity is 12 kPa (250 lbf/ ft2). Floors must be
appropriately reinforced if equipment exceeding these
specifications is anticipated. This requirement also
Flooring applies in the case of relocation of equipment at a later GRE GRE, WTS Y Y Y
time. If extensive relocation is anticipated, the entire
floor must be appropriately reinforced.
The floor must have a minimum of 1.2 kPa (25 lb/ft2)
capacity for supporting loads that are suspended from
the bottom of the floor (for example, cable ladders
suspended from the ceiling of the floor below). The
recommended minimum hanging capacity of the floor is
2.4 kPa (50 lb/ft2). Access floor support elements must
have similar load carrying capabilities. VCT should be
bonded to ground.
If access floor is installed, the access floor tiles must be
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
finished with a high‐pressure laminate (HPL).
In MERs with access floor, power conduit and
associated cabling should be routed below the floor and
all telecommunications cable should be routed in cable
Access Floor, conveyance overhead.
if applicable If, as an exception, telecommunications cabling and
power wiring are both run below the access floor, an GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
under floor cable tray system should be used for the
routing of telecommunications cabling. Wherever
practicable, power and communications cables should
cross at right angles, and telecommunications cables
should be located in tray above power cables.


Appendix B
Requirement
Stringers to be installed as per the selected raised floor
design to support rolling load and seismic loading.
Pedestals and stringers must be grounded. GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Materials must either be non‐combustible or have a
flame spread index of 25 or less.
Access Floor,
if applicable Must comply with design requirements for depth of
floor.
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Power shall be installed below access floor and routed
in a manner that avoids blockage of airflow.
Under floor smoke detection required, where required
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
by code.
The floor, walls, and ceiling must be sealed to reduce
Dust dust. If access floor is installed, the area under the GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
access floor must be sealed.
Fire extinguishers should be installed in rooms based on
local codes, and/or must have ready access to a listed
portable fire extinguisher compliant with the NFPA 10
Fire Safety standard, local Codes and OSHA requirements. GRE GRE, WTS Y
Must not use dry chemicals, and must have a suitable
tank capacity, and appropriate fire type category
ratings.
All through‐penetrations and membrane‐penetrations
of fire rated walls and floors must be firestopped.
Installation methods and firestopping materials and
systems must be qualified for the specific circumstances
under which they will be used. Firestopping must, as a
minimum, preserve the fire rating of the penetrated
Firestopping surface(s). GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Must comply with Codes and manufacturer’s required
and recommended procedures
“F”, “T”, and “L” ratings must be chosen as required by
Code and/or an AHJ, and must be appropriate to the
situation. Where water penetration is of concern, the
firestop should have a “W” rating as well.
Grounding (Earthing) and bonding must conform to
applicable NEC requirements, local codes and bonding GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
systems specified by ANSI/TIA‐607.
Bare metal contact is required for all bonding
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
connections.
Metallic Structures (including racks, cabinets, cable
pathways, armored comms cable jackets). All open
frame racks shall be equipped with rack mounted GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
ground busbars, for the grounding of network
Bonding and
equipment.
Grounding
(Earthing)
Systems grounded (earthed) as required by
manufacturer, standards, and codes
An MER must contain at least one Secondary bonding
busbar (SBB), and may contain a Primary bonding
busbar (PBB) depending upon the room’s location and
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
function at a site. All open frame racks shall be
equipped with horizontal rack mounted ground busbars
(RBB), for the grounding of network equipment.
Horizontal rack mounted ground busbar shall be
mounted on the rear of the cabinet/rack.

Appendix B
Requirement
Chilled water or glycol piping shall be routed outside
the room and penetrate the MER at the shortest path LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
to connect to CRAC/CRAH units. Routing shall avoid all WTS
racks, cabinets and cable pathways.
If sprinklers are required within the equipment area,
fire sprinkler head location must be coordinated with
room layout so that heads shall be 18 in. (457.2 mm)
clear of any obstructions and piping routed in aisle ways
Piping as per fire codes. Sprinklers and piping must not be LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
routed directly above IT equipment or enclosures and WTS
must be routed in aisle ways instead for optimal
clearance. Above racks and cabinets there shall be no
joints to prevent against the potential for leaks from
wet systems.
If sprinklers are required within the equipment area,
LOB, GRE,
the fire sprinkler heads must be provided with wire GRE Y Y
WTS
cages to prevent accidental operation.
5‐20 duplex convenience outlets on utility power only
to be located at typical outlet height on walls GRE WTS Y
throughout the room.
Wall phones to be strategically placed for technician
access. The outlet mounting height must ensure that
Convenience the phone keypad and controls will be no greater than
GTI WTS Y
Outlets 1,372 mm (54 in) above the finished floor to comply
with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA).
JPMC wireless network access inside the room (where
GTI WTS Y
wireless access is deployed)
Secured storage and staging room should be planned in
Storage and close proximity to MER that should include a 6’w (1.83
GTI WTS Y Y Y
Staging m) x 3'd (0.91 m) work surface and one 7'h (2.13 m) x
4'w (1.22 m) shelving unit.
4. Labeling and Administration ‐ MERs (Main Equipment Rooms)
Labels to be affixed to top front and top rear of rack or
cabinet
Structured
Nomenclature: WTS Y
Cabling
Racks / <Row Letter><Position Number>
Cabinets Example: A01 means first row, first position
Type: 1.5 in. (38 mm) text lamacoid; machine printed Structured
WTS Y
text. White text on black background. Cabling
1.5 in. (38 mm) tall text placed in visible location on Structured
WTS Y
plastic bushing or on the conduit itself near the end. Cabling
Data Cable
Conduit Nomenclature <size>.<path A/B>to<Distant end room
Structured
ID>. Example: 4” A to 06TR‐B WTS Y
Cabling
Sleeves shall be labeled "Sleeve"


Appendix B
Requirement
4. Labeling and Administration ‐ MERs (Continued)
Cabinet/rack positions shall be identified by an alpha‐
numeric identifier where a letter shall identify the row
and a number shall identify the cabinet position within Structured
WTS Y
the row. Future positions left vacant shall have their Cabling
Cabinet / Rack identifiers reserved. <Row Letter><Position Number>.
Identification Example: A01. (first row, first position)
Label to be affixed to top of cabinet in the front and Structured
WTS Y
rear. Text on labels shall be at least 1 in. (26 mm) tall. Cabling
All Copper
Nomenclature:
Patch Panels
<RU><Top RU of panel > labeled on the left side of the Structured
and Fiber WTS Y
panel. Cabling
Enclosures
Example: RU38
Panel ID
All Copper
Patch Panels
serving intra‐ To Rack/Cabinet<Distant End Rack/Cabinet
Structured
room tie ID>Panel<Panel ID>Ports<End Location Port Range> WTS Y
Cabling
cabling Example: To Rack AB01 Panel RU34 Ports 25‐48
connectivity
labeling
All Copper
Patch Panels
serving intra‐ Where route diversity is employed designation strips
Structured
room tie located on termination panels for each route shall be of WTS Y
Cabling
cabling distinctly different colors.
connectivity
labeling
All Copper To<Distant End Room ID>Rack/Cabinet<Distant End
Patch Panels Rack/Cabinet ID>Panel<Panel ID>Ports<End Location Structured
WTS Y
serving inter‐ Port Range> Cabling
room tie Example : To 04TR‐B Rack AA01 Panel RU31 Ports 01‐24
cabling Where route diversity is employed designation strips
connectivity Structured
located on termination panels for each route shall be of WTS Y
labeling Cabling
distinctly different colors.
All Copper
Patch Panels <TR Designation><Panel Sequence>
serving Example: 04A‐34
Structured
workstation Panel jacks must be labeled, and include port labeling WTS Y
Cabling
cabling reflecting the Workstation ID or the Grid Location
connectivity number.
labeling
All Fiber
Enclosures <Fiber Type>to Rack/Cabinet<Distant End Rack/Cabinet
serving intra‐ ID>Panel<Panel ID>Slot<End Location Slot>Ports<End
Structured
room tie Location Port Range> WTS Y
Cabling
cabling Example: OM4 to Rack AA04 Panel RU38 Slot A Ports
connectivity 01‐12
labeling


Appendix B
Requirement
4. Labeling and Administration ‐ MERs (Continued)
All Fiber
Enclosures
serving intra‐ Where route diversity is employed designation strips
Structured
room tie located on termination panels for each route shall be of WTS Y
Cabling
cabling distinctly different colors.
connectivity
labeling
<Fiber Type>to<Distant End Room ID>Rack/Cabinet
All Fiber <Rack/Cabinet ID>Panel<Panel ID>Slot<End Location
Enclosures Structured
Slot>Ports<End Location Port Range> WTS Y
serving inter‐ Cabling
Example: OM4 to 03TR‐A Rack AA06 Panel RU32 Slot A
room tie Ports 01‐12
cabling
connectivity Where route diversity is employed designation strips
Structured
labeling located on termination panels for each route shall be of WTS Y
Cabling
All patch cables to be labeled with wrap‐around (not
flag) Brady‐type labels indicating the following on both
sides.
Patch Cables WTS WTS Y
From (on line 1): <Rack ID‐Panel ID‐Port>or<Rack ID‐
Top RU of Switch‐Blade‐Port> To (on line 2): <Rack ID‐
Panel ID‐Port>or<Rack ID‐Top RU of Switch‐Blade‐Port>
PDU (Power Strip) shall be labeled with the breaker
Power
panel ID it is served from. When cabinets are served by
Distribution
PDUs (power strips) from different sources the label for
Units (PDU) GRE GRE, WTS Y
each source shall be distinctly different colors. A white

label shall be used to designate source A while a black
(Power Strips)
label shall designate source B.
Secondary Bonding Busbar (SBB)
<Room ID> SBB<SBB # if more than one in a room>
Example: 07TR‐A SBB2
Primary Bonding Busbar (PBB)
Grounding
<Room ID>PBB GRE GRE, WTS Y
Busbars
Example: 01MER‐1 PBB
Labels for SBB and PBB must either be affixed to a
visible ‐ non‐interfering ‐ location on the busbar, or to
the wall near the busbar.
Labeling and administration will be per GRE direction to
MEP Systems GRE GRE, Y
meet design requirements and value objectives.
All powered IT equipment, aside from audio‐visual or
carrier equipment must be labeled with the devices
hostname and a yellow asset tag on the front (cold Any
aisle) side of the device. A machine generated label equipment
indicating the serial number of the device shall also be provider (i.e. LOB, GRE,
IT Equipment Y
placed on the front (cold aisle) side of the device. All LOB, GNS, WTS
cabinets must have a yellow asset tag at the top of the Transport,
front door and all racks must have a yellow asset tag at Voice, Media)
the top front in a visible area that can be easily
accessed with a barcode scanner.
Minimum of one MER per building. Each building shall
Room
be evaluated for risk and resiliency expectations with LOB, GRE,
Quantity and GRE Y Y Y
project stakeholders and business units to determine WTS
Size
any MER redundancy requirement.


Appendix B
Requirement
5. MER Room Planning ‐ MERs (Continued)
The MER should be positioned so that locations that are
restricted by building components that limit expansion
such as elevators, core, outside walls, or other fixed
building walls are avoided. Large trunk ductwork and LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y Y
piping or other items should be avoided. For the WTS
delivery of large equipment, location decisions should
factor in the need for accessibility. It is desirable to
locate the MER close to the backbone pathways.
The MER should never be located below grade, in flood
zones, or near spaces that may present a threat of
water infiltration unless preventive measures against LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y Y
water infiltration are employed. The room must be free WTS
of water or drain pipes not directly required in support
of the equipment within the room.
Room
Location The room must be located away from sources of
electromagnetic interference. Special attention should
LOB, GRE,
be given to electrical power supply transformers, GRE Y Y Y
WTS
motors and generators, x‐ray equipment, radio or radar
transmitters, and induction sealing devices.
Equipment not related to the support of the MER (e.g.,
LOB, GRE,
piping, ductwork, pneumatic tubing, etc.) shall not be GRE Y Y Y
WTS
installed in, pass through, or enter the MER.
MER rooms must not be a pass through to other rooms,
LOB, GRE,
and MER rooms must not be located behind other GRE Y Y Y
WTS
rooms that act as a pass through.
MER Rooms shall not be located in areas susceptible to LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y Y
heat gain WTS
Room Rooms must not have any windows. GRE LOB, GRE,
Y Y Y
Location WTS
Condensate containment pans/curbing with leak
CRAC/CRAH detection required for floor/ wall supported CRAC units.
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Units Drip pan with leak detection required for ceiling
mounted CRAC units.
Fire
Suppression Located in GRE controlled space GRE GRE GRE, WTS Y Y Y
Systems
AutoCAD is the minimum required design software. The
project engineer must identify to the project team the
AutoCAD save version necessary to share files
Design Tools When shared electronically, documents must be GRE GRE, WTS Y Y Y
provided in both PDF and DWG file formats. All
drawings must be scaled and the drawing must identify
the scale that is used.

Appendix B
TRs (Telecommunications Rooms)
Requirement
1. Critical Systems ‐ TRs (Telecommunications Rooms)
Single Source, except for locations where there are
LOB, GRE,
Utility System Traders, Call Centers, or where LOB requirements GRE Y Y Y
WTS
demand them.
Not Required, except for locations where there are
Generator LOB, GRE,
Traders, Call Centers, or where LOB requirements GRE Y Y Y
System WTS
demand them.
Not required, except for locations where there are
LOB, GRE,
UPS System Traders, Call Centers, or where LOB requirements GRE Y Y Y
WTS, GNS
demand them.
N with mechanical conveyance at N – Portable air
conditioning unit(s) must be provided an L630R
Primary receptacle along with associated means for LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y Y
Cooling Plant exhausting hot air and disposing of condensate. WTS
These units must not be stored in a TR or in an
MER.
Emergency
station to reduce false activation; are normally
Power LOB, GRE,
open/normally closed dry contact and shall change GRE Y Y
Shutdown WTS
state upon EPO activation, and be properly labeled, i.e.,
Management
CRAH/CRAC LOB, GRE,
N GRE Y Y Y
Units WTS
recommended range for all “A Classes” per ASHRAE
TC9.9 2011 (Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing
Environments).
CRAH/CRAC LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
Units Humidity Range, Non‐Condensing: 20% to 80% Relative WTS


Redundant and diversely fed A/B circuits to racks.
Lowest acceptable level of redundancy is two circuits
diversely routed from a common breaker panel, but
more redundancy should be provided if practical.
Branch Circuit Circuits must be dedicated including dedicated neutral LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
Distribution and equipment grounding conductor (EGC). WTS
No Isolated Ground (IG) circuits unless required for
specific equipment.
Protected by Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
(TVSS) device effective at breaker panel level.
All equipment should be dual corded.
The primary choice is 208V/3‐phase power/30A, with
Any
208V/single phase/20 or 30A being allowable based on
equipment
site specific requirements, or its country specific
provider (i.e. LOB, GRE,
Equipment equivalent, must be provided at every cabinet Y
LOB, GNS, WTS
footprint. In North America 120V power must also be
Transport,
provided at the PDU (power strip) level. Proper load
Voice, Media)
balancing must be planned and maintained to prevent
excessive phase unbalance.


Appendix B
Requirement

1. Critical Systems ‐ TRs (Continued)
A minimum of 500 lux (50 foot‐candles) in the horizontal
plane and 200 lux (20 foot‐candles) in the vertical plane
measured 1 m (3 ft) above the finished floor in middle of
all rack and cabinet aisles. The lighting must be
controlled by one or more switches located near the
entrance door(s) to the room. Emergency lighting and LOB, GRE,
Lighting GRE Y Y
signs must be properly placed per Code or AHJ such that WTS
an absence of primary lighting will not hamper
emergency exit. Lighting fixtures must not be powered
from the same electrical distribution panel as
information and communication technology equipment
in the TR. Dimmer switches must not be used.
conditions (i.e. temperature, humidity, fire/smoke, critical
Critical
equipment malfunction). LOB, GRE,
System GRE Y Y
Requirements will be determined by those owning and WTS
Monitoring
operating these systems.
A condensate containment pan and/or curbing wall with
Leak leak detection is required for floor/wall supported
Detection for CRAH/CRAC units. A drip pan with leak detection is LOB, GRE,
Mech required for ceiling mounted CRAH/CRAC units. Ceiling GRE Y Y
WTS
equipment / mounted cooling units should be installed outside the
Piping room and ducted in.
Wet Fire Suppression Sprinkler permitted; Pre‐Action
Fire Suppression Sprinkler not required. Sprinkler to
Fire have protective cage to prevent accidental contact LOB, GRE,
and activation Gaseous fire suppression must be GRE Y Y Y
Suppression WTS
installed when required by local authority having
jurisdiction (AHJ).
For MER‐to‐TR cabling in multi‐tenant buildings, routed
in rigid conduit. For buildings occupied exclusively by
JPMC, routed exposed through sleeves/slots vertically
Structured LOB, GRE,
Backbone and through rigid conduit, tray etc. horizontally. Y Y
Cabling WTS
Wherever telecommunications conduit is installed for
backbone cabling, it shall be pre‐provisioned with
flexible fabric innerduct (e.g. MaxCell).
2. Ancillary Systems ‐ TRs (Telecommunications Rooms)
outside of rear rail. Vertical cable managers shall be
sized based on cable counts and fill factors.
Structured cabling engineer to determine WTS,
Structured
Racks appropriate size based on site requirements. Be Structured Y Y
Cabling
equipped with appropriate air baffles if Cabling
equipment is mounted side by side in adjacent
racks. Racks to be bolted to floor. Seismic bracing
where applicable. 45 RU rack height. Network racks
are not to be used for servers.


Appendix B
Requirement
2. Ancillary Systems ‐ TRs (Continued)
All connectivity/patching shall be performed within
any given rack/cabinet and not between rows. Structured
LOB, WTS Y Y
Cabling
Connectivity Fiber links are field terminated, with LC Structured WTS

connectors. Connector adaptation (e.g. ST, SC) are Cabling
accomplished through the use of suitable patch cords Y Y
when required.
All chassis based copper access switches to be
port replicated into centralized patching field (only
is approved by the OPR or management). All Structured
Patching stackable switching to follow WTS patching WTS Y Y
Cabling
diagram (see Appendix 1 of the WTS Cable Design
and Engineering Standards).
All patching to be supported, address bend radius, and
utilize cable management solely intended for its use.
Power and data patching to utilize separate pathways.
Patching shall not be of excessive length, planning for Structured
Patching WTS Y Y
1' of service loop on each end, and be routed neatly Cabling
providing free access for maintenance of equipment
and cabling infrastructure.
Hot/Cold Aisle:
GRE,
Coordinate placement of CRAC/CRAH components
Structured
delivering cool air and capturing return air with the GRE Y Y
Cabling,
layout of racks. WTS
Hot/Cold Aisle: Equipment intakes at the front of racks
are not facing rear‐equipment exhaust from a GRE,
Layout neighboring row. Side mounted air baffles must be Structured Structured
Y Y
installed in the instances where equipment is mounted Cabling Cabling,
side by side in adjacent racks. WTS
Rack/cabinet elevations to be planned for growth at
Structured
switch and patching frames, and growth at server GRE, WTS Y Y
Cabling
cabinets.
3 ft (915 mm) minimum service clearance from the
front of equipment in racks or cabinets. 3 ft (915
mm) minimum service clearance from the rear of
equipment in racks or cabinet. 4 ft (1829 mm) Structured
WTS Y Y Y
minimum service clearance on one side of the row of Cabling
racks or cabinets. 1 ft (305 mm) additional service
clearance in front of telco wall field.
Clearances
must be free of obstruction nearest to the front and Structured
in back of each rack or cabinet in a row to allow under WTS Y
Cabling
floor access.
cabinets. Cable support systems shall be the only Structured
WTS Y Y
allowable obstruction. Cabling

Appendix B

Requirement
Racks must be located away from potential sources of
electromagnetic interference (EMI). They should be
kept at least 1.22 m (4ft) away from transformers,
motors, and other potentially strong sources of EMI. Structured
Clearances Their location should not compromise associated WTS Y Y
Cabling
cabling pathways with regard to EMI related
separation requirements and guidelines of the
ANSI/TIA‐569 standard.
bend radius of cables will be compliant with the Structured
WTS Y Y
ANSI/TIA‐568 group of standards, or manufacturer’s Cabling
requirements if those are stricter.
Conduits and sleeves for carrier media not to be shared Structured
WTS Y Y
with JPMC structured cable media Cabling
Service loops for cabling to telecommunications
outlets to be stored at telecommunications outlet and Structured
WTS Y
not in the TR. Cabling
Must be independently supported from ceiling or walls,
not from cabinets and racks.
Installed with at least 12 in (305 mm) clearance above
tray.
Pathways Installed 4 in – 6 in (101.6mm – 152.4 mm) above rack
or cabinet. Structured
WTS Y Y
Installation must be electrical Code compliant. Cabling
Must be bonded to ground. When tray sections are not
mechanically continuous, or if section connecting
hardware is not approved as a means for providing
ground continuity, bonding conductors must be
installed across the sections.
Non Metallic Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies:
May be attached to cabinets and racks when intended
for patching or other local connections within a row.
Otherwise must be independently supported as per Structured
metallic cable tray requirements. WTS Y Y
Cabling
Single point of entry into the room with a card reader/
pin pad on the ingress and card reader only on the LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
egress side of the door. WTS, GSMA
Card Reader entry door lock must be fail secure in
case of power outage or fire alarm system activation LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
Security unless otherwise dictated by local code. WTS, GSMA

Cameras covering the entrance door and any other LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
secondary exits from inside and outside. WTS, GSMA
Any secondary doors that lead into the room must be
treated as emergency exits and must have a door LOB, GRE,
contact, local alarm sounder, signage, no handle on GRE Y Y
WTS, GSMA
hallway side of door, and crash bar on inside of door.

Appendix B

Requirement
All doors leading into the TR must be monitored for GRE LOB, GRE,
immediate forced open and door held open (60 Second) WTS, GSMA Y Y
Security alarms.
GSMA LOB, GRE,
Access logs will not be required in rooms. Card WTS, GSMA Y
reader/pin reader will be system of record for access.
independently supported below ladder rack and
above rack. The receptacle facing the rack/cabinet in
hot aisle (equipment air exhaust side of cabinet,
GRE GRE, WTS Y
with electrical sockets facing the hot aisle, not
the ceiling or floor). If power routed under floor,
power to be mounted on bracket installed between
pedestals in hot aisle.
Receptacles labeled with panel ID and circuit #.
GRE GRE, WTS Y
Where diverse power feeds are deployed A‐side panel
circuits shall use black on white labels to designate the
circuit on the faceplate and B‐side panel circuits to
GRE GRE, WTS Y
utilize white on black labels to designate the circuit on
the faceplate.
PDU (Power Strip) shall be labeled with the breaker
panel ID it is served from. When racks are served by
PDUs (power strips) from different sources the label for
each source shall be distinctly different colors. A white GRE GRE, WTS Y
Power label shall be used to designate source A while a black
Distribution label shall designate source B.
have special ordered white cords plugged into A‐side
power connections and black cords plugged into B‐side GRE GRE, WTS Y
power connections.
‐ 208V/3‐phase 30A (or country specific equivalent) ( In
North America 120V power must also be provided at
the local Power Distribution Unit (PDU) level.
WTS GRE, WTS Y
‐ Ability for metering (including each phase with true
RMS reading of current and voltage)
- ‐ Ethernet port allowing remote readout of PDU
parameters.


Appendix B

Infrastructure / Requirement Accountable Exception Design Review Stage
System to Meet Approval
Requirement
3. Room Construction ‐ TRs (Telecommunications Rooms)
Naming Convention:

‐ Building abbreviations should also come from and
coordinated with GRE
‐ Room Type should reflect Technology room definitions as
identified in the space classification document (TR for
Telecommunication Room or MER for Main Equipment GRE GRE, WTS, LOB Y
Room Signage
Room)
‐ Identifier should be included if there are more than one
TR located on the floor and can be listed in Numbers,
Letters, or Colors (i.e. 1, 2, A, B, Orange, Blue, etc.)
‐Updated signage should also accompany the activation of
any new technology rooms. The room signage should be
in compliance with existing standards as provided by
facilities. It should not change the look and feel of the
existing floor signage within the office space, but should
clearly indicate the room names in accordance with the
GTI technology space classification.
To be placed outside every TR entrance
When applicable to the site, sign characteristics must
comply with requirements of the Americans with
For secondary exits: GRE GRE, WTS, LOB Y
Room Signage
On the ingress side sign stating “No Entry – Emergency Exit
Only”
On the egress side sign stating “Emergency Exit Only –
Alarm Will Sound”
Built deck to deck/slab to slab GRE GRE, WTS Y Y

Minimum 1 hour fire‐rated or greater if local code is more
stringent. GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
this Standard, ATSM E814, UL1479, and the manufacturer.
Where no equipment is intended to be mounted to the
wall, the drywall must be taped, spackled and sanded to a
GRE GRE, WTS Y
smooth finish. The wall must be painted a light color to
enhance room lighting.
At least one sheet of plywood 1.22 m (4 ft) wide and 2.43
Walls m (8 ft) high and beginning 153 mm (6 in) above the
finished floor must be installed on a wall in a location best
suited for its use.
Plywood to be:
‐ compliant with Codes
‐ kiln dried (15% max. moisture)
‐ 19 mm (¾”) thick A‐C grade (mounted with best side GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
facing the room)
‐ fastened securely to a wall
‐ Either fire rated (with a UL FR‐S classification), or if non‐
fire‐rated ‐ and if acceptable to the AHJ ‐ covered with two
coats of fire retardant paint on both sides and edges. For
fire‐rated plywood the classification stamp must not be
obscured.

Appendix B
Requirement
3. Room Construction ‐ TRs (Continued)
Doors must be a minimum of 3 ft (915 mm) wide and 8 ft.
(2.44 m) high minimum w/ no center support and hinged
to open outward (when permitted by Code). The door
must be fitted with a lock. An integrated strike must be
Doors included to accommodate electronic access control. Doors GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
must be equipped with gaskets floor sweeps to contain
conditioned air, minimize dust infiltration, and minimize
escape of noise.
Automatic closer
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Quantity of doors defined by codes, as well as access and
egress requirements. GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Rated to maintain fire rating of room, but no less than 1 ½
hour for 1 hour rated walls and no less than ¾ hour for 1
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
hour rated walls.
Doors
Ceiling ‐ Suspended ceiling must not be installed in a TR.
unobstructed height at least 9 ft. (2.74 m). These heights
must be even higher if needed for cable pathways, or for
maintenance functions, or for proper air flow to and from GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
air conditioning units.
‐ Exposed ceilings and sprayed on fireproofing in an
exposed ceiling must be treated (sealed) to mitigate dust.
all rack and cabinet aisles. The lighting must be controlled
by one or more switches located near the entrance door(s)
to the room. Emergency lighting and signs must be
Lighting properly placed per Code or AHJ such that an absence of GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
primary lighting will not hamper emergency exit. Lighting
technology equipment in the TR. Dimmer switches must
not be used.


Appendix B
Requirement
future IT loads.
A structural engineer shall be consulted during the design to
specify the floor loading limit. The minimum distributed
floor loading capacity shall be 7.2 kPa (150 lbf/ ft2). The
recommended distributed floor loading capacity is 12 kPa
(250 lbf/ ft2). Floors must be appropriately reinforced if
equipment exceeding these specifications is anticipated.
This requirement also applies in the case of relocation of
Flooring equipment at a later time. If extensive relocation is GRE GRE, WTS Y Y Y
anticipated, the entire floor must be appropriately
reinforced.
capacity for supporting loads that are suspended from the
bottom of the floor (for example, cable ladders suspended
from the ceiling of the floor below). The recommended
minimum hanging capacity of the floor is 2.4 kPa (50 lb/ft2).
Access floor support elements must have similar load
carrying capabilities. VCT should be bonded to ground.
finished with a high‐pressure laminate (HPL). GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
In TRs with access floor, power conduit and associated
cabling should be routed below the floor and all
telecommunications cable should be routed in cable
conveyance overhead.
If, as an exception, telecommunications cabling and power
wiring are both run below the access floor, an under floor
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
cable tray system should be used for the routing of
telecommunications cabling. Wherever practicable, power
and communications cables should cross at right angles, and
Access Floor, if telecommunications cables should be located in tray above
applicable power cables.
Materials must either be non‐combustible or have a flame
spread index of 25 or less.
GRE, WTS
design to support rolling load and seismic loading. GRE
Pedestals and stringers must be grounded.

Must comply with design requirements for depth of floor.
Power shall be installed below access floor and routed in a GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
manner that avoids blockage of airflow.
Under floor smoke detection, where required by code. GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
The floor, walls, and ceiling must be sealed to reduce dust. If
access floor is installed, the area under the access floor
Dust GRE GRE, WTS Y
must be sealed.
Fire extinguishers to be installed in rooms based on local
codes, and/or must have ready access to a listed portable
fire extinguisher compliant with the NFPA 10 standard, local
Fire Safety Codes and OSHA requirements. GRE GRE, WTS Y
Must not use dry chemicals, and must have a suitable tank
capacity, and appropriate fire type category ratings.


Appendix B
Requirement
All through‐penetrations and membrane‐penetrations of
Firestopping fire rated walls and floors must be firestopped. GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Installation methods and firestopping materials and systems
Grounding (Earthing) and bonding should conform to
applicable NEC requirements, local codes and bonding GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
systems specified by ANSI/TIA‐607.
Bare metal contact is required for all bonding connections.
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
pathways, armored comms cable jackets). All open frame
racks shall be equipped with rack mounted ground busbars, GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Bonding and
Grounding for the grounding of network equipment.
(Earthing) Systems grounded (earthed) as required by manufacturer,
standards, and codes. A TR must contain at least one
Secondary Bonding Busbar (SBB). All open frame racks shall
be equipped with horizontal rack mounted ground busbars GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
(RBB), for the grounding of network equipment. Horizontal
rack mounted ground busbar shall be mounted on the rear
of the cabinet/rack.
Chilled water or glycol piping shall be routed outside the
room and penetrate the MER at the shortest path to
connect to CRAC/CRAH units. Routing shall avoid all racks, GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y
cabinets and cable pathways.
If sprinklers are required within the equipment area, fire
sprinkler head location must be coordinated with room
layout so that heads shall be 18 in. (457.2 mm) clear of any
obstructions and piping routed in aisle ways as per fire
GRE LOB, GRE, WTS
codes. Sprinklers and piping must not be routed directly Y Y
Piping above IT equipment or enclosures and must be routed in
aisle ways instead for optimal clearance.
If sprinklers are required within the equipment area, the fire
sprinkler heads must be provided with wire cages to prevent GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y
accidental operation.
5‐20 duplex convenience outlets on utility power only to be
located at typical outlet height on walls throughout the GRE WTS Y
room.
Wall phones to be strategically placed for technician access.
The outlet mounting height must ensure that the phone
Convenience
keypad and controls will be no greater than 1,372 mm (54 GTI WTS Y
Outlets
in) above the finished floor to comply with requirements of
the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
wireless access is deployed) GTI WTS Y
4. Labeling and Administration ‐ TRs (Telecommunications Rooms)
cabinet
Nomenclature: Structured
WTS Y
<Row Letter><Position Number> Cabling
Example: A01 means first row, first position
Racks
Type: 1.5 in. (38 mm) text lamacoid. White text on black Structured
background. WTS Y
Cabling
Nomenclature <size>.<path A/B>to<Distant end room
ID>. Example: 4” A to 06TR‐B Structured
WTS Y
Sleeves shall be labeled "Sleeve"" Cabling

Appendix B
Requirement
4. Labeling and Administration ‐ TRs (Continued)
1.5 in. (38 mm) tall text placed in visible location on plastic
bushing or on the conduit itself near the end.
Data Cable Structured
WTS Y
Conduit Cabling
Rack positions shall be identified by an alpha‐numeric
identifier where a letter shall identify the row and a number
shall identify the cabinet position within the row. Future Structured
positions left vacant shall have their identifiers reserved. WTS Y
Rack Cabling
Identification <Row Letter><Position Number>. Example: A01. (first row,
first position)
Label to be affixed to top of cabinet in the front and rear. Structured
Text on labels shall be at least 1 in. (26 mm) tall. WTS Y
Cabling
All Copper Patch Nomenclature:
Panels and Fiber Panel ID ‐ <RU><Top RU of panel > labeled on the left side of Structured
WTS Y
Enclosures Panel the panel. Example: RU38 Cabling
ID
All Copper Patch To Rack/Cabinet<Distant End Rack/Cabinet ID>Panel<Panel Structured
Panels serving ID>Ports<End Location Port Range> Cabling
WTS Y
intra‐room tie Example: To Rack AB01 Panel RU34 Ports 25‐48
labeling Cabling
To<Distant End Room ID>Rack/Cabinet<Distant End
All Copper Patch Rack/Cabinet ID>Panel<Panel ID>Ports<End Location Port Structured
Panels serving WTS Y
Range> Cabling
inter‐room tie Example : To 04TR‐B Rack AA01 Panel RU31 Ports 01‐24
cabling
Where route diversity is employed designation strips
labeling Cabling
All Copper Patch <TR Designation><Panel Sequence>
Panels serving
workstation Example: 04A‐34 Structured Structured
Y
cabling Cabling Cabling, WTS
connectivity Panel jacks must be labeled with Workstation ID
labeling
<Fiber Type>to Rack/Cabinet<Distant End Rack/Cabinet
ID>Panel<Panel ID>Slot<End Location Slot>Ports<End
All Fiber Location Port Range> Structured
Enclosures serving Example: OM4 to Rack AA04 Panel RU38 Slot A Ports 01‐ WTS Y
Cabling
intra‐ room tie 12Ports 01‐12
cabling
labeling located on termination panels for each route shall be of Structured
WTS Y
distinctly different colors. Cabling
<Rack/Cabinet ID>Panel<Panel ID>Slot<End Location
All Fiber Structured
Slot>Ports<End Location Port Range> WTS Y
Enclosures serving Cabling
Example: OM4 to 03TR‐A Rack AA06 Panel RU32 Slot A
inter‐ room tie
Ports 01‐12
cabling
labeling located on termination panels for each route shall be of Structured
WTS Y
distinctly different colors. Cabling

Appendix B
Requirement
4. Labeling and Administration ‐ TRs (Continued)
All patch cables to be labeled with wrap‐around (not flag)
Brady‐type labels indicating the following on both sides.
From (on line 1): <Rack ID‐Panel ID‐Port>or<Rack ID‐Top
Patch Cables RU of Switch‐Blade‐Port> To (on line 2): <Rack ID‐Panel ID‐ WTS WTS Y
Port>or<Rack ID‐Top RU of Switch‐Blade‐Port>
PDU (Power Strip) shall be labeled with the breaker panel
Power ID it is served from. When cabinets are served by PDUs
Distribution Units (power strips) from different sources the label for each
source shall be distinctly different colors. A white label GRE GRE, WTS Y
(PDU)
(Power Strips) shall be used to designate source A while a black label shall
designate source B.
Secondary Bonding Busbar (SBB)
<Room ID>SBB<SBB # if more than one in a room>
Grounding Example: 07TR‐A SBB2
Label for SBB must either be affixed to a visible ‐ non‐ GRE GRE, WTS Y
Busbars
interfering ‐ location on the busbar, or to the wall near the
busbar.
MEP Systems meet design requirements and value objectives. GRE GRE, WTS Y
hostname and a yellow asset tag on the front (cold aisle)
side of the device. A machine generated label indicating
Any equipment
the serial number of the device shall also be placed on the provider (i.e.
IT Equipment front (cold aisle) side of the device. All cabinets must have Y
LOB, GNS,
a yellow asset tag at the top of the front door and all racks Transport, Voice, LOB, GRE,
must have a yellow asset tag at the top front in a visible WTS
Media)
area that can be easily accessed with a barcode scanner.
5. TR Room Planning ‐ TRs (Telecommunications Rooms)
There must be a minimum of one TR per floor and it shall
house equipment and cabling for the floor, or floor area, it
Room Quantity serves. TR's shall be aligned vertically in multi‐floor
LOB, GRE, Y Y Y
and Size buildings and be rectangular in shape. Quantity per floor GRE
WTS
shall be based on cable distance limitations.
TRs are for use of JPMC and in some cases their business
partners. Common telecommunications rooms are located
Common in the building core of multi‐tenant buildings, are for

Telecommunicatio shared use of all building tenants, and shall not be used as LOB, GRE, Y Y Y
GRE
n Rooms a location for JPMC equipment or connections. WTS


Appendix B
Requirement
5. TR Room Planning ‐ TRs (Continued)
The TR should be positioned so that locations that are
restricted by building components that limit expansion such
as elevators, core, outside walls, or other fixed building
Y Y Y
walls are avoided. Large trunk ductwork and piping or other GRE LOB, GRE, WTS
items should be avoided. For the delivery of large
equipment, location decisions should factor in the need for
The TR should never be located below grade, in flood zones,
or near spaces that may present a threat of water
Y Y Y
infiltration unless preventive measures against water GRE LOB, GRE, WTS
infiltration are employed. The room must be free of water
The room must be located away from sources of
electromagnetic interference. Special attention should be
Y Y Y
GRE LOB, GRE, WTS
Room Location given to electrical power supply transformers, motors and
d d
Equipment not related to the support of the TR (e.g., piping,
ductwork, pneumatic tubing, etc.) should not be installed in, GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y Y
pass through, or enter the TR.
TRs must be positioned in an accessible area on each floor,
e.g., a common hallway. GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y
TR rooms must not be a pass through to other rooms, and
TR rooms must not be located behind other rooms that act GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y
h h
TR Rooms shall not be located in areas susceptible to heat
gain GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y Y
Rooms must not have any windows.
GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y Y

Condensate containment pans/curbing with leak detection
required for floor/ wall supported CRAC units. Drip pan with
leak detection required for ceiling mounted CRAC units.

CRAC/CRAH Units GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Y
Fire Suppression Located in GRE controlled space
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y Y
Systems
Design Tools When shared electronically, documents must be provided in GRE GRE, WTS Y Y Y
both PDF and DWG file formats. All drawings must be scaled
and the drawing must identify the scale that is used.


Appendix B
Colocation Facilities (Co‐Lo)
Requirement
1. Critical Systems ‐ Colocation Facilities (Co‐Lo)
N+1 (Diverse routing into facility)
Utility System GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y Y
N
Generator System GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y Y
N+1 LOB, GRE,
UPS System GRE Y Y Y
WTS, GNS
Primary Cooling N+1 with mechanical conveyance at N
Plant
Emergency Power station to reduce false activation; are normally
open/normally closed dry contact and shall change state
Shutdown Y Y
GRE LOB, GRE, WTS
Management upon EPO activation, and be properly labeled, i.e.,
N+1
recommended range for all “A Classes” per ASHRAE TC9.9
2011 (Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing
Environments).

CRAH/CRAC Units
Humidity Range, Non‐Condensing: 20% to 80% Relative GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y


When secondary electrical distribution is deployed, utilize
Static Transfer Static Transfer Switches, with 2N redundancy, in the
output path of UPS systems to enhance electrical system GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y Y
Switches
maintainability.
Redundant and diversely fed. Must be dedicated circuits
with dedicated neutral and equipment grounding
Branch Circuit conductor (EGC). No Isolated Ground (IG) circuits unless
GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y
Distribution required for specific equipment.
Protected by Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS)
device effective at breaker panel level.
All equipment must be dual corded. The primary choice
is 208V/3‐phase power/30A, with 208V/single phase/20
or 30A being allowable based on site specific Any equipment
requirements, or its country specific equivalent, must be provider (i.e.
provided at every cabinet footprint. In North America LOB, GNS, Y
Equipment LOB, GRE, WTS
120V power must also be provided at the PDU (power Transport, Voice,
strip) level. Proper load balancing must be planned and Media)
maintained to prevent excessive phase unbalance.
Generator supported. Install lighting occupancy sensors
providing coverage throughout entirety of room. Must
not be on dimmer switches or on same electrical panel as
Lighting GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y
equipment. Must be at least 305 mm (12 in) from cable
pathways, racks, cabinets, and equipment.
conditions (i.e. temperature, humidity, fire/smoke,
Critical System critical equipment malfunction).
GRE LOB, GRE, WTS Y Y
Monitoring Requirements will be determined by those owning and
operating these systems.

Appendix B
Requirement
1. Critical Systems ‐ Colocation Facilities (Continued)
A condensate containment pan and/or curbing wall with
leak detection are required for floor/wall supported
Leak Detection for CRAH/CRAC units. A drip pan with leak detection is required
LOB, GRE,
Mech equipment for ceiling mounted CRAH/CRAC units. Ceiling mounted GRE Y Y
WTS
/ Piping cooling units should be installed outside the room and
ducted in.

Pre‐Action sprinkler with protective cage to prevent
accidental contact and activation. Each critical technology

room must be designated as a separate fire zone. Gaseous LOB, GRE, Y Y Y
Fire Suppression GRE
fire suppression must be installed when required by local WTS
authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).
Carrier Entrances 2 access providers with diverse entrances separated by a LOB, GRE,

minimum of 20 meters (65 feet) Transport Y Y Y
(PoE) WTS
Poe/Carrier Diversely routed in rigid metallic conduit. Flexible metallic
conduit must not be used. Y Y Y
Cabling
Diversely routed fiber for cabling from POE to JPMC secure
Backbone space, in rigid metallic conduit. For cable that remains in Structured Cabling LOB, GRE, Y Y
JPMC secure space, normal cable jacketing is permissible. WTS
For equipment requiring DC power, provide the following:
Power provided from colocation providers diverse
electrical facilities
48VDC Power or 3 Phase AC (dependent upon facility)

Bulk DC Power (100 – 600 AMP power feeds terminated
Y Y
from facility to JPMC BDCBB(s)
DC power (if LOB, GRE,
JPMC prefers colocation vendor provides the largest cable GRE
required) WTS
size possible (ex. 750 MCM) to JPMC; This will allow power
2. Ancillary Systems ‐ Colocation Facilities (Co‐Lo)

outside of rear rail. Minimum 300 mm (12 in) vertical

cable managers at the front (cold aisle/intake side) on both
WTS, Y Y
sides. Be equipped with appropriate air baffles if
Structured Cabling Structured
equipment is mounted side by side in adjacent racks.
Cabling
Racks to be bolted to floor. Seismic bracing where
applicable. 45 RU rack height. Network racks are not to be
used for servers.
Racks/Cabinets
Provide the following for server equipment: 700 mm (28
in) to 800 mm (32 in) wide x 1175 mm (46 in.) to 1200 mm
(48 in) deep enclosed cabinet with air dam kit and
perforated single front and double rear perforated doors,
each with a lock. 4 in (100 mm) wide lacing bars on both Y Y
sides at front (cold aisle/intake side). 2 x PDU mounting WTS WTS
and vertical cable management on rear. Cabinets to either
be installed on leveling feet or fastened to the slab.
Seismic bracing where applicable. 45 RU rack height.


Appendix B
Requirement
2. Ancillary Systems ‐ Colocation Facilities (Continued)
outside of rear rail. Vertical cable managers shall be sized
based on cable counts and fill factors. Structured cabling
engineer to determine appropriate size based on site Y Y
Structured WTS,
Racks/Cabinets requirements. Be equipped with appropriate air baffles if Cabling Transport
equipment is mounted side by side in adjacent racks.
Racks to be bolted to slab. Seismic bracing where
applicable. Typical rack/cabinet height is 45 RU.
All cabinets equipped with blanking panels / no open racks Structured
for containment builds WTS Y Y
Cabling

All connectivity/patching shall be performed within any
Structured Y Y
given rack/cabinet and not between rows. LOB, WTS
Cabling
Connectivity Fiber links are field terminated, with LC

connectors. Connector adaptation (e.g. ST, SC) are

accomplished through the use of suitable patch cords Structured Y Y
WTS
when required. Cabling
All chassis based copper access switches to be port
replicated into centralized patching field (only if approved
by the OPR or management). All stackable switching to
Structured Y Y
follow WTS patching diagram (see Appendix 1 of the WTS WTS
Cabling
Cable Design and Engineering Standards).
All patching to be supported, address bend radius, and
Patching utilize cable management solely intended for its use.
Power and data patching to utilize separate pathways.
Patching shall not be of excessive length, planning for 1' of
Y
service loop on each end, and be routed neatly providing WTS WTS Y
free access for maintenance of equipment and cabling
infrastructure.
Hot/Cold Aisle: GRE,
Coordinate placement of CRAC/CRAH components Structured
delivering cool air and capturing return air with the layout Y Y
GRE Cabling,
of racks and cabinets. WTS

Hot/Cold Aisle: Equipment intakes at the front of racks are
Layout GRE,
not facing rear‐equipment exhaust from a neighboring
row. Side mounted air baffles must be installed in the Structured Structured Y Y
instances where equipment is mounted side by side in Cabling Cabling,
adjacent racks. WTS
Rack/cabinet elevations to be planned for growth at switch Structured
and patching frames, and growth at server cabinets. GRE, WTS Y Y
Cabling
3 ft (915 mm) service clearance from the front of
equipment in racks or cabinets. 3 ft (915 mm) service
clearance from the rear of equipment in racks or cabinet.

4 ft (1829 mm) service clearance on one side of the row of Structured Y Y
GRE, WTS
racks or cabinets. 1 ft (305 mm) additional service Cabling Y
clearance in front of telco wall field.
Clearances


must be free of obstruction nearest to the front and in
Structured Y
back of each rack or cabinet in a row to allow under floor GRE, WTS
Cabling
access.

Appendix B
Requirement
cabinets. Cable support systems shall be the only allowable Structured
WTS Y Y
obstruction. Cabling
Racks and cabinets must be located away from potential
sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI). They should
Clearances
be kept at least 1.22 m (4ft) away from transformers,
motors, and other potentially strong sources of EMI. Their Structured
WTS Y Y
location should not compromise associated cabling Cabling
pathways with regard to EMI related separation
requirements and guidelines of the ANSI/TIA‐569 standard.
bend radius of cables will be compliant with the ANSI/TIA‐ Structured
568 group of standards, or manufacturer’s requirements if WTS Y Y
Cabling
those are stricter.
Conduits and sleeves for carrier media not to be shared with Structured
JPMC structured cable media WTS Y Y
Cabling
Service loops are not allowed in Co‐Lo. Structured
WTS
Cabling Y
Must be independently supported from ceiling or walls, not
from cabinets and racks.
Installed with at least 12 in (305 mm) clearance above tray. Structured
Pathways WTS Y Y
Cabling
Installed 4 in – 6 in (101.6mm – 152.4 mm) above rack or
cabinet.
Installation must be electrical Code compliant.
Non Metallic Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies (e.g.,
Fiber Runner):
May be attached to cabinets and racks when intended for
patching or other local connections within a row. Otherwise
must be independently supported as per metallic cable tray Structured
WTS Y Y
requirements. Cabling
Single point of entry into the room with a card reader/ pin
pad on the ingress and card reader only on the egress .side
LOB, GRE,
of the door GRE Y Y
WTS, GSMA
power outage or fire alarm system activation unless dictated LOB, GRE,
GRE
otherwise by local code WTS, GSMA Y Y
Cameras covering the entrance door and any other LOB, GRE,
Security GRE
secondary exits from inside and outside. WTS, GSMA Y Y

All doors leading into the cage must be monitored for
LOB, GRE,
immediate forced open and door held open (60 Second) GRE Y Y
WTS, GSMA
alarms
Access logs will not be required in rooms. Card reader/pin LOB, GRE,
pad will be system of record for access. GSMA
WTS, GSMA Y


Appendix B
Requirement
independently supported below ladder rack and above
rack. The receptacle facing the rack/cabinet in hot aisle
(equipment air exhausts side of cabinet, with electrical
GRE GRE, WTS
sockets facing the hot aisle, not the ceiling or floor). If Y
power routed under floor, power to be mounted on
bracket installed between pedestals in hot aisle.
Receptacles labeled with panel ID and circuit #. GRE GRE, WTS Y

Power Where diverse power feeds are deployed A‐side panel
Distribution circuits shall use black on white labels to designate the
circuit on the faceplate and B‐side panel circuits to utilize

white on black labels to designate the circuit on the GRE GRE, WTS
Y
faceplate.
ID it is served from. When cabinets are served by PDUs
(power strips) from different sources the label for each

source shall be distinctly different colors. A white label
GRE GRE, WTS
shall be used to designate source A while a black label shall Y
designate source B.
have special ordered white cords plugged into A‐side
Power
power connections and black cords plugged into B‐side
Distribution GRE GRE, WTS Y
power connections.
‐ 208V/3‐phase 30A, with 208V/single phase/20 or 30A
being allowable based on site specific requirements, (or
country specific equivalent) (In North America 120V power
must also be provided at the local Power Distribution Unit
(PDU) level.
Power ‐ Minimum (24) C‐13 receptacles
GRE GRE, WTS
Distribution ‐ Minimum (6) C‐19 receptacles Y
‐ Ability for metering (including each phase with true RMS
reading of current and voltage)
- ‐ Ethernet port allowing remote readout of PDU
parameters.
3. Room Construction ‐ Colocation Facilities (Co‐Lo)
Coordinate with Co‐location facility provider.
Room Signage GRE GRE, WTS, LOB Y
Built deck to deck/slab to slab. All metal wire mesh cages
must extend slab to slab. GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Minimum 1 hour fire‐rated or greater if local code is more
stringent. If the Co‐location space is contained within a
metal wire mesh cage, the space in the facility in which the GRE GRE, WTS Y Y

Walls (if required) cage is contained must have at least 1 hour fire rated walls.
this Standard, ATSM E814, UL1479, and the manufacturer. GRE GRE, WTS Y Y

Appendix B
Requirement
3. Room Construction ‐ Colocation Facilities (Continued)
Doors must be a minimum of 3 ft (915 mm) wide and 8 ft.
(2.44 m) high minimum w/ no center support and hinged
to open outward (when permitted by Code). The door
must be fitted with a lock. An integrated strike must be

included to accommodate electronic access control. Doors
GRE GRE, WTS
must be equipped with floor sweeps to contain Y Y

conditioned air, minimize dust infiltration, and minimize
Doors (if escape of noise.
applicable) Automatic closer GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Quantity of doors defined by codes, as well as access and
egress requirements GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Rated to maintain fire rating of room. GRE GRE, WTS Y Y

unobstructed height at least 9 ft. (2.74 m). These heights
must be even higher if needed for cable pathways, or for
maintenance functions, or for proper air flow to and from
Ceiling GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
air conditioning units.
‐Exposed ceilings and sprayed on fireproofing in an
exposed ceiling must be treated (sealed) to mitigate dust.
all rack and cabinet aisles. The lighting must be controlled
by one or more switches located near the entrance door(s)
to the room. Emergency lighting and signs must be

properly placed per Code or AHJ such that an absence of
Y Y
Lighting primary lighting will not hamper emergency exit. Lighting GRE GRE, WTS
technology equipment in the MER. Dimmer switches must
not be used.
future IT loads.
A structural engineer shall be consulted during the design
to specify the floor loading limit. The minimum distributed
floor loading capacity shall be 7.2 kPa (150 lbf/ ft2). The
recommended distributed floor loading capacity is 12 kPa
(250 lbf/ ft2). Floors must be appropriately reinforced if
equipment exceeding these specifications is anticipated.
This requirement also applies in the case of relocation of
Flooring equipment at a later time. If extensive relocation is GRE GRE, WTS Y Y Y
anticipated, the entire floor must be appropriately
reinforced.
capacity for supporting loads that are suspended from the
bottom of the floor (for example, cable ladders suspended
from the ceiling of the floor below). The recommended
minimum hanging capacity of the floor is 2.4 kPa (50
lb/ft2). Access floor support elements must have similar
load carrying capabilities. VCT should be bonded to
ground.


Appendix B
Requirement
3. Room Construction ‐ Colocation Facilities (Continue)
finished with a high‐pressure laminate (HPL). GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
In cages with access floor, power conduit and associated
cabling must be routed below the floor and all
telecommunications cable should be routed in cable
conveyance overhead.
If, as an exception, telecommunications cabling and power
wiring are both run below the access floor, an under floor

cable tray system should be used for the routing of
telecommunications cabling. Wherever practicable, power GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
and communications cables should cross at right angles,
and telecommunications cables should be located in tray

above power cables.
Access Floor, if
applicable Materials must either be non‐combustible or have a flame
spread index of 25 or less.
design to support rolling load and seismic loading.
Y Y
Pedestals and stringers must be grounded.
Surface of floor supporting access tiles must be sealed to
minimize dust. GRE GRE, WTS
Must comply with design requirements for depth of floor.
Power shall be installed below access floor and routed in a

manner that avoids blockage of airflow. GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Under floor smoke detection required, where required by GRE GRE, WTS Y Y

code.
Fire extinguishers to be installed in rooms based on local
codes, and/or must have ready access to a listed portable
fire extinguisher compliant with the NFPA 10 standard,

Fire Safety local Codes and OSHA requirements. GRE GRE, WTS Y
Must not use dry chemicals, and must have a suitable tank
capacity, and appropriate fire type category ratings.
Grounding (Earthing) and bonding must conform to
applicable NEC requirements, local codes and bonding
systems specified by ANSI/TIA‐607. A Co‐location space
must provide a means for the SBB function. This may be
via a physical SBB busbar, or by a readily accessible – Code
and standards compliant ‐ grounding system (e.g. under
Bonding and
raised floor grid) to which items within the Co‐location GRE GRE, WTS
Grounding Y Y
space can be bonded to ground. All open frame racks shall
(Earthing) be equipped with horizontal rack mounted ground busbars
(RBB), for the grounding of network equipment. Horizontal
rack mounted ground busbar shall be mounted on the rear
of the cabinet/rack.
Bare metal contact is required for all bonding connections. GRE GRE, WTS Y Y

Bonding and pathways, armored comms cable jackets) GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
Grounding
Systems grounded (earthed) as required by manufacturer,
(Earthing) GRE GRE, WTS Y Y
standards, and codes


Appendix B
Requirement
3. Room Construction ‐ Colocation Facilities (Continue)
Chilled water or glycol piping shall be routed outside the
room and penetrate the cage at the shortest path to LOB, GRE,
connect to CRAC/CRAH units. Routing shall avoid all racks, GRE
WTS Y Y
cabinets and cable pathways.
If sprinklers are required within the equipment area, fire
sprinkler head location must be coordinated with room
layout so that heads shall be 18 in. (457.2 mm) clear of any
Piping obstructions and piping routed in aisle ways as per fire LOB, GRE,
codes. Sprinklers and piping must not be routed directly GRE Y Y
WTS
above IT equipment or enclosures and must be routed in
aisle ways instead for optimal clearance.
If sprinklers are required within the equipment area, the
fire sprinkler heads must be provided with wire cages to LOB, GRE,
GRE Y
prevent accidental operation. WTS
5‐20 duplex convenience outlets on utility power only to
be located at typical outlet height on walls throughout the
GRE WTS
room. Y
Wall phones to be strategically placed for technician
Convenience access. The outlet mounting height must ensure that the
Outlets
phone keypad and controls will be no greater than 1,372
GTI WTS Y
mm (54 in) above the finished floor to comply with
requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
wireless access is deployed) GTI WTS Y
Secured storage and staging room should be planned in
proximity to the cage that should include a 6’w (1.83 m) x
3'd (0.91 m) work surface and one 7'h (2.13 m) x 4'w (1.22
m) shelving unit. For CoLo's built to house above 20 rack
Storage and or cabinet positions, secured storage and staging room
GTI WTS Y Y Y
Staging should be at least160 sqft (14.86 sqm). For CoLo's built to
house below 20 rack or cabinet positions, secured storage
and staging room should be 100 sqft (9.29 sqm). Room
shall be outfitted with an ingress card reader.
4. Labeling and Administration ‐ Colocation Facilities (Co‐Lo)
cabinet
Nomenclature: Structured Cabling WTS Y
<Row Letter><Position Number>
Racks/Cabinets Example: A01 means first row, first position
Type: 1.5 in. (38 mm) text lamacoid. White text on black
background. Structured Cabling WTS Y
1.5 in. (38 mm) tall text placed in visible location on plastic
Data Cable
bushing or on the conduit itself near the end. Structured Cabling WTS Y
Conduit
Nomenclature <size>.<path A/B>to<Distant end room
Data Cable ID>. Example: 4” A to B206
Structured Cabling WTS
Conduit Sleeves shall be labeled "Sleeve" Y


Appendix B
Requirement
4. Labeling and Administration ‐ Colocation Facilities (Continued)
Cabinet/rack positions shall be identified by an alpha‐
numeric identifier where a letter shall identify the row and
a number shall identify the cabinet position within the

Cabinet/Rack row. Future positions left vacant shall have their Structured Cabling WTS Y
Identification identifiers reserved. <Row Letter><Position Number>.
Example: A01. (first row, first position)
Label to be affixed to top of cabinet in the front and rear.
Text on labels shall be at least 1 in. (26 mm) tall. Structured Cabling WTS Y
All Copper Patch Nomenclature:
Structured
Panels and Fiber <RU><Top RU of panel > labeled on the left side of the Structured Cabling Y
Cabling, WTS
Enclosures Panel panel. Structured Cabling
Example: RU38 WTS
ID
To Rack/Cabinet<Distant End Rack/Cabinet ID>Panel<Panel
All Copper Patch
ID>Ports<End Location Port Range> Structured Cabling WTS
Panels serving Y
Example: To Rack AB01 Panel RU34 Ports 25‐48
intra‐room tie
connectivity located on termination panels for each route shall be of Structured Cabling
WTS
labeling Y
To<Distant End Room ID>Rack/Cabinet<Distant End
Rack/Cabinet ID>Panel<Panel ID>Ports<End Location Port
All Copper Patch Range>
Panels serving Example for cable run to room B206): Structured Cabling WTS
Y
inter‐room tie To B206 Rack AA01 Panel RU31 Ports 01‐24
cabling
labeling located on termination panels for each route shall be of Structured Cabling
WTS
distinctly different colors. Y
All Copper Patch <CoLo Room Designation><Panel Sequence>
Panels serving Example (for CoLo room B132): B132‐34
Structured
workstation Panel jacks must be labeled with Workstation ID Structured Cabling
Cabling, WTS Y
cabling
connectivity
<Fiber Type>to Rack/Cabinet<Distant End Rack/Cabinet
ID>Panel<Panel ID>Slot<End Location Slot>Ports<End
All Fiber
Location Port Range> Structured Cabling WTS
Enclosures serving Y
Example: OM4 to Rack AA04 Panel RU38 Slot A Ports 01‐
intra‐ room tie
12
cabling
labeling located on termination panels for each route shall be of
<Rack/Cabinet ID>Panel<Panel ID>Slot<End Location
All Fiber Slot>Ports<End Location Port Range>
Enclosures serving Example for cable run to room B206): Structured Cabling WTS
Y
inter‐ room tie OM4 to B206 Rack AA06 Panel RU32 Slot A Ports 01‐12
cabling
labeling located on termination panels for each route shall be of
All patch cables to be labeled with wrap‐around (not flag)
Brady‐type labels indicating the following on both sides.
From (on line 1): <Rack ID‐Panel ID‐Port>or<Rack ID‐Top

Patch Cables RU of Switch‐Blade‐Port>
WTS WTS Y
To (on line 2): <Rack ID‐Panel ID‐Port>or<Rack ID‐Top RU
of Switch‐Blade‐Port>

Appendix B
Requirement
4. Labeling and Administration ‐ Colocation Facilities (Continued)
Power ID it is served from. When cabinets are served by PDUs
Distribution Units (power strips) from different sources the label for each
GRE GRE, WTS Y
(PDU) source shall be distinctly different colors. A white label
(Power Strips) shall be used to designate source A while a black label shall
designate source B.
MEP Systems meet design requirements and value objectives. GRE GRE, WTS Y
hostname and a yellow asset tag on the front (cold aisle)
side of the device. A machine generated label indicating

the serial number of the device shall also be placed on the Any equipment

IT Equipment front (cold aisle) side of the device. All cabinets must have provider (i.e.
LOB, GRE,
a yellow asset tag at the top of the front door and all racks LOB, GNS,
WTS Y
must have a yellow asset tag at the top front in a visible Transport, Voice,
area that can be easily accessed with a barcode scanner. Media)
5. Colocation Space Planning ‐ Colocation Facilities (Co‐Lo)
The CoLo space should be positioned so that locations that
are restricted by building components that limit expansion
such as elevators, core, outside walls, or other fixed

building walls are avoided. Large trunk ductwork and
LOB, GRE,
piping or other items should be avoided. For the delivery GRE
WTS Y Y Y
of large equipment, location decisions should factor in the
need for accessibility.
The CoLo space should never be located below grade, in
flood zones, or near spaces that may present a threat of
water infiltration unless preventive measures against

water infiltration are employed. The room must be free of LOB, GRE,
GRE
water or drain pipes not directly required in support of the WTS Y Y Y
equipment within the room.
The CoLo space must be located away from sources of
electromagnetic interference. Special attention should be
Room Location given to electrical power supply transformers, motors and

LOB, GRE,
generators, x‐ray equipment, radio or radar transmitters, GRE Y Y Y
WTS
and induction sealing devices.
Equipment not related to the support of the CoLo (e.g.,
piping, ductwork, pneumatic tubing, etc.) should not be LOB, GRE,
GRE
installed in, pass through, or enter the Colo. WTS Y Y Y
CoLo rooms must not be a pass through to other rooms,
and CoLo rooms must not be located behind other rooms LOB, GRE,
GRE
that act as a pass through. WTS Y Y Y
Co‐Lo shall not be located in areas susceptible to heat gain LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y
WTS
Rooms must not have any windows. LOB, GRE,
GRE Y Y Y
WTS
Condensate containment pans/curbing with leak detection

CRAC/CRAH Units required for floor/wall supported CRAC units. Drip pan GRE GRE, WTS
Y Y
with leak detection required for ceiling mounted CRAC
Fire Suppression Located in Co‐Lo controlled space
GRE GRE, WTS Y Y Y
Systems

Appendix B
Requirement

5. Colocation Space Planning ‐ Colocation Facilities (Co‐Lo)
When shared electronically, documents must be provided
Design Tools in both PDF and DWG file formats. All drawings must be GRE GRE, WTS Y Y Y
scaled and the drawing must identify the scale that is
used.

APPENDIX C – Faceplate Configurations

APPENDIX C – Faceplate Configurations

APPENDIX D – General Identification Standard
A. HORIZONTAL LINK – Non-Grid Outlet Numbering Scheme

Source End (TR or MER) (see Figure 2)
xxx-yy-zz
Where:
xxx = three alpha numeric characters (maximum) identifying the Technology Space (TR or MER)
yy = two alpha numeric characters identifying the row and rack
zz = two numeric characters, rack unit number (upper left of installed patch panel), uniquely
identifying the patch panel rack position
B. HORIZONTAL LINK – Non-Grid Outlet Numbering Scheme

Destination End (Workstation End) (see Figures 1 & 2)
xxx- zz-##
Where:
xxx = three alpha numeric characters identifying the Technology Space (TR or MER)
## = numeric characters designating the manufacturer port number on the patch panel
Note: Label both the top of rack and the bottom foot of the racks with;

Figure 1 – Sample Non-Grid and Cable Identification Scheme

C. HORIZONTAL LINK –Grid Outlet Numbering Scheme

Source and Destination End (TR or MER) (see Figure 2)
xxx-yy-zz- ABC-###-D-E
Where:
ABC = grid location (Alpha)
### = grid location (Numeric)
D= outlet instance at Grid Location (Numeric)
E= Sequential Jack Number at Outlet Instance (Numeric)
Note: Do not block the manufacturing port label on the patch panel.
Note: Label both the top of rack and the bottom foot of the racks with;
D. Wrap Around Cable Label –Grid and Non-Grid Outlet Numbering Schemes
Source and Destination End (see Figures 1 & 2)
xxx-yy-zz-##
Where:
## = numeric characters designating the manufacturers port number on a patch panel

Figure 2 – Sample Grid and Cable Identification Scheme

E. BACKBONE OPTICAL FIBER TERMINATION NUMERING SCHEME
Backbone optical fiber consists of Source and Destination ends, where the Source is typically located in
the MER and the Destination is typically located in a TR. The labeling requirements are provided for 4RU
and 1RU fiber optical panels, where;
 Figure 3 depicts sample labeling for the source end (MER) of a 4RU fiber panel, with panel
labeling and cassette labeling
 Figure 4 depicts sample labeling for the destination end (TR) of a 1RU fiber panel, with panel
labeling and cassette labeling.
Fiber panel labeling;

yy-zz
Where:
zz = two numeric characters, rack unit number (upper left of installed patch panel), uniquely identifying
the patch panel rack position
Fiber cassette labeling;

xxx-yy-zz-##/##-TTT
Where:
##/## = starting strand number/end strand number
TTT = Fiber type; OM2, OM3, OM4 for multimode or OS2 for single mode

Figure 3 – Sample MER Fiber Backbone Panel Labeling

Figure 4 – Sample MER Fiber Backbone Panel Labeling

Figure 5 – Sample TR Fiber Backbone Panel Labeling
F. BACKBONE CABLE NUMERING SCHEME (see Figure 5)
Backbone copper and fiber cable shall be labeled to depict their Source and Destination endpoints.
Backbone cable Source End labeling;

xxx-yy-zz
Where:
Backbone cable Destination End labeling;

xxx-yy-zz-##/##-TTT
Where:
##/## = starting strand or pair number / ending strand or pair number
TTT = cable type

Figure 6 – Sample Backbone Cable Labeling

Appendix E_Materials_1Jul2018
SECTION 21 07 16 — FIRESTOP COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
SpecSeal 10.5 OZ TUBE LATEX FIRESTOP COMPOUND LC1300 EA
SpecSeal 0.6 LITER BAR FIRESTOP PUTTY SSP100 EA
SpecSeal PENSIL 300 SILICONE FIRESTOP SEALANT 5 GALLON PAIL PEN305 EA
Hilti FIRESTOP BRICK CP 657 EA
Hilti FIRESTOP PLUG CP 658 (10 pack)
Hilti FIRESTOP BRICK CFS-BL EA
3M FIRE BARRIER PILLOW FB 249 EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. INTUMESCENT FIRESTOP PILLOWS SSB14 CASE
Specified Technologies, Inc. 2” Firestop Device EZD22 EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. 3” Firestop Device EZD33FWS EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. 3” Firestop Device Kit (for 4” conduit) EZDP133CWK EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. 3” Firestop Device Kit (square mount) EZDP33FWS EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. 3” Ganging Accessory (Qty 4) 3” EZ Paths EZP433W EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. 6” Firestop Device EZD44S EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. 6” Firestop Device Kit (square or round mount) EZDP44S EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. Radius Control Modules (One Pair (2) radius control modules) RCM33 EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. Ganging Accessory (Qty1-5) 6” EZ Paths EZP544W EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. Grid for riser applications EZGxxxxx EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. Individual Cable EZ firestop grommet RFG2 (10 pack)
Specified Technologies, Inc. EZ-Path Retrofit Device for 2” Sleeves EZDR200 EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. EZ-Path Retrofit Device for 4” Sleeves EZDR400 EA
FIRESTOP CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 1 of 35

Specified Technologies, Inc. Smoke and Acoustical Pathway Device NEZ33 2 Pack
Specified Technologies, Inc. Smoke and Acoustical 2 gang kit (2 Devices & plates) NEZDP233 4 Pack
Specified Technologies, Inc. Smoke and Acoustical 4 gang kit (4 Devices & plates) NEZDP433 EA
Specified Technologies, Inc. Plates for 2 gang (no devices) NEZP233 PAIR
Specified Technologies, Inc. Plates for 4 gang (no devices) NEZP433 PAIR
Fiberlock Technologies ABC Asbestos Encapsulant/Sealant 6421-Off White 5 Gallon
FIRESTOP CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 2 of 35

Appendix E - Corporate Product List
SECTION 27 05 26 — GROUNDING (EARTHING) INFRASTRUCTURE COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
Panduit RACK GROUNDING JUMPER KIT RGREJ696Y EA
Panduit RACK GROUNDING BUSBAR KIT RGRB19U EA
Panduit ARMORED CABLE GROUNDING KIT ACG24K EA
Chatsworth RACK GROUNDING JUMPER KIT TS1007096 EA
Chatsworth VERTICAL RACK BUSBAR KIT TS1034193 EA
BONDING JUMPER KIT, INCL #6AWG JUMPER 24"L, TWO LUGS

Chatsworth 40159-010 EA
STRAIGHT & R/A LUG
GROUNDING CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 3 of 35

SECTION 27 05 28.29 — NON-CONTINUOUS CABLE SUPPORTS COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
Panduit J-HOOK SCREW-ON BEAM CLAMP 2 IN BUNDLE JP2SBC50R-L20 BX/50
Panduit J-HOOK HAMMER-ON BEAM CLAMP 2 IN BUNDLE JP2HBC25R-L20 EA
Panduit J-HOOK Z PURLIN CLIP - ANGLE - 2 IN BUNDLE JP2ZP-L20 BX/50
Panduit J-HOOK Z PURLIN CLIP - VERTICAL - 2 IN BUNDLE JP131CP-L20 BX/50
SUPPORTS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 4 of 35

SECTION 27 05 28.31 — GRIPS COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
Hubbell Fiber Universal Grip .18-.25 diameter 022291016' EA
Hubbell Copper Universal Grip .50-.62 diameter 02203013' EA
Hubbell Copper Universal Grip .63-.74 diameter EA

02203014'
Hubbell Copper Universal Grip .75-.99 diameter 02203015' EA
Hubbell Copper Universal Grip 1.00-1.24 diameter 02203017' EA
Caddy Vertical Cable Support Assembly Kit CAT600R EA
Panduit Cable Tie (75' Roll) HLS-75R0 EA
GRIPS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 5 of 35

SECTION 27 05 28.34 —INNNERDUCT COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
Carlon ¾" PLENUM-GARD ORANGE EMPTY CE4X1-1000 FT
Carlon 1" PLENUM-GARD ORANGE W/TAPE CF4X1C-1000 FT
Carlon 1¼" PLENUM-GARD ORANGE W/TAPE CG4X1C-500 FT
Carlon ¾" RISER-GARD ORANGE EMPTY DE4X1-1000 FT
Carlon 1" RISER-GARD ORANGE W/TAPE DF4X1C-1000 FT
Carlon 1¼" RISER-GARD ORANGE W/TAPE DG4X1C-900 FT
MaxCell 2" 2 CELL STANDARD BLACK MAXCELL MXC2002 (2" 3-Cell) FT
MaxCell 2" 3 CELL STANDARD BLACK MAXCELL FT

MXC2003 (2" 3-Cell)
MaxCell 3" 3 CELL STANDARD BLACK MAXCELL FT
MXC3456 (3" 3-Cell)
MaxCell 3" 3 CELL STANDARD RED MAXCELL FT
MXC3456 (3" 3-Cell)
MaxCell 3" 3 CELL STANDARD YELLOW MAXCELL MXC3456 (3" 3-Cell) FT
INNERDUCT CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 6 of 35

SECTION 27 05 53 — IDENTIFICATION COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
Brady HEAT-SHRINK SLEEVE HSA-64 EA
Lasermark (www.lasermark.co.uk/) Cisco 4510 Switch Template Cisco 4510 Switch Template EA
IDENTIFICATION CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 7 of 35

SECTION 27 11 23 — RELAY RACKS / CABLE MANAGEMENT COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
QUADRARACK 4-POST FRAME ; 19"W X 29"D X 7'H (45 RMU) ; #12-24

Chatsworth 50120-x03 EA
TAPPED MOUNTING HOLES ; GLACIER WHITE FINISH
Universal Rack; 19"W x 7"H x 3"D; Glacier White; 45 RMU; No. of Posts - 2;
Chatsworth 46353-E03 EA
Top Angle
Universal Rack; 23 IN W x 7 FT H x 3 IN D; Glacier White; 45 RMU; No. of
Posts - 2; Top Angle
QUADRARACK 4-POST FRAME 23"W X 29"D X 7'H (45 RMU) #12-24
Chatsworth SK5373723 EA
TAPPED MOUNTING HOLES BLACK FINISH
Universal Rack; 19"W x 7'H x 3"D; Black; 45 RMU; No. of Posts - 2; Top
Angle
Universal Rack; 23"W x 7'H x 3"D; Black; 45 RMU; No. of Posts - 2; Top
Angle
RACK HARDWARE ACCESSORIES COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Chatsworth Filler Panel 30024 EA
Chatsworth 23 IN TO 19 IN MOUNTING ADAPTER EAR- 4U - PR 31440-700 EA
Chatsworth 23 IN TO 19 IN MOUNTING ADAPTER EAR- 3U - PR 31430-700 EA
Chatsworth 23 IN TO 19 IN MOUNTING ADAPTER EAR - 2U - PR 31420-700 EA
EQUIPMENT CABINETS COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Chatsworth F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET TS1027826 EA
VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
EVOLUTION DOUBLE SIDED VERTICAL CABLE MANAGER G2 STYLE;

6"W X 24.5"D X 7'H ; FULL HEIGHT FINGERS ON FRONT AND REAR; NO
FRONT DOOR ; NO REAR DOOR; CUSTOM SOLID MID-PANEL
Chatsworth TS1031964 EA
INSTALLED IN MIDDLE OF MANAGER FOR 60/40 SPLIT; MID PANEL
INCLUDES (7) 3" ROUND CABLE PORT GROMMETS; NO CABLE
SPOOLS ; GLACIER WHITE FINGERS ; GLACIER WHITE FINISH


EQUIP RACKS-CBL MGT CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 8 of 35
EVOLUTION DOUBLE SIDED VERTICAL CABLE MANAGER G2 STYLE ;

6"W X 24.5"D X 7'H ; FULL HEIGHT FINGERS ON FRONT AND REAR ;
Chatsworth INCLUDES FRONT AND REAR DOOR ; CUSTOM SOLID MID-PANEL TS1038373 EA
INSTALLED IN MIDDLE OF MANAGER FOR 60/40 SPLIT ; MID PANEL
INCLUDES (7) 3" ROUND CABLE PORT GROMMETS ; NO CABLE
INCLUDES FRONT AND REAR DOOR ; CUSTOM SOLID MID-PANEL
INSTALLED IN MIDDLE OF MANAGER FOR 60/40 SPLIT ; INCLUDES (7)
3" ROUND CABLE PORT GROMMETS ; NO CABLE SPOOLS ; GLACIER
WHITE FINGERS ; GLACIER WHITE FINISH
INCLUDES FRONT AND REAR DOOR ; CUSTOM SOLID MID-PANEL
INSTALLED IN MIDDLE OF MANAGER FOR 60/40 SPLIT ; INCLUDES (7)
3" ROUND CABLE PORT GROMMETS ; NO CABLE SPOOLS ; GLACIER
WHITE FINGERS ; GLACIER WHITE FINISH
Chatsworth 6" W DOUBLE SIDED EVOLUTION CABLE MGMT BLACK 35521-x03 EA
EVOLUTION G2 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGER RAISED FLOOR BRUSH KIT TWO‐
PIECE BRUSH‐SEALED GROMMET FOR BOTTOM OF DOUBLE‐SIDED 12"W
Chatsworth EVOLUTION G2 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGER BRUSH OPENING IS 8‐1/2"W X TS1004414 EA
22‐1/4"L BRUSH SIDE WALL EXTENDS DOWNWARD AND IS NEAR‐FLUSH
WITH BOTTOM OF CABLE MANAGER SECURES TO CABLE MANAGER VIA
EXISTING RACK MOUNTING HOLES BLACK FINISH
VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT ACCESSORIES COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
SOLID MID PANEL FOR 6" DOUBLE SIDED EVOLUTION VERTICAL
MANAGER
MANAGER
MANAGER
HORIZONTAL CABLEMANAGEMENT COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Chatsworth EVOLUTION HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGER 1U, WHITE 35441-x01 EA
EVOLUTION HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGER 2U, WHITE with WHITE

FINGERS
EVOLUTION HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGER 4U, WHITEwith WHITE

FINGERS
Chatsworth EVOLUTION HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGER 1U 35441-x01 EA
SECTION 27 11 23.10 — LADDER RACK, CABLE TRAY COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
CABLE RUNWAY / LADDERFITTINGS AND HARDWARE
Chatsworth UNIVERSAL CABLE RUNWAY, 12" W x 10'L WHITE 10250-E12 EA
Chatsworth UNIVERSAL CABLE RUNWAY, 18" W x 10'L WHITE 10250-E18 EA
Chatsworth CABLE RUNWAY ELEVATION KIT WHITE 10506-E08 EA
Chatsworth E-BEND, 12" WHITE 10822-E12 EA
Chatsworth E-BEND, 18" WHITE 10822-E18 EA
Chatsworth CABLE RUNWAY DIVIDERS WHITE 13392-E12 EA
Chatsworth WALL ANGLE SUPPORT KIT, 12" WHITE 11421-E12 EA
Chatsworth WALL ANGLE SUPPORT KIT, 18" WHITE 11421-E18 EA
3" CHANNEL RACK-TO-RUNWAY MOUNTING PLATE WITH BRACKET,

12" WHITE
18" WHITE
Chatsworth CROSS MEMBER RADIUS DROP, 12"W WHITE 12100-E12 EA
Chatsworth SIDE STRINGER RADIUS DROP, ADJUSTABLE WHITE 12101-E11 EA
Chatsworth CROSS MEMBER RADIUS DROP, 18"W BLACK 12100-712 EA
Chatsworth UNIVERSAL CABLE RUNWAY, 12" W x 10'L BLACK 10250-712 EA
Chatsworth UNIVERSAL CABLE RUNWAY, 18" W x 10'L BLACK 10250-718 EA
Chatsworth E-BEND, 12" BLACK 10822-712 EA
Chatsworth E-BEND, 18" BLACK 10822-718 EA
Chatsworth CABLE RUNWAY DIVIDERS BLACK 13392-712 EA
Chatsworth WALL ANGLE SUPPORT KIT, 12" BLACK 11421-712 EA
Chatsworth WALL ANGLE SUPPORT KIT, 18" BLACK 11421-718 EA

12" BLACK
18" BLACK
Chatsworth CROSS MEMBER RADIUS DROP, 6"W BLACK EA
12100-706
Chatsworth BUTT SPLICE KIT WHITE 11301-501 EA
Chatsworth BUTT SPLICE KIT 16301-001 EA
LADDER - BASKET TRAY CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 11 of 35
Chatsworth JUNCTION SPLICE KIT ZINC 11302-502 EA
Chatsworth JUNCTION SPLICE KIT 16302-001 EA
Chatsworth 5/8-11 UNC-2A ROD, 6’ L 11440-002 EA
Chatsworth 5/8-11 UNC-2A ROD, 12’ L 11440-004 EA
Chatsworth CEILING SUPPORT KIT, 5/8"X6'L ZINC 11310-003 EA
Chatsworth CABLE RETAINING POSTS WHITE 10596-E06 EA
CABLE BASKET TRAY
Chatsworth OnTrac WIRE MESH CBL TRAY,2"H,12"W ZINC EA

34811-512
34811-520
34821-512
Chatsworth OnTrac WIRE MESH CBL TRAY,4"H,20"WZINC EA
34821-520
Chatsworth OnTrac WIRE MESH CBL TRAY,2"H,12"W BLACK EA
34811-712
34811-720
34821-712
34821-720
Chatsworth OnTrac WIRE MESH CBL TRAY,2"H,12"W WHITE EA
34811-E12
34811-E20
34821-E12
34821-E20
FITTINGS AND HARDWARE(for Basket Tray)
Chatsworth STANDARD SPLICE KIT ZINC EA

34738-501
Chatsworth SPLICE WSHR+BOLT KIT ZINC EA
34728-501
Chatsworth SPLICE BAR ZINC EA
34739-E01
Chatsworth 90° SPLICE BARZINC EA
34740-501
Chatsworth STANDARD SPLICE KIT BLACK EA
34738-701
Chatsworth SPLICE WSHR+BOLT KIT BLACK EA
34728-701
Chatsworth SPLICE BAR BLACK EA
34739-701
Chatsworth 90° SPLICE BAR BLACK EA

34740-701
Chatsworth WALL MOUNT ANGLE,12"W BLACK EA
34735-712
Chatsworth WALL MOUNT ANGLE,20"W BLACK EA
34735-720
Chatsworth TRAPEZE SUPT BRKT,12"W BLACK EA
34730-712
Chatsworth TRAPEZE SUP BRKT,20"W BLACK EA
34730-720
Chatsworth TOOL-LESS RADIUS DROP BLACK EA
34741-701
Chatsworth WALL MOUNT ANGLE,12"W WHITE EA
34735-E12
Chatsworth WALL MOUNT ANGLE,20"W WHITE EA
34735-E20
Chatsworth TRAPEZE SUPT BRKT,12"W WHITE EA
34730-E12
Chatsworth TRAPEZE SUP BRKT,20"W WHITE EA
34730-E20
Chatsworth TOOL-LESS RADIUS DROP WHITE EA
34741-E01
Chatsworth PEDESTAL CLMP BRKT ZINC 34737-501 EA
Chatsworth PEDESTAL CLMP SPRT KIT ZINC 34737-502 EA
Chatsworth SPLIT BOLT GRNDG CLAMP EA

34838-001
Cooper B-Line Wire Mesh Floor stand BLACK FTA2FS EA
SECTION 27 13 14 — CATEGORY 5e BACKBONE COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
Berk Tek 10059632- Hyper+5e, CAT5E, CMP, UTP, 25 Pr., Gray Reel (Plenum) 10059632 MF
Berk Tek 10089521- Hyper+5e, CAT5E, CMP, UTP, 25 Pr., White Reel (Plenum) 10089521 MF
Leviton CATEGORY 5e 24 PORT PATCH PANEL ANGLED 5G597-L24 EA
Leviton CATEGORY 5e 24 PORT PATCH PANEL FLAT 5G596-L24 EA
COMMSCOPE 25 Pr. CATEGORY 5e LSZH Slate (PowerSUM 3061B) 760158758 MF
COMMSCOPE 25 Pr. CATEGORY 5e non-plenum Gray (PowerSUM 1061F) 760026518 MF
COMMSCOPE 25 Pr. CATEGORY 5e plenum White (PowerSUM 2061) 760103044 MF
COPPER BACKBONE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 14 of 35

SECTION 27 15 00 - CATEGORY 6 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
BERK-TEK / LEVITON CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMR WHITE (Riser-rated), PULL BOX LANmark 6E+, CAT6, CMR, UTP, GRTP, 11100786 MF
BERK-TEK / LEVITON CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMR GRAY (Riser-rated), PULL BOX LANmark 6E+, CAT6, CMR, UTP, GRTP, 11100709 MF
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL- PLENUM (Bulk Cable)
BERK-TEK / LEVITON CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMP WHITE (Plenum-rated), PULL BOX LANmark 6E+, CAT6, CMP, UTP, GRTP, 11100785 MF
BERK-TEK / LEVITON CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMP GRAY (Plenum-rated), PULL BOX LANmark 6E+, CAT6, CMP, UTP, GRTP, 11100708 MF
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL-Termination Hardware MER/TR - BLACK
CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL FOR RACKS ANGLED 19” 24-PORT T568B

BERK-TEK / LEVITON EA
(BLACK) 49256-H24
(BLACK) 49256-H48
CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL FOR CABINETS FLAT 19” 24-PORT T568B
(BLACK) 69586-L24
(BLACK) 69586-L48
BERK-TEK / LEVITON STRAIN RELIEF BAR BLACK EA
49005-DMB
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL (Termination Hardware User/Remote end)
BERK-TEK / LEVITON CATEGORY 6 INFORMATION OUTLET (JACK) T568B (WHITE) 61110-RG6 EA
BERK-TEK / LEVITON QUICKPORT DUPLEX TYPE-106 INSERT WHITE EA

41087-xxP
BERK-TEK / LEVITON 2-PORT QUICKPORT MODULAR FURNITURE FACEPLATE WHITE EA
49910-SW2
BERK-TEK / LEVITON 4-PORT QUICKPORT MODULAR FURNITURE FACEPLATE WHITE EA
49910-SW4
BERK-TEK / LEVITON MODULAR FURNITURE 4 PORT FACEPLATE (WHITE) 49910-SW4 EA
BERK-TEK / LEVITON 1 PORT OUTLET FACEPLATE (WHITE) 42080-1WS EA
BERK-TEK / LEVITON 1-PORT SINGLE GANG STAINLESS STEEL TELEPHONE FACEPLATE 4108W-1SP EA
BERK-TEK / LEVITON NON-PLENUM SURFACE MOUNT BOX, 2-Port (WHITE) 41089-2WP EA
BERK-TEK / LEVITON PLENUM SURFACE MOUNT BOX, 2-Port (WHITE) 4s089-2WP EA
CAT 6 UTP CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 15 of 35

BERK-TEK / LEVITON INFORMATION OUTLET DUST COVER (WHITE) 41084-0BW EA
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL (Patch Cords)
BERK-TEK / LEVITON CATEGORY 6 PLENUM MODULAR PATCH CORD (FOR CAMERAS) GRAY U6PPP-xxS EA
BERK-TEK / LEVITON CATEGORY 6 MODULAR PATCH CORD GRAY 3 FT. 6D460-03S EA
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL- NON PLENUM (Bulk Cable)
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMR WHITE (Riser-rated) 700214208 MF
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMR WHITE (Riser-rated) 700212046 MF
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMR GRAY (Riser-rated) 700211923 MF
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMR GRAY (Riser-rated) 700211931 MF
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL- PLENUM (Bulk Cable)
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMP WHITE (Plenum-rated) 700210032 MF
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMP WHITE (Plenum-rated) 700208101 MF
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMP GRAY (Plenum-rated) 700210198 MF
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6 CABLE CMP GRAY (Plenum-rated) 700214372 MF
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL-Termination Hardware MER/TR - SILVER
SYSTIMAX 360 CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL FOR RACKS ANGLED 19”

COMMSCOPE 760151308 EA
24-PORT T568B (SILVER)
SYSTIMAX 360 CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL FOR RACKS ANGLED 19”
SYSTIMAX 360 CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL FOR CABINETS FLAT 19”
SYSTIMAX 360 CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL FOR CABINETS FLAT 19”
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL-Termination Hardware MER/TR - BLACK


(BLACK)
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL-Termination Hardware MER/TR SPECIALTY ITEMS
CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL INTEGRATED MANAGERS 24 PORT T568B

(BLACK)
CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL INTEGRATED MANAGERS 48 PORT T568B
(BLACK)
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL (Termination Hardware User/Remote end)
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6 INFORMATION OUTLET (JACK) T568B (WHITE) 700206725 EA
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6 INFORMATION OUTLET (JACK) T568B (GRAY) 700206733 EA
COMMSCOPE M106, FLUSH MOUNTED MODULAR FRAME, FOUR PORT WHITE 106622285 EA
COMMSCOPE 2-PORT FLEXMODE FURNITURE FACEPLATE, WHITE 1-558106-3 EA
COMMSCOPE 3-PORT FLEXMODE FURNITURE FACEPLATE, WHITE 1-558107-3 EA
COMMSCOPE 4-PORT ADJUSTABLE FURNITURE FACEPLATE, WHITE (.5 INCH DEEP) 700191588 EA
COMMSCOPE MODULAR FURNITURE 4 PORT FACEPLATE (WHITE) 760118232 EA
COMMSCOPE 1 PORT OUTLET FACEPLATE (WHITE) 108333014 EA
COMMSCOPE 1-PORT SINGLE GANG STAINLESS STEEL TELEPHONE FACEPLATE 760100891 EA
COMMSCOPE PLENUM SURFACE MOUNT BOX, 2-Port (WHITE) for WAPs. 760067207 EA
COMMSCOPE NON-PLENUM SURFACE MOUNT BOX, 2-Port (WHITE) for user outlets. 107984056 EA
COMMSCOPE INFORMATION OUTLET DUST COVER (WHITE) 107067928 EA
CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL (Patch Cords)
CATEGORY 6 PLENUM MODULAR PATCH CORD (FOR CAMERAS)

COMMSCOPE CPC3372-0C-GS8E-SP-SL EA
GRAY
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6 MODULAR PATCH CORD GRAY 3 FT. CPC3312-03 GS8E-DG (enter length variable in search) EA


SECTION 27 15 00 - CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL- NON PLENUM (Bulk Cable)
BERK-TEK / LEVITON CATEGORY 6A CABLE CMR WHITE (Riser-rated) 11089906 (Reel in a box) MF
BERK-TEK / LEVITON CATEGORY 6A CABLE CMR WHITE (Riser-rated) 10137703 (Reel) MF
CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL- PLENUM (Bulk Cable)
11089901- LANmark-10G2, CAT6A, CMP, UTP, White, Reel in a Box

BERK-TEK / LEVITON 11089901 (Reel in a box) MF
(Plenum)
BERK-TEK / LEVITON 10137384 (Reel) MF
10137384‐ LANmark‐10G2, CAT6A, CMP, UTP, White, Reel (Plenum)
CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL-Termination Hardware MER/TR - BLACK
CATEGORY 6A PATCH PANEL FOR RACKS ANGLED 19” 24-PORT T568B

BERK-TEK / LEVITON 6A587-U24 EA
(BLACK)
BERK-TEK / LEVITON 6A587-U48 EA
(BLACK)
STRAIN RELIEF BAR STRAIN RELIEF BAR BLACK EA
49005-DMB
CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL (Termination Hardware User/Remote end)
BERK-TEK / LEVITON CATEGORY 6A INFORMATION OUTLET (JACK) T568B (WHITE) 6110G-RW6 EA
CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL (Patch Cords) PLENUM
BERK-TEK / LEVITON CATEGORY 6A MODULAR PATCH CORD WHITE 15 FT. - PLENUM UAPPP-xxW EA
CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL (Patch Cords) NON PLENUM
CATEGORY 6A MODULAR PATCH CORD WHITE 3 FT. - NON PLENUM,

BERK-TEK / LEVITON 6AS10-03S EA
STRANDED
STRANDED
STRANDED
STRANDED
STRANDED
STRANDED
STRANDED
CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL- NON PLENUM (Bulk Cable)
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6A CABLE CMR WHITE (Riser-rated) MF

760105817 (Reel in a Box)
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6A CABLE CMR WHITE (Riser-rated) 760105817 MF
CAT 6A UTP CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 19 of 35

CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL- PLENUM (Bulk Cable)
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6A CABLE CMP WHITE (Plenum-rated) 760105940 MF
CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL-Termination Hardware MER/TR - SILVER
SYSTIMAX 360 CAT 6A PATCH PANEL FOR RACKS ANGLED 19” 24-
PORT T568B (SILVER)
SYSTIMAX 360 CAT 6A PATCH PANEL FOR RACKS ANGLED 19” 48-
PORT T568B (SILVER)
SYSTIMAX 360 CAT 6A PATCH PANEL FOR CABINETS FLAT 19” 24-
PORT T568B (SILVER)
SYSTIMAX 360 CAT 6A PATCH PANEL FOR CABINETS FLAT 19” 48-
PORT T568B (SILVER)
CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL-Termination Hardware MER/TR SPECIALTY ITEMS

(BLACK)
(BLACK)
CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL (Termination Hardware User/Remote end)
CATEGORY 6A PATCH PANEL FOR CABINETS FLAT 19” 24-PORT T568B

(BLACK)
CATEGORY 6A PATCH PANEL FOR CABINETS FLAT 19” 48-PORT T568B
(BLACK)
CATEGORY 6A PATCH PANEL INTEGRATED MANAGERS 24 PORT
T568B (SILVER)
CATEGORY 6A PATCH PANEL INTEGRATED MANAGERS 48 PORT
T568B (SILVER)
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6A INFORMATION OUTLET (JACK) T568B (WHITE) 760092429 EA
COMMSCOPE MODULAR FURNITURE 4 PORT FACEPLATE (WHITE) 760118232 EA
COMMSCOPE PLENUM SURFACE MOUNT BOX, 2-Port (WHITE) for WAPs. 760067207 EA
COMMSCOPE INFORMATION OUTLET DUST COVER (WHITE) 107067928 EA
COMMSCOPE CEILING CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY (PLENUM) WHITE 760235592 EA
CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL (Patch Cords) PLENUM
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6A MODULAR PATCH CORD (WHITE/PLENUM) 15 FT. EA

CPCSSY2-08F015

CATEGORY 6A HORIZONTAL (Patch Cords) NON-PLENUM
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6A MODULAR PATCH CORD (WHITE/NON-PLENUM) 3 FT. EA

CPCSSX2-08F003
CPCSSX2-08F005
CPCSSX2-08F007
CPCSSX2-08F010
CPCSSX2-08F015
CPCSSX2-08F020
COMMSCOPE CATEGORY 6A MODULAR PATCH CORD (WHITE/NON-PLENUM) 25 FT. CPCSSX2-08F025 EA

SECTION 27 13 24 — MULTIMODE FIBER BACKBONE COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
CORNING - OM3
FIELD TERMINATED INDOOR/OUTDOOR (FREEDOM) CABLE — OFNP - OM3
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 12 STRAND OM3 012TSP-T4180D20 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 12 STRAND ARMORED OM3 012TSP-T4180DA3 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 24 STRAND OM3 024TWP-T4180D20 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 24 STRAND ARMORED OM3 024TWP-T4180DA3 FT
FIELD TERMINATED INDOOR/OUTDOOR (FREEDOM) CABLE — OFNR - OM3
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNR 12 STRAND OM3 012TUF-T4180D20 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNR 12 STRAND ARMORED OM3 012TUF-T4180DA1 FT
FIELD TERMINATED INDOOR CABLE — OFNP - OM3
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 12 STRAND OM3 012T88-33180-29 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 12 STRAND ARMORED OM3 012T88-33180-A3 FT
FIELD TERMINATED INDOOR CABLE — OFNR - OM3
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNR 12 STRAND OM3 012T81-33180-24 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNR 12 STRAND ARMORED OM3 012T81-33180-A1 FT
MULTIMODE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 22 of 35

CORNING - OM4
FIELD TERMINATED INDOOR/OUTDOOR (FREEDOM) CABLE — OFNP - OM4
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 12 STRAND OM4 012TSP-T4190D20 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 12 STRAND ARMORED OM4 012TSP-T4190DA3 FT
FIELD TERMINATED INDOOR/OUTDOOR (FREEDOM) CABLE — OFNR - OM4
FIELD TERMINATED INDOOR CABLE — OFNP - OM4
FIELD TERMINATED INDOOR CABLE — OFNR - OM4
FIELD TERMINATION HARDWARE

FIELD TERMINATION HARDWARE - CORNING
1U CONNECTOR HOUSING 19” W, HOLDS 2 PANELS OR MODULES, 24

CORNING CCH-01U EA
OR 48 LC TOTAL
CORNING CCH-02U EA
OR 96 LC TOTAL
4U CONNECTOR HOUSING 19” W, FIXED, HOLDS 12 PANELS OR
CORNING CCH-04U EA
MODULES 144 OR 288 LC TOTAL
WALL MOUNT CONNECTOR HOUSING, HOLDS 2 PANELS OR
CORNING EA
MODULES, 24 OR 48 LC TOTAL PWH-02P
CORNING FIELD TERM CCH PANEL 6 LC DUPLEX, 50 µm ADAPTERS CCH-CP12-E4 EA
CORNING FIELD TERM CCH PANEL 12 LC DUPLEX, 50 µm ADAPTERS CCH-CP24-E4 EA
CORNING BUFFER TUBE FANOUT KIT, OUTDOOR, 25" tubing FAN-OD25-12 EA
CORNING BUFFER TUBE FANOUT KIT, INDOOR, 25" tubing FAN-BT25-12 EA
CORNING FIELD TERM LC, UNICAM MMF (50 µm) CONNECTOR, (1/PK) 95-050-99-X EA
CORNING FIELD TERM LC, UNICAM MMF (50 µm) CONNECTOR, (25/PK) 95-050-99-X-Z EA
CORNING FIELD TERM KIT TO MOUNT 100 µm LC CONNECTORS TKT-UNICAM-PFC EA
CORNING MOUNTING BRACKET KIT FOR 23" FRAME - 1U CONNECTOR HOUSING CDF-01U-23-BKT EA
CORNING FIELD TERM ANAEROBIC LC CONNECTOR 95-051-98-SP EA
CORNING FIELD TERM ANAEROBIC ADHESIVE & PRIMER, 500 LC CONNECTORS 1101045-01 EA
PATCH CORDS - OM3
CORNING UNIVERSAL - OM3
CORNING PATCH CORD 50/125 mm CMR, LC TO LC, 1 METER UNIVERSAL OM3 050502T5116001M EA
CORNING PATCH CORD 50/125 mm CMR, LC TO SC, 1 METER UNIVERSAL OM3 055702T5120001M EA

CORNING PATCH CORD 50/125 mm CMR, LC TO SC,10 METER UNIVERSAL OM3 055702T5120010M EA
CORNING UNIVERSAL - OM4
CORNING PATCH CORD 50/125 mm CMR, LC TO LC, 1 METER UNIVERSAL OM4 050502Q5116001M EA
CORNING PATCH CORD 50/125 mm CMR, LC TO SC, 1 METER UNIVERSAL OM4 055702Q5120001M EA
CORNING PATCH CORD 50/125 mm CMR, LC TO SC,10 METER UNIVERSAL OM4 055702Q5120010M EA
CORNING EDGE - OM3
PATCH CORD, REVERSE POLARITY UNIBOOT, 50/125 mm CMR, LC TO

CORNING 797902TD120001M EA
LC, 1 METER EDGE OM3
PATCH CORD 50/125 mm CMR, LC (REVERSE POLARITY UNIBOOT) TO
SC, 1 METER EDGE OM3


SC,10 METER EDGE OM3
PATCH CORDS - OM4
CORNING EDGE - OM4

CORNING 797902QD120001M EA
SC,10 METER EDGE OM4
CORNING PATCH CORD 50/125 mm CMR, LC TO SC, 1 METER EDGE OM4 577902QD120001M EA
CORNING PATCH CORD 50/125 mm CMR, LC TO SC, 3 METER EDGE OM4 EA

577902QD120003M
CORNING PATCH CORD 50/125 mm CMR, LC TO SC,10 METER EDGE OM4 577902QD120010M EA

SECTION 27 13 24 — SINGLEMODE FIBER BACKBONE COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
FIELD TERMINATED SINGLEMODE
FIELD TERMINATED CABLE — INDOOR/OUTDOOR OFNP
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 12 STRAND 012ESP-T4101D20 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 12 STRAND ARMORED 012ESP-T4101DA3 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 24 STRAND 024EWP-T4101D20 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 24 STRAND ARMORED 024EWP-T4101DA3 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 48 STRAND 048EWP-T4101D20 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 48 STRAND ARMORED 048EWP-T4101DA3 FT
FIELD TERMINATED CABLE — INDOOR/OUTDOOR OFNR
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNR 12 STRAND 012EUF-T4101D20 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNR 12 STRAND ARMORED 012EUF-T4101DA1 FT
FIELD TERMINATED CABLE — INDOOR OFNP
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 12 STRAND 012E88-33131-29 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 12 STRAND ARMORED 012E88-33131-A3 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 24 STRAND 024E88-33131-29 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNP 24 STRAND ARMORED 024E88-33131-A3 FT
FIELD TERMINATED CABLE — INDOOR OFNR
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNR 12 STRAND 012E81-33131-24 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNR 12 STRAND ARMORED 012E81-33131-A1 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNR 24 STRAND 024E81-33131-24 FT
CORNING FIELD TERM OFNR 24 STRAND ARMORED 024E81-33131-A1 FT
FIELD TERMINATION HARDWARE
SINGLEMODE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 27 of 35

FIELD TERMINATION HARDWARE - CORNING

CORNING CCH-01U EA
OR 48 LC TOTAL
CORNING CCH-02U EA
OR 96 LC TOTAL
4U CONNECTOR HOUSING 19” W, FIXED, HOLDS 12 PANELS OR
CORNING CCH-04U EA
MODULES 144 OR 288 LC TOTAL
WALL MOUNT CONNECTOR HOUSING, HOLDS 2 PANELS OR
CORNING PWH-02P EA
MODULES, 24 OR 48 LC TOTAL
CORNING FIELD TERM CCH PANEL 6 LC DUPLEX, SMF ADAPTERS CCH-CP12-A9 EA
CORNING FIELD TERM CCH PANEL 12 LC DUPLEX, SMF ADAPTERS CCH-CP24-A9 EA
CORNING BUFFER TUBE FANOUT KIT, OUTDOOR, 25" tubing FAN-OD25-12 EA
CORNING BUFFER TUBE FANOUT KIT, INDOOR, 25" tubing FAN-BT25-12 EA
CORNING FIELD TERM LCUPC, UNICAM SMF CONNECTOR, (1/PK) 95-200-99-X EA
CORNING FIELD TERM LCUPC, UNICAM SMF CONNECTOR, (25/PK) 95-200-99-X-Z EA
CORNING FIELD TERM KIT TO MOUNT 100 µm LC CONNECTORS TKT-UNICAM-PFC EA
CORNING FIELD TERM ANAEROBIC LC CONNECTOR 95-201-98-SP EA
CORNING FIELD TERM ANAEROBIC ADHESIVE & PRIMER, 500 LC CONNECTORS 1101045-01 EA
CORNING SINGLEMODE (OS2), APC, UNICAM 95-200-94 EA
PATCH CORDS - SINGLEMODE
CORNING UNIVERSAL
PATCH CORD, REVERSE POLARITY UNIBOOT, SMF CMR, LC TO LC, 1

CORNING 787802GD120001M EA
METER
METER
METER
METER
METER
METER
PATCH CORD SMF CMR, LC (REVERSE POLARITY UNIBOOT) TO SC, 1
METER
METER


METER
METER
METER
PATCH CORD SMF CMR, LC (REVERSE POLARITY UNIBOOT) TO SC,10
METER

SECTION 27 13 34 — COAXIAL CABLE COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT
Belden RG-59 - QUAD SHEILD COAX (Non-Plenum) 1186A EA
Belden RG-6 - QUAD SHEILD COAX (Non-Plenum) 5339Q5 EA
CommScope M81C-COUPLER F CONNECTOR 108009432 EA
CommScope RG-6, PLENUM RATED, QUAD SHIELD, HORIZONTAL COAX 2227V EA
CommScope RG-11, PLENUM RATED, QUAD SHIELD, COAX BACKBONE 2287V EA
Leviton F CONNECTOR 40831-BW EA
Belden RG-11 - QUAD SHEILD COAX (Non-Plenum) 1617A EA
Belden RG-59 - QUAD SHEILD COAX (Plenum) 1151A EA
Belden RG-6 - QUAD SHEILD COAX (Plenum) 6339Q8 EA
Belden RG-11 - QUAD SHEILD COAX (Plenum) 1153A EA
Belden BNC Connector FS59BNCURA EA
Belden BNC Connector FSNS6BNCU EA
Belden BNC Connector FS11BNC EA
Belden BNC Connector SNS1PBNC EA
Belden BNC Connector FSNS6BNCU EA
Belden BNC Connector FSNS11HBNC EA
Belden BNC Connector DBDS3BNC EA
Belden F Connector FSNS59URA EA
Belden F Connector AX105346-EW EA
Belden F Connector FSNS6U-25 EA
Belden F Connector 716SNS1P11H EA
Belden F Connector FSNS6U-25 EA
Belden F Connector 716SNS1P11H EA
COAX CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 30 of 35

SECTION 33 82 53 — CABLE PULLING LUBRICANTS COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG. PART NUMBER UNIT
American Polywater FTTx Lubricant – Wipe Canister, Contains 20 Wipes FTTx-D20 EA
American Polywater FTTx Lubricant — 1 Quart Spray Bottle FTTx-35LR EA
LUBRICANTS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 31 of 35

POWER CORD -
POWER CORD
SECTION 26 27 33 - POWER STRIPS COMPONENT DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER UNIT DEFAULT FOR NEW POWER INPUT OUTLET PRESENTATION LENGTH / Monitored
POSITION
PLUG
GEIST Vertical rack mountable PDU strip MN02X4W1-36MT79-3TL21A0D03-S-0W (White) EA 30A, 120/208V WYE, 8.6kW 24 x C13 x 6 x C19 x 6 x 5-20R 3' - L21-30P BOTTOM Yes
GEIST Vertical rack mountable PDU strip MN02X41-36MT79-3TL21A0D03-S (Black) EA 30A, 120/208V WYE, 8.6kW 24 x C13 x 6 x C19 x 6 x 5-20R 3' - L21-30P BOTTOM Yes
GEIST Vertical rack mountable PDU strip MN02X4W1-34MX09-3TL14A0D03-S (Black) EA 30A, 120/208V WYE, 4.9kW 24 x C13 x 6 x C19 x 4 x 5-20R 3' - L14-30P BOTTOM Yes
GEIST Vertical rack mountable PDU strip MN02X4W1-34MX09-3TL14A0D03-S-0W (White) EA 30A, 120/208V WYE, 4.9kW 24 x C13 x 6 x C19 x 4 x 5-20R 3' - L14-30P BOTTOM Yes
CPI Vertical rack mountable PDU strip TS1032034 (White) EA 208v - 30a - 3 Phase 24 x C13, 6 x C19, 6 x 5-20R 3' - L21-30P TOP Yes
CPI Vertical rack mountable PDU strip TS1034387 (Black) EA 208v - 30a - 3 Phase 24 x C13, 6 x C19, 6 x 5-20R 3' - L21-30P TOP Yes
CPI Vertical rack mountable PDU strip P3-1K0K4 (Black) EA 208v - 30a - 1 Phase 24 x C13, 6 x C19, 6 x 5-20R 10' - L14-30P BOTTOM Yes
CPI Horizontal PDU strip TS1027868 EA 120/208V - 30A - 3 PhASE 18 X C13, 3 x C19, 3 x 5-20R
RARITAN Vertical rack mountable PDU strip PX3-1261U-A7 (Black) EA 30A, 208V WYE, 8.6kVA 24 x C13, 3 x C19, x 6 x 5-20R 1m - L21-30P TOP Yes
RARITAN Vertical rack mountable PDU strip PX3-1261U-A7K7 (White) EA 30A, 208V WYE, 8.6kVA 24 x C13, 3 x C19, x 6 x 5-20R 1m - L21-30P TOP Yes
POWER STRIP MOUNT BRACKET APPLICATION
VERTICAL PDU MOUNT (SMALL "Z" BRACKET) WHITE (2-POST Rack

Chatsworth TS1032005 EA 2-POST RACK
applications)
Chatsworth VERTICAL PDU MOUNT WHITE (4-POST Rack applications) TS1033583A EA 4-POST RACK
VERTICAL PDU MOUNT (SMALL "Z" BRACKET) BLACK (2-POST Rack

Chatsworth TS1012713 EA 2-POST RACK
applications)
Chatsworth VERTICAL PDU MOUNT BLACK (4-POST Rack applications) TS1030523 EA 4-POST RACK
POWER STRIPS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 32 of 35

JPMC WTS Corporate Real Estate EMEA Appendix E - SCE Authorised Product List and Part Numbers
Manufacturer Media Manufacturer Part No. Description
Corning Fibre CCHE-CP24-AD CCHE Panel, LC Duplex 24f 50/125 (OM4) shuttered
Corning Fibre CCHE-CP24-AE CCHE Panel, LC Duplex 24f SM (OS2) shuttered
Corning Fibre 95-050-99-X UniCam Connector LC 50/125 (OM4)
Corning Fibre 95-200-99 UniCam Connector LC SM (OS2)
Corning Fibre PCH-01U Pretium Connector Housing (PCH) 1RU - Holds 2 x 24c CCH Panels
Corning Fibre 012T8X-36198E2C MIC® Tight Buffer Indoor Cable 12F G50 MMF ClearCurve® OM4 0.9mm TB3 B2ca,s1,d1,a1
Corning Fibre 012Z8X-36125E2C MIC® Tight Buffer Indoor Cable 12F E9 SMF-28e+® 0.9mm TB3 B2ca,s1,d1,a1
Corning Fibre 024T8X-36198E2C MIC® Tight Buffer Indoor Cable 24F G50 MMF ClearCurve® OM4 0.9mm TB3 B2ca,s1,d1,a1
Corning Fibre 024Z8X-36125E2C MIC® Tight Buffer Indoor Cable 24F E9 SMF-28e+® 0.9mm TB3 B2ca,s1,d1,a1
Corning Fibre 012T8Z-32198E2G MIC® Tight Buffer Indoor Cable 12F G50 MMF ClearCurve® OM4 0.9mm TB3 Cca,s1,d1,a1
Corning Fibre 012E8Z-32125E2G MIC® Tight Buffer Indoor Cable 12F E9 SMF-28e+® 0.9mm TB3 Cca,s1,d1,a1
Corning Fibre 024T8Z-32198E2G MIC® Tight Buffer Indoor Cable 24F G50 MMF ClearCurve® OM4 0.9mm TB3 Cca,s1,d1,a1
Corning Fibre 024E8Z-32125E2G MIC® Tight Buffer Indoor Cable 24F E9 SMF-28e+® 0.9mm TB3 Cca,s1,d1,a1
Corning Fibre E787802GNZ20001M Patch Cord SM LC TO LC, 1 Meter
Corning Fibre E797902QNZ20001M Patch Cord OM4 LC TO LC, 1 Meter
GigaSPEED XL® 3071 Category 6 U/UTP Cable, LSZH, white jacket, 1000 ft (305 m) Reel
Commscope Copper 760237882 Cca,s1,d1,a1
GigaSPEED XL® 3071 Category 6 U/UTP Cable, LSZH, white jacket, 1000 ft (305 m) Reel
Commscope Copper 760237883 B2ca,s1,d0,a1
Commscope Copper 700206725 MGS400 Cat6 Information Outlet White
Commscope Copper 760187872 M12D-F-262 Faceplate, 2-port, White
Commscope Copper 760187880 M14D-F-262 Double Faceplate, 4-port, White
Commscope Copper 760161067 LF80 Shuttered Clip
Commscope Copper 760206797 1100A-U-GS3-24 Category 6 Straight Patch Panel
Commscope Copper 760206813 1100A-U-GS3-24 Category 6 Angled Patch Panel
Commscope Copper 760206821 1100A-GS3-48 Category 6 Angled Patch Panel
Commscope Copper CPC3392-03Fxxx GigaSPEED XL® GS8E Patch Cord, Dark Gray Jacket -xxxft LSZH
EMEA PRODUCT LIST CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY TO JPMORGAN CHASE AND CO. 33 of 35
Commscope Copper CPC3392-08Fxxx GigaSPEED XL® GS8E Patch Cord, White Jacket -xxxft LSZH
GigaSPEED X10D 3091B Cat6A 4-Pair U/UTP LSZH White Jacket Cable 1000 ft (305m) reel
Commscope Copper 760237624 Cca,s1,d1,a1
GigaSPEED X10D 3091B Cat6A 4-Pair U/UTP LSZH White Jacket Cable 1000 ft (305m) reel
Commscope Copper 760237884 B2ca,s1,d0,a1
Commscope Copper 760152587 SYSTIMAX 360 1100GS6 Evolve 24-Port Patch Panel
Commscope Copper 760151324 SYSTIMAX 360 1100GS6 Evolve 24-Port Angled Patch Panel
Commscope Copper 760092429 GigaSPEED X10D MGS600 White Information Outlet
Commscope Copper CPCSSZ2-08FXXX GigaSPEED X10D 360GS10E LSZH Solid Modular White Patch Cord - xxxft
GigaSPEED X10D 360GS10E LSZH Solid Modular White Patch Cord - xxxft For Harness Links
Commscope Copper CA1SSS2-08FXXX Only, B2ca,s1,d0,a1
CPI - 15214-E03 45U Adjustable Quadra Rack, Square Punched, 925mm to 1075mm, White
CPI - 35524-E03 12" Vertical Cable Manager, White
CPI - 34537-E00 1U Blank Panel, White
CPI - 34538-E00 2U Blank Panel, White
CPI - 35441-E01 1U Horizontal Manager, White
CPI - 35441-E04 4U Horizontal Manager, White
CPI - 10250-E18 18" Universal Cable Runway, White
CPI - 13392-E11 (-E12) Runway Dividers White 5 Pack (25 Pack)
CPI - 11421-E18 Wall Angled Support
CPI - 10506-E06 Cable Runway Elevation Kit For Racks; 4"- 6" High,1 Pair; White
CPI - TS1038355 Double Cable Radius Drop - Cross Member, White
CPI - 35502-E02 Solid Side Panel
CPI - TS1034299 2 Piece PDU Mounting Bracket (Adjustable QuadraRack Only)
CPI - 13676-001 Koldlok - Frames & Cabinets
CPI - TS1034193 Vertical Busbar Kit - Cabinets Only - Includes 20 No. 2 Hole Compression Lugs
CPI - TS1007096 19" Horizontal Busbar Kit - Includes 10 No. 2 Hole Compression Lugs
CPI - 40162-901 2 Hole Compression Lug 1/4" Hole
- - MTMPHM40CM80P000 M4 8MM Screw for Compression Lug (Cisco 4510 Connection)
CPI - 40164-001 Cable Runway Ground Strap Kit
JPMC Cable lashing Manager set for AQR/ASR 45U 500mm. Should include JPMC Cable lashing
CPI - TS1026952 Manager Support (2 piece set) for AQR. Rack depth must be set to 925mm.
CPI - TS1032071 JPMC Cable lashing Manager Support (2 piece set) for AQR. Rack depth must be set to 925mm
Austin Hughes - AHH026041000213111 PDU - 4xC13, 2xSchuko, 16A 3m lead - Horizontal 1U Single Feed
Austin Hughes - AHH026041000313111 PDU - 4xC13, 2xSchuko, 32A 3m lead - Horizontal 1U Single Feed
Austin Hughes - AHH025041000213111 PDU - 4xC13, 2xUK, 16A 3m Lead - Horizontal 1U Single Feed
Austin Hughes - AHH025041000313111 PDU - 4xC13, 2xUK, 32A 3m Lead - Horizontal 1U Single Feed
Austin Hughes - AHH065081022213111D PDU - 8xC13, 6xUK, 16A 3m Lead - Horizontal 2U Dual Feed
Austin Hughes - AHH065081022313111D PDU - 8xC13, 6xUK, 32A 3m Lead - Horizontal 2U Dual Feed
Austin Hughes - AHH066081022213111D PDU - 8xC13, 6xSchuko, 16A 3m Lead - Horizontal 2U Dual Feed
Austin Hughes - AHH066081022313111D PDU - 8xC13, 6xSchuko, 32A 3m Lead - Horizontal 2U Dual Feed
Austin Hughes - AHV046121042213121 PDU - 12xC13, 4xSchuko, 4xC19, 16A 3m lead, top feed
Austin Hughes - AHV046121042313121 PDU - 12xC13, 4xSchuko, 4xC19, 32A 3m lead, top feed
Austin Hughes - AHV043121042213121 PDU - 12xC13, 4xUK 45 Degrees, 4xC19, 16A 3m lead, top feed
Lasermark - sales@lasermark.co.uk All traffolyte labelling as detailed on drawings T4.01 & T4.02
Lasermark - sales@lasermark.co.uk Rack mountable acrylic switch port templates
JPMorgan Chase and Co. APPENDIX F – Data Clean Specification & Cleaning Policy For
MERs and TRs
1. Overview
a. This document outlines the standards for cleaning technology rooms,
inclusive of Main Equipment rooms (MERs) and Technology Rooms
(TRs).
b. Work shall be done by qualified vendor personnel who specialize and
have significant experience in the cleaning of server environments and
appropriate training with the materials and operational procedures
specified in this document.
c. The vendor will provide proof of insurance and bonding.
d. Means and methods must be approved by the owner prior to
commencement.
e. Testing will be conducted post-cleaning to confirm appropriate measures
of cleanliness have been met.
2. Pre-cleaning Preparation
a. A meeting and walk-through of the all data rooms must be scheduled prior
to the cleaning. Attendees are to include the owner, a cleaning vendor
representative, and the cleaning vendor’s work crew supervisor who will
be present during the work.
b. The owner will review the data room Standards of Operation and
designate what building areas workers are authorized to be in.
c. The contractor shall provide tool power plan to the owner for approval for
the vendor’s use while cleaning. No other outlets may be used by vendor
personnel.
3. Standards of Operation
a. Cleaning vendor personnel are required to observe the data room
Standards of Operations at all times. At a minimum, this includes:
i. No food or drink in the room
ii. No propping data room doors
iii. No interfering with the operation of data room equipment
iv. No unauthorized/un-badged personnel in data room
v. Checking in with Operations Command Center when vendor
personnel start and complete work for the day.
b. Workers must wear clothing that easily identifies them as members of the
cleaning company.
c. During the cleaning, workers are responsible for conducting themselves in
such a manner as to protect the owner’s equipment and infrastructure and
to avoid creating hazards for employees who enter the work area.
d. Signage or safety cones should be used to surround open floor tiles,
electrical cords strung along the floor, and any areas that are being damp-
mopped.

MERs and TRs
4. Approved Equipment & Materials

a. The vendor will use the following approved equipment and supplies:
i. Triple-filtration high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) or S-Class
vacuums, capable of removing 99.97 percent of particles 0.3
microns or larger.
ii. Cleaning chemicals that are pH neutral, static dissipative, and
approved or qualified by computer hardware manufacturers.
iii. Material Safety Data Sheets must be provided to the owner prior to
performing work.
iv. Canned air.
v. Lint-free mops that are approved or qualified by computer hardware
manufacturers. Mops should have nonmetal handles and sewn
ends, to prevent snagging. Mop heads should have looped ends,
not ends that are open or stringy or both.
vi. Lint-free, antistatic wipes and towels that are approved or qualified
by computer hardware manufacturers.
vii. Low-speed floor scrubbing machines.
viii. Electrical cords that are in good condition and possess appropriate
ground configuration.
ix. A stable stepladder with non-marking rubber feet.
5. Equipment Cleaning Procedures

a. A HEPA vacuum will be used to clean the horizontal surfaces of all
equipment.
b. Cloths treated with antistatic property chemical will be used to wipe down
all external surfaces of all cabinets, polystyrene end-row sheets, servers,
networking devices, and storage units.
c. Chemicals will not be sprayed directly onto equipment.
d. Keyboards will not be touched during cleanings.
e. Cleaning activities should generally progress downward from the ceiling
and outward from the room’s air handlers.
6. High Level and/or Above-Ceiling Cleaning Procedures

a. All cable trays, unistrut, beams, etc. to be blown through with compressed
air and wiped down with appropriate cloths and chemicals.
7. Low Level and/or Below-Ceiling Cleaning Procedures

a. Vacuum surface dust and particles from the top of all raceways and cable
trays that are secured below the room’s ceiling.
b. Make note of any unusual conditions—loose brackets, damaged cable
bundles, condensation, and so on—and include them in the final report
provided to be provided to the CM and owner.
8. Cleaning of Technology cabinets/racks
a. Wipe down the external surfaces of all server cabinets using lint-free
cloths treated with antistatic chemical. Avoid disturbing patch cords or

MERs and TRs
power cables, touching keyboards, moving hardware, or spraying

chemicals directly onto equipment.
b. Use canned air to dislodge dust in areas that cannot be reached by hand.
9. Floor Surface Cleaning Procedures

a. When cleaning the raised floor, avoid disturbing any cables that are routed
through the notched opening of floor tiles.
b. Vacuum surface dust and particles from the top of all accessible portions
of the floor, including blank, notched, and perforated floor tiles.
c. Treat smudges, stains, black marks, and so on, with an approved solution
and scrub with a medium-grade scrub pad. Use an approved floor
machine to clean all accessible portions of the floor.
d. Last, mop the floor with a damp—not wet—mop using clean, warm water.
Use a two-bucket system, one for mopping and one for rinsing. Change
water frequently in both buckets.
e. Make note of any damaged floor tiles and include their location in the final
report provided to CM and owner.
10. Sub floor Cleaning Procedures

a. Sub floor cleaning must be planned by and in conjunction with GRE.
b. GRE must disable the smoke detection system prior to work.
c. Compliance with GRE site requirements that identify the maximum
number of allowable open tiles must be followed.
d. Starting in one corner of the room, pull up floor tiles in a checkerboard
pattern to access the sub-floor. No more than ten percent of the room’s
tiles should be removed at one time.
e. Vacuum the sub floor, carefully maneuvering in and around cable bundles,
base columns, and walls. Do not move cable bundles or electrical
conduits.
f. Remove any large debris and place in the trash.
g. Make note of any unusual floor conditions—loose floor pedestals, cracks,
condensation, signs of food or drinks, and so on—and include them in the
final report provided to CM and owner.
11. Post cleaning Procedures

a. A final walkthrough should be performed with the CM, owner, cleaning
vendor representative, and the cleaning vendor’s work crew supervisor
who participated in the cleaning.
b. The vendor will provide a report within two weeks of the project’s
completion. It will include a graph of pre-cleaning and post cleaning
particle counts, ferrous metal test, supporting data, and a summary of any
unusual TR conditions discovered during the cleaning.
12. Schedule
a. The room cleaning will be scheduled with Building Operations and the
Technology Facilities Supervisor.

MERs and TRs
b. Cleanings should be scheduled with a minimum 1 week notice.

c. Cleanings will be conducted after normal business hours.
13. Results & Measuring

a. Rooms shall meet a data clean condition of Level 8 - ISO 14644-1(99)
209 clean room and associated controlled environments standard.

APPENDIX H
WTS Cable Design and Engineering

Installation Standard -
CISCO WIRELESS ACCESS POINT
Version 6.0.1
July 1, 2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. BACKGROUND .................................................................................................................. 4

2. POWER ............................................................................................................................ 4
3. CABLING .......................................................................................................................... 5
4. ACCESS POINTS ............................................................................................................... 6
4.1. 2700 Series Access Point ............................................................................................... 6
5. MOUNTING ..................................................................................................................... 13
5.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 13
5.2. Mounting Hardware....................................................................................................... 14
5.3. Mounting Brackets ........................................................................................................ 14
5.4. Ceiling Grid Clips .......................................................................................................... 16
5.5. Additional Adapters for Channel and Beam Ceiling Rails ............................................. 16
5.6. Mounting an Access Point below a Suspended Ceiling ................................................ 17
5.7. Mounting an Access Point on a Hard Ceiling or a Wall ................................................ 19
5.8. Mounting an Access Point to a Network or Electrical Box ............................................ 21
5.9. Grounding an Access Point .......................................................................................... 22

List of Figures
Figure 1 - Typical wireless access point cabling schematic ............................................................................ 5

Figure 2 - Access Point Ports and Connections (top)-2702E Model ............................................................... 7
Figure 3 - Access Point LED Indicator (top) - 2702I Model ............................................................................. 7
Figure 4 - Access Point Ports and Connections (bottom)-AIR2702E and 2702I Models ................................ 8
Figure 5 - Face of the 3802I Model ................................................................................................................. 9
Figure 6 - Face of the 3802E Model .............................................................................................................. 10
Figure 7 - Ports and Connections on the Head of the AP ............................................................................. 11
Figure 8 - AP Module Connector Port on the Base ....................................................................................... 12
Figure 9 - Smart Antenna Connector on the Right Side of the 3802E Model ............................................... 13
Figure 10 - Universal Bracket Installed on an Access Point.......................................................................... 14
Figure 11 - Low-Profile Mounting Bracket Installed on an Access Point ....................................................... 15
Figure 12 - Ceiling Grid Clip .......................................................................................................................... 16
Figure 13 - T-Rail, Channel, and Beam Ceiling Rail Types........................................................................... 17
Figure 14 - Adapter Clips Installed with Ceiling Grid Clips ............................................................................ 17
Figure 15 - Suspended Ceiling Mounting Details .......................................................................................... 18
Figure 16 - Universal Mounting Bracket Details ............................................................................................ 20
Figure 17 - Routing the Ethernet and Power Cables ..................................................................................... 21
Figure 18 - Installing the O-Ring Lug to the Grounding Post ........................................................................ 22

1. Background
JP Morgan Chase (JPMC) has standardized on Cisco Aironet 2700 and 3800 series wireless access
points. For proper signal coverage, APs shall be placed per the PRE survey report. APs are typically
mounted to the drop ceiling grid. The Cisco 2700 and 3800 series APs are plenum-rated devices suitable
for such locations.
Note: The installation process consists of several steps, consisting of;
 The initial Planner Report shall only be used in the initial Structured Cabling Design package in
order to obtain pricing from the bidders.
 Once the PRE Survey Report is available, the Structured Cabling Design package shall be updated
to reflect the AP Numbering and specific location information for the installation of the APs.
 The Cable vendor shall identify the MAC addresses of the installed APs matching the PRE Survey
AP Numbering.
 The Network Engineer provides switch port assignments.
 The Cable vendor patches WAPs in the Technology Space and verifies LED on AP is lit.
 The WiFi Services engineer configures the wireless LAN controllers (if required).
 The Network Engineer programs the APs and points them to wireless LAN controller using the
MAC to AP spreadsheet.
 The LOB performs the UAT testing to verify WiFi network is operational.
 The WiFi Services engineer validates logical/physical installation of the APs.
 The Professional Services vendor conducts the POST Survey which will reflect the actual required
mounting points required to achieve optimal coverage.
 Per the POST Survey some AP locations may require repositioning by the Cable vendor.
2. Power
This product shall be connected to a power-over-Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3at 30W compliant power
source. Each access point requires one dedicated full-duplex 1000 Mb/s switch port.
Note: If no LED indicator is present on the AP
 Verify cable connection to the AP.
 Verify network switch and patch panel connections.
 Verify cable.

Cisco 3800 Series AP LED Indicator Status
3. Cabling
APs use a single cable for both signal and power (POE); the JPMC Global Structured Cabling Standard
specifies two Cat6A white cable runs from the Telecommunication Room (TR) to each access point. The
first cable is used to extend the device’s console connection in order to provide out of band access in case
of a configuration error or outage. This first cable terminates to the patch panel and is not connected to the
LAN switch. The second Cat6A white cable is used for both signal and power. The second cable
terminates to the patch panel and is connected to the LAN switch.
This junction box is the termination point for the cables run back to the TRs and their connectors are also
color-coded. The white cables correspond to the console and Ethernet connectors on the access points.
This helps prevent improper connections during installation. The following figure shows the cabling
arrangement for the access points in detail. See Figure 1 for a typical cabling schematic.
Note All work shall be performed in accordance with the prevailing version of
the JP Morgan Chase Global Structured Cabling Standard.
Figure 1 - Typical wireless access point cabling schematic

Contractor should pay particular attention to the following requirements:

 Wherever practical, access points should not be located near metal objects such as air ducts and
structural steel that may obstruct the wireless signal.
 Unless otherwise directed in writing, Contractor shall install all wireless access points below the
suspended ceiling at the specified height and location per the PRE Survey report.
 AP mounting can deviate 2 to 3’ from the survey to allow for unforeseen obstacles such as fire
suppression and lighting fixtures.
 Patch cords at the wireless access point shall be Category 6A with a preferred length of 1 m or 2 m
(3ft. or 6 ft.) where possible, with slake (service) loops managed in the horizontal cable. Should
conduit be required to the WAP outlet, Category 6A patch cords may be used up to 5 m (16 ft.) in
length to allow for potential repositioning of the WAPs.
4. Access Points
4.1. 2700 Series Access Point
The 2702E model access point has external antenna connectors and the LED indictor on the top of the
model, as shown in Figure 2. The 2702I model access point has integrated antennas and does not have
external connectors on the top of the unit; however, it does have the LED indicator on top of the unit, as
shown in Figure 3.

1 Dual-band antenna connector A 3 Dual-band antenna connector C

2 Dual-band antenna connector B 4 Dual-band antenna connector D
Figure 2 - Access Point Ports and Connections (top)-2702E Model
1 LED indicator
Figure 3 - Access Point LED Indicator (top) - 2702I Model

The ports and connections on the bottom of the access point are shown in Figure 4.
1 Kensington lock slot 4 Auxiliary Ethernet Port

2 DC Power connection port 5 RS232 Console Port
3 Primary Ethernet port 6 Mounting bracket pins (feet for desk or table-top mount)
Figure 4 - Access Point Ports and Connections (bottom)-AIR2702E and 2702I Models
Note The Auxiliary Ethernet port is disabled. Do not connect this port to a PoE switch. Connecting the
primary and auxiliary ports to a PoE switch will not provide additional power.
4.2 3800 Series Access Point

Physical dimensions 8.66”L X 8.66” W X 2.46” H Weight 4.7 pounds

Figure 5 - Face of the 3802I Model

1 Status LED
2 Location of the ports and connectors on the head of the AP
3 Location of the module connector port on the base of the AP

Figure 6 - Face of the 3802E Model
1 Dual-band antenna connector A

2 Dual-band antenna connector B
3 Dual-band antenna connector C
4 Dual-band antenna connector D
5 Status LED
6 Location of the ports and connectors on the head of the AP
7 Location of the Smart antenna connector port on the right side of the AP
8 Location of the module connector port on the base of the AP

Figure 7 - Ports and Connections on the Head of the AP

1 Kensington lock slot
2 Mode button
3 Console port
4 USB port (not currently used)
5 AUX / Gigabit Ethernet port (not currently used)
6 PoE / mGig port connect this port to the network switch
7 48 VDC power port (not currently used)

Figure 8 - AP Module Connector Port on the Base
AP Module connector if Figure 8 is a special purpose port, currently not used but may be utilized in future
deployments.

Figure 9 - Smart Antenna Connector on the Right Side of the 3802E Model
Smart Antenna Connector may be utilized in future deployments.
5. Mounting
5.1. Introduction
The mounting instructions describe the steps for mounting Cisco Aironet 3800, and 2700 series APs in
several configurations, including on a suspended ceiling, on a hard ceiling or wall, on an electrical or
network box.
Note: The normal and preferred AP mounting method is to a dropped ceiling grid. This mounting practice
will better accommodate the weight of the AP. Drop Ceiling mounting, APs with integrated antennas are
designed to be mounted horizontally from the ceiling below lighting fixtures and HVAC ducting. Typical
install is 8’ to 10’ from the floor. If there is a requirement to mount the AP in any other manner, advance
approval and direction from the Wi-Fi team is required.

5.2. Mounting Hardware
Mounting hardware for access points consists of brackets, which connect to the bottom of the access point,
and ceiling grid clips, which connect the bracket to a suspended ceiling. The bracket that you need
depends on the mounting location for the access point. The ceiling grid clip that you need depends on the
type of suspended ceiling where you need to install the access point. You don't need ceiling grid clips if you
are mounting the access point to a hard-surface ceiling or a wall.
5.3. Mounting Brackets
The JPMC standard mounting bracket, AIR-AP-BRACKET-2, is deployed for new builds, with AIR-AP-
BRACKET-1 deployed only on an exception basis:
• The universal bracket (AIR-AP-BRACKET-2) , the JPMC standard bracket, is versatile (it works with
electrical boxes, can be used for wall mounting, and adapts to ceiling installations), increases compatibility
with future access point models, and allows for installation of the expansion module on the back of the
access point. Figure10 shows the universal bracket installed on an access point.
• The low-profile bracket (AIR-AP-BRACKET-1), which provides a tight fit between the access point and
the ceiling but does not accommodate network/electrical box or wall mounting. Figure11 shows the low-
profile bracket installed on an access point.
Figure 10 - Universal Bracket Installed on an Access Point

Figure 11 - Low-Profile Mounting Bracket Installed on an Access Point

5.4. Ceiling Grid Clips
Ceiling grid clips are used to mount the access point to a suspended ceiling grid. The ceiling grid clip
needed depends on the ceiling tile installed at the site.
There are two types of ceiling grid clips:
• Ceiling Grid Clip, Recessed (AIR-AP-T-RAIL-R)—If the ceiling tile hangs below the ceiling grid, the
recessed clip provides the best fit between the AP and the ceiling.
• Ceiling Grid Clip, Flush (AIR-AP-T-RAIL-F)—If the ceiling tiles are flush with the ceiling grid, this clip
provides a snug fit between the AP and the ceiling.
Figure 12 shows a ceiling grid clip.
1 Locking screws 3 T-rail width detents (A, B, or C)

2 Bracket screw holes
Figure 12 - Ceiling Grid Clip
5.5. Additional Adapters for Channel and Beam Ceiling Rails
The most common type of ceiling rail (the supports for the ceiling tiles) is the T-rail. You can attach a ceiling
grid clip directly to a T-rail ceiling rail. However, other types of ceiling rails, such as channel rails and beam

rails require an additional adapter clip (AIR-CHNL-ADAPTER). You need two adapter clips for each access
point. Set screws on the clips hold them securely on the ceiling rail.
Figure 13 shows the three types of ceiling rails: T-rail, channel, and beam. Figure 14 shows an access
point installed with mounting bracket, ceiling grid clip, and adapter clips.
Figure 13 - T-Rail, Channel, and Beam Ceiling Rail Types
Figure 14 - Adapter Clips Installed with Ceiling Grid Clips
5.6. Mounting an Access Point below a Suspended Ceiling
Follow these steps to mount the access point below a standard or recessed suspended ceiling. Figure 15
shows an access point mounted on a T-rail ceiling rail using a ceiling grid clip.

1 Access point mounting keyhole 4 Access point cable access cover

2 Ceiling grid clip 5 Ceiling T-rail
3 Grounding point
Figure 15 - Suspended Ceiling Mounting Details
Follow these steps to mount the access point below a suspended ceiling.
Step 1 Decide where you want to mount the access point on your suspended ceiling.
Step 2 Open the ceiling grid clip completely.
Step 3 Place the ceiling grid clip over the T-rail and close it to the appropriate detent (A, B, or C).
Step 4 Use a screwdriver to tighten the two ceiling grid clip locking screws to prevent the clip from sliding
along the T-rail.
Step 5 Observe the ceiling grid clip width detent letter (A, B, or C) that corresponds to the T-rail width.
Step 6 Align the corresponding holes (A, B, or C) on the mounting bracket over the mounting holes on the
ceiling grid clip.
Step 7 Hold the mounting bracket and insert a 6-32 x 1/4 in. screw into each of the four corresponding
holes (A, B, or C) and tighten.
Step 8 If necessary, drill or cut a cable access hole in the ceiling tile large enough for the Ethernet and
power cables. Pull the cables through the access hole until you have about 1 foot of cable
protruding from the hole.
Step 9 (Optional) Use the ground screw to ground the access point to a suitable building ground. See
Section 5.9 for general grounding instructions.
Step 10 Connect the Ethernet and power cables to the access point.

Step 11 Align the access point feet over the keyhole mounting slots on the mounting bracket. If you
created a hole for the cables make sure the access point is positioned so that the cables reach
their respective ports.
Step 12 Gently slide the access point onto the mounting bracket until it clicks into place.
5.7. Mounting an Access Point on a Hard Ceiling or a Wall
This procedure describes the steps required to mount the access point on a ceiling constructed of 3/4-in
(19.05-mm) or thicker plywood using #8 fasteners using the universal mounting bracket (AIR-AP-
BRACKET-2).
Follow these steps to mount the access point on a solid ceiling or wall.
Step 1 Use the mounting bracket as a template to mark the locations of the mounting holes on the
bracket. Figure 16 shows details of the mounting bracket.
Caution Be sure to mark all four locations. To ensure a safe and secure installation, make sure you are
using adequate fasteners and mount the access point using no less than four fasteners.
Caution Do not use plastic wall anchors or the keyhole slots on the mounting bracket for ceiling
installations. When mounting the access point on a hard ceiling, use four fasteners capable of maintaining
a minimum pullout force of 20 lbs (9 kg).

1 Bracket locking post (used when attaching the bracket to a 4 Cable access
previously mounted bracket) cover
2 Access point mounting keyholes 5 Security hasp
3 Grounding post
Figure 16 - Universal Mounting Bracket Details
Step 2 Use a #29 drill (0.1360-in. [3.4772 mm]) bit to drill a pilot hole at the mounting hole locations you
marked.
Note The pilot hole size varies according to the material and thickness you are fastening. Cisco
recommends that you test the material to determine the ideal hole size for your mounting application.

Step 3 (Optional) Drill or cut a cable access hole near and below the location of the mounting bracket
cable access cover large enough for the Ethernet cable, building ground wire, and power cables.
Step 4 Pull approximately 9 inches of cable through the hole. Route the Ethernet and power cables
through the bracket before you attach the bracket to the ceiling or wall. Route the cables through
the main cable access hole and then through the smaller access hole as shown in Figure 17.
Figure 17 - Routing the Ethernet and Power Cables
Step 5 (Optional) Use the ground screw to attach the building ground wire to the mounting bracket. See
Step 6 Position the mounting bracket mounting holes (with indents down) over the pilot holes.
Step 7 Insert a fastener into each mounting hole and tighten.
Step 9 Align the access point feet with the large part of the keyhole mounting slots on the mounting plate.
When positioned correctly, the cable access cover will fit inside the access point connector bay.
Step 10 Gently slide the access point onto the mounting bracket keyhole slots until it clicks into place.
5.8. Mounting an Access Point to a Network or Electrical Box
Follow these steps to mount an access point to a network box or an electrical box.
Step 1 Position the universal mounting bracket (AIR-AP-BRACKET-2) over the existing network or
electrical box and align the bracket mounting holes with the box holes.
Step 2 Hold the mounting bracket in place and insert a 6 x 32 x 1/4-in pan head screw into each of the
mounting holes and tighten.
Step 3 Pull approximately 9 inches of Ethernet and power cable through the hole. Route the cables
through the bracket before you attach the bracket to the ceiling. Route the cables through the main
cable access hole and then through the smaller access hole as shown in Figure 17.

Step 4 (Optional) Use the ground screw to attach the building ground wire to the mounting bracket. See
Step 6 Align the access point feet over the keyhole mounting slots on the optional mounting bracket.
Step 7 Slide the access point onto the optional mounting bracket until it clicks into place.
5.9. Grounding an Access Point
Grounding is not always required for indoor installations because Cisco Aironet access points are classified
as low-voltage devices and do not contain internal power supplies. However, Cisco recommends that you
check your local and national electrical codes to see if grounding is a requirement. If grounding is required
in your area or you wish to ground your access point, follow these steps.
Step 1 Find a suitable building grounding point as close to the access point as possible.
Step 2 Connect a user-supplied ground wire to the building grounding point. The wire should be a
minimum of #14AWG assuming a circuit length of 25 ft (30.5 cm). Consult your local electrical
codes for additional information.
Step 3 Route the ground wire to the access point.
Step 4 Attach the wire to a suitable grounding O-ring lug.
Step 5 Crimp or solder the wire to the lug.
Step 6 Insert the grounding post screw into the O-ring lug and install it on the mounting bracket as shown
in Figure 18.
Step 7 Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the ground screw.
Figure 18 - Installing the O-Ring Lug to the Grounding Post

APPENDIX I

WTS Cable Design and Engineering –

Patching Standard
Version 6.0.2
July 1, 2018
WTS Cable Design and Engineering – Patching
Standard

Table of Contents
1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ............................................................................................... 3
1.1 PURPOSE AND AUDIENCE ................................................................................................. 3
1.2 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 PRINCIPLES AND METHODOLOGIES ..................................................................................... 3
1.4 COMPLIANCE, REQUIREMENTS, AND DATES ......................................................................... 3
2 STANDARD OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 4
2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION .................................................................................................. 4
2.2 HISTORY ....................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 CURRENT STATE ............................................................................................................. 4
2.4 FUTURE STATE ............................................................................................................... 4
2.5 REGIONAL VARIATIONS .................................................................................................... 4
2.6 ARCHITECTURE GUIDELINES .............................................................................................. 4
2.7 ASSUMPTIONS ............................................................................................................... 4
2.8 RISKS/ISSUES ................................................................................................................. 4
3 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................... 5
4 PATCHING STANDARD SUMMARY ............................................................................. 6
5 COPPER PATCHING STANDARD .................................................................................. 7
5.1 PLANNING ..................................................................................................................... 7
5.2 PREPARATION ................................................................................................................ 8
5.3 PATCHING ..................................................................................................................... 8
5.4 VALIDATION .................................................................................................................. 9
6 FIBER PATCHING STANDARD .................................................................................... 10
6.1 PLANNING ................................................................................................................... 10
6.2 PATCHING ................................................................................................................... 11
6.3 VALIDATION ................................................................................................................ 12
7 APPENDIX A – OPTICAL FIBER CLEANING STANDARD ............................................... 14
8 APPENDIX B – FIBER CLEANING PRODUCTS .............................................................. 16
9 APPENDIX C – PATCHING DIAGRAM ......................................................................... 17
1 Revision Date: July 1, 2018 Version: 6.0.2

WTS Cable Design and Engineering – Patching
Standard

Tables
Table 1 ‐ Fiber Optic Patch Cord Color Coding ................................................................. 10
Table 2 ‐ Fiber Cleaning Products ‐ Corning ...................................................................... 16
Table 3 ‐ Fiber Cleaning Products ‐ CommScope .............................................................. 16

STD: Patching Standard

1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
This Standard was created to promote an appropriate level of diligence during
fiber and copper patching, including planning and validation.
1.1 Purpose and Audience

Support personnel who perform patching-related changes in JPMC technology
spaces are the focus of this Standard.
1.2 Scope
This Standard is broken into the following categories:
 Summary – Key points associated with fiber and copper patching, in a 1-
page “cheat sheet” form.
 Copper patching Standard – Description of planning, preparation,
patching, and validation associated with copper patching.
 Fiber patching Standard – Description of planning, patching, and
validation associated with fiber patching.
 Optical fiber cleaning Standard – Created by consensus with Infrastructure
and Design Engineering team and structured cabling manufacturers.
 Fiber cleaning products – Specified by JPMC structured cabling
manufacturers.
This Standard is applicable regardless of the presence or absence of intelligent
patching (e.g. iPatch). Accordingly, it is silent on the subject.
1.3 Principles and Methodologies

Key to effective and successful implementation of initiatives in JPMC technology
space is the simple task of patching. It is not uncommon for technology support
personnel to learn through trial and error, with no available method for avoiding a
lessons-learned exercise. When this standard is followed and enforced, patching
will be successfully implemented, and the trial-and-error cycle can be avoided.
1.4 Compliance, Requirements, and Dates

By mandating proper patching practices, the frequency of failed changes will be
reduced. This standard is the product of guidance found in ANSI/TIA 568-C.0,
and the accumulated experience of WTS Cable Design and Engineering and
those manufacturers who support JPMC with structured cabling connectivity
products.


2 STANDARD OVERVIEW
2.1 General Information
The WTS team created this document as a product of several lessons learned. If
guidance in this document is followed, cost and risk will be reduced.
2.2 History
In a 2009 post mortem of a failed data center SAN deployment, it was
determined that there had been a significant volume of connectivity failures that
could have been avoided if support personnel had been familiar with proper
patching practice. This document was created to address that shortfall.
2.3 Current State

To date, this document has been circulated as a best practice. Because of the
historically informative nature of the document, adoption of the outlined practices
has been inconsistent, and benefits have been constrained.
2.4 Future State

By mandating proper patching practices, technology changes will be less
disruptive and the frequency of failed changes will be reduced.
2.5 Regional Variations

No regional variations apply.
2.6 Architecture Guidelines

Patching is a necessary part of most if not all new technology implementations.
Cabling topologies supported through the use of patching are defined in
ANSI/TIA-568-C.0.
2.7 Assumptions
Fiber optic patching can only be effective if appropriate cleaning materials are at
hand. The fiber cleaning products list found in Appendix C is a sampling of
suitable products that are available in the marketplace, and a supply of cleaning
products must always be readily available.
This Standard is most effective when it is uniformly adopted in technology spaces
including, but not limited to Main Equipment Rooms (MERs),
Telecommunications Rooms (TRs), and Co-Locations (Co-Los).
2.8 Risks/Issues
Failure to follow guidance in this Best Practice will increase risk.


3 INTRODUCTION
When direction in this document is
consistently followed, overall risk
to JPMC technology spaces is
reduced.

All personnel working in JPMC
technology spaces are expected to
consistently follow processes and
procedures defined in this
Standard.


4 PATCHING STANDARD SUMMARY
All Patch Cords

Use the correct patch cord length. Longer than necessary patch cords will always
meet your needs, but they can quickly lead to patch cord congestion. Patch cord length
must not be excessive, and requires planning for no more than 0.305 m (1 ft) of slack on either
end.
If you bundle patch cords, be careful. Bundling patch cords can make isolation of
troubles more difficult. Do not over tighten the bundle, since a tight bundle can affect the
ability of the patch cord to carry data at the speeds for which it is designed.
Inspect the patch cord. If the cable jacket is damaged, if the cord is kinked, or if the
plugs at either end of the patch cord are damaged in any way, discard it. Installing a
damaged patch could have a significant impact on customer service.
When you re-use a patch cord, remove it first. When you leave the patch cord in
place and simply change ports, you are probably contributing to a tangled and disorderly
environment. Always fully remove the patch cord before you begin your new connection.
Update documentation. If you maintain cable records for your facility, update the
documentation after each patching session so that the records can be relied upon when
you need them.
Copper Patch Cords
Match the patch cord with the environment. To ensure optimum performance and
warranty coverage, the manufacturer of the patch panel and the manufacturer of the
patch cord should always be the same. Use only patch cords matching like
infrastructure types.
Fiber Patch Cords
Match the patch cord with the environment. To ensure optimum performance and
Warranty coverage, the manufacturer of the patch panel and the manufacturer of the
patch cord should always be the same. Depending on the age and nature of the fiber
infrastructure, there are several different types of fiber that is found in JPMC facilities. If
you install an improperly matched fiber patch cord, the application will either work poorly
or fail completely. Cable jacket color provides an indication of compatibility (see Table 1
on page 10). When in doubt, refer to this standard or ask any member of the WTS
Cable Design and Engineering team for clarification.
Clean the patch cord. Clean connectors and adapters every time before making a
connection. If you are using a new patch cord in manufacturer packaging, do not
assume that the patch cord is clean – clean each end before making the connection. If
you disconnect the patch cord for a moment to adjust routing, clean before re-
connecting. Cleaning the patch cord must be the last step you take immediately before
making your connection. See Appendix F for detailed fiber cleaning procedures.


5 COPPER PATCHING STANDARD
5.1 Planning
Search the Records
Once a request for connectivity is received, search the records to identify the circuit path.
Diagrams provided by the system designer will help you understand cable types, sizes, location,
routing, and layout. Any changes or additions made since your cabling infrastructure was installed
must also be documented.
Check Design Guidelines and Match Cords
Make sure you know the specifications and design of your cabling infrastructure, since the use of
lower performing patch cords will have the effect of limiting system performance. Maximum end-
to-end channel performance is only possible when the cord is matched to the cabling. When
making an Ethernet connection, remember that the cable distance limitation of 90 meters (290 ft)
is reduced as the quantity of cross-connects is increased. To ensure optimum performance and
warranty coverage, the manufacturer of the patch panel and the manufacturer of the patch cord
should always be the same.
Routing, Patch Cord Lengths and Density
Efficient Routing
To establish the correct cord length, first find the best route between the ports to be connected.
This is usually the shortest route through horizontal and vertical cable guides, that does not
obstruct or interfere with other cords and connectors in the panel. See Appendix C (in this
document) for a patching diagram.
Avoid routing cords through cable pathways that are already congested.
Examples of cable pathways include:
 horizontal patch cord management channels
 vertical cable management channels
 cable trays and basket trays
Vertical and Horizontal Sizing
Having established the best route for the cord, find the minimum required length by adding the
horizontal and vertical distances.
Minimizing Slack
Use correctly sized patch cords every time. Patch cord length must not be excessive, and
requires planning for no more than 0.305 m (1 ft) of slack on either end. When selecting a cord,
avoid excessive slack and provide a neat appearance. Tight cords will pull on connectors, and too
much slack contributes to congestion in the cable pathway. While the congestion associated with
one too-long patch cord is not significant, it can quickly become unmanageable when many patch
cords are in place.
Efficient Management
Where applicable, patch into the front of the patch panel so that cables do not cross an imaginary
vertical line that bisects the panel. This serves to prevent overloading one side of the panel.
Always take care to avoid routing patch cords in a fashion that may block maintenance access to
technology equipment and components. See Appendix C (in this document) for the patching
diagram.
Maintaining Old with New
Take care not to mix cords of different cabling categories. Patch cords may be mechanically
compatible across old and new cabling but, in any circuit, the component with the lowest
specifications will determine end-to-end performance. For instance, when a Category 5e cord is


used to connect Category 6 cabling, the channel will only deliver Category 5e performance in
accordance with TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC standards.
5.2 Preparation
To minimize disconnect time, do as much preparation as possible before performing patching
activities.
Study Administrative Records
Locate the ports that must be connected or reconnected. Ensure you have all the information you
need.
Inspect Cords
It is essential to ensure cords are of the right type and quality, and that they are clean and in good
condition, especially when re-using patch cords.
Patch Cords shall be inspected for physical damage including:
 stress marks from bending on the sheath
 pullout of conductors from the plug
 pin contamination on the plug end
 bent or missing pins on the plug end
 damaged or missing retention clip (the retention clip is the plastic clip that locks the patch
cord in the jack)
5.3 Patching
Use best practices at each stage:
Cord Handling
Kinks, snags, pinches and poor contacts can dramatically reduce the performance of a patch
cord. The following factors are important in avoiding these problems.
Bend Radius
The minimum bend radius specified by standards is four times the cable diameter under no-
load for Category 5e and Category 6 cable. Anything less may change the relative position of
conductors to the point where transmission performance is affected.
Cord Pulling and Stress
Be careful not to use excessive force during the patching process. This can stress cords and
connectors, reducing their performance. If you need to use force when placing a cord,
something is wrong. Find the problem and fix it before proceeding.
Bundling
Bundling and tying cords gives the panel a neat appearance, but tight bundling increases the
risk of crosstalk and can slow the process of tracing a patch cord. If you decide to bundle,
take care not to tighten bundles to the point where individual cords cannot rotate freely at the
bundling point. Use only products manufactured for this purpose, with preference to use of
Velcro® and equivalent re-usable cable ties. Do not use plastic cable ties because they can
easily be over-tightened… an over-tightened plastic cable tie can damage the cable and
affect the performance of the connection.
Where PoE is deployed utilize a maximum of 25 cables to a bundle.
Routing Cords through Cable Pathways
If the existing cord is the right length, it may be possible to re-use it. If this is the case,
remove the cord completely and re-run it through the cable pathways. This is the only way to
ensure there are no tangles, kinks or strains in the cord.


Unused Cords
Any unused cords must always be promptly and carefully removed from patch panels.
Removing and Adding Cords
Removing a patch cord
1. locate the existing circuit on both fields of the connection
2. trace the patch cord along its entire route to ensure you are removing the right cord
3. unplug the patch cord at one end
4. gently lift the cord straight up, taking up slack until its movement is detected
5. follow the cord routing, gently removing it from the cable pathways along its length
6. find the other end and unplug it
7. fully remove the cord
8. In the event a patch cord must be cut to facilitate removal, it must be unplugged from the
switch port prior to cutting.
Adding a patch cord
1. identify the location of the new circuit
2. plug in one end of the patch cord to the outlet or patch panel port
3. route the patch cord through cable pathways to the switch or patch panel port
4. plug in the other end of the patch cord
In cases where a patch cord can be re-used because the length and grade is correct, one end of
the cord may remain plugged into the same port. Although it may not be necessary to unplug that
end, it is important to remove the cord along its length from the cable pathways, to minimize the
chance of snags and/or tangles that will make future administration difficult.
5.4 Validation
Inspect the Connection
Patching must be right the first time since mistakes can cause costly disruption and re-work. The
time taken to make a final visual check of connections is a good investment. When patch panels
are located in cabinets, ensure they are securely latched, making sure that cord slack is not
snagged or pinched by the door.
Update Documentation
The final step is to update the documentation to the reflect changes and close the work order
associated with the completed change request.


6 FIBER PATCHING STANDARD
Fiber Safety Precautions and Responsibilities
The lasers that carry information through fiber cables can cause irreparable damage
to the retina. Never look directly into an energized optical fiber, and never attach a
microscope or other magnifying device to an energized optical fiber. Always wear
appropriate eye protection and ensure that unused ports are covered.
6.1 Planning
Search the Records
Once a request for connectivity is received, search the records to identify the circuit path.
Diagrams provided by the system designer will help you understand cable types, sizes, location,
routing, and layout. Any changes or additions made since your cabling infrastructure was installed
must also be documented.
Check Design Guidelines and Match Cords
Make sure you know the specifications and design of your fiber cabling. Ensure you use patch
cords that are matched to the installed cabling – optical fiber cords of different types must never
be mixed. See Table 1 for guidance in matching the patch cord to the structured cabling. To
ensure optimum performance and warranty coverage, the manufacturer of the patch panel and
the manufacturer of the patch cord should always be the same.
Table 1 ‐ Fiber Optic Patch Cord Color Coding
Fiber Core Cable Jacket Connector Strain Relief and/or
Type
Diameter Color Adapter Housing Color
OM1 Multimode 62.5 µm Orange/Gray Beige
OM2 Multimode – non‐laser
50 µm Orange Black
optimized
OM3 Multimode – laser optimized 50 µm Aqua Aqua
OM4 Multimode – laser optimized 50 µm Aqua Aqua
OS1 & OS2 Single‐mode 9 µm Yellow Blue
Efficient Routing
To establish the correct cord length, first find the best route between the ports to be connected.
This is usually the shortest route through horizontal and vertical cable guides that does not
obstruct or interfere with other cords and connectors in the panel. See Appendix C (in this
document) for a patching diagram.
Avoid routing cords through cable pathways that are already congested.
Examples of cable pathways include:
 horizontal patch cord management channels
 vertical cable management channels
 cable trays and basket trays
Vertical and Horizontal Sizing
Having established the best route for the cord, find the minimum required length by adding the
horizontal and vertical distances.
Minimizing Slack
Use correctly sized patch cords every time. Patch cord length must not be excessive, and
requires planning for no more than 0.305 m (1 ft) of slack on either end. When selecting a cord,
avoid excessive slack and provide a neat appearance. Tight cords will pull on connectors, and too


much slack contributes to congestion in the cable pathway. While the congestion associated with
one too-long patch cord is not significant, it can quickly become unmanageable when many patch
cords are installed.
Clean the Connection Every Time
When you are ready to connect the patch cord, remove dust covers and clean the connector and
adapter (see Appendix A & B [in this document] for detailed cleaning procedure). If you must
unplug the connection – even for a moment – clean the connector and adapter again before re-
seating. By developing this good habit, you will be eliminating the primary cause of most cable-
related failures.
Efficient Management
Where applicable, patch into the front of the patch panel so that cables do not cross an imaginary
vertical line that bisects the panel. This serves to prevent overloading one side of the panel.
Always take care to avoid routing patch cords in a fashion that may block maintenance access to
technology equipment and components.
Maintaining Old with New
Take care not to mix cords of different core diameters, multimode grades or color. To ensure
proper use, Industry standards specify unique color coding for various portions of the fiber
cabling. See Table 1 on page 10 for fiber color designations.
Core Diameter
Fiber patch cords must have the same core diameter and grade as the patch panel. For example,
a large attenuation penalty will occur when connecting a 62.5μm patch cord with structured
cabling that uses 50μm fiber. The application will probably fail if a multimode fiber patch cord is
connected to single-mode fiber structured cabling or vice versa. See Table 1 for detail.
Preparation
To minimize disconnect time, do as much preparation as possible before performing patching
activities.
Study Administrative Records
Locate the ports that must be connected or reconnected. Ensure you have clear information on
what you need to do.
Cord Inspection
It is essential that cords are of the right type and quality, and that they are clean and in good
condition, especially when re-using patch cords.
Fiber patch cords shall be inspected for physical damage including:
 stress marks from bending on the sheath
 pullout of fibers from the connector
 cracks or scratches on fiber end in connector using a fiber examination microscope
Cleanliness is vital in fiber optic connections, so special care is needed with:
 connector ends on patch cords — see Appendix A & B (in this document) for detailed
cleaning procedure
 connector ends on panels — see Appendix A & B (in this document) for detailed cleaning
procedure
 connector ends on network equipment — see Appendix A & B (in this document) for
detailed cleaning procedure
6.2 Patching
Use best practice at each stage:


Cord Handling
Kinks, snags, pinches and poor contact can dramatically reduce the performance of a fiber patch
cord. The following factors are important in avoiding these problems.
Bend Radius
The minimum bend radius for optical fiber patch cords varies with cord diameter. For cords
typically used at JP Morgan Chase, assume a minimum bend radius of 1 in (3 cm), the
minimum bend radius is ten times the cord diameter. Exceeding the bend radius can result in
significant performance impact.
Cord Pulling and Stress
Be careful not to use excessive force during the patching process. This can stress cords and
connectors, reducing their performance. If you need to use force in pulling a cord, something
is wrong. Find the problem and fix it before proceeding.
Bundling
Bundling and tying cords gives the panel a neat appearance, but tight bundling can contribute
to degradation of patch cord performance and can slow the process of tracing a patch cord. If
you decide to bundle, take care not to tighten bundles to the point where individual cords
cannot rotate freely at the bundling point. Use only products manufactured for this purpose,
with preference to use of Velcro® and equivalent re-usable cable ties. Do not use bread ties
or plastic cable ties because they can easily be over-tightened… an over-tightened cable tie
can break the fiber or affect the performance of the connection.
Routing Cords through Cable Pathways
If the existing cord is the right length, it may be possible to re-use it. If this is the case,
remove the cord completely and re-run it in through the cable pathways. This is the only sure
way to ensure there are no tangles, kinks or strains in the cord.
Unused Cords
Any unused cords must always be promptly and carefully removed from patch panels.
Removing and Adding Cords
Removing a patch cord
1. locate the existing circuit on both ends of the connection
2. trace the patch cord along its entire route to ensure you are removing the right cord
3. unplug the patch cord at one end
4. install dust covers on the end of the patch cord
5. gently lift the cord straight up, taking up slack until its movement is detected
6. follow the cord routing, gently removing it from the cable pathways along its length
7. find the other end and unplug it
8. install dust covers on the end of the patch cord
9. fully remove the cord
Adding a patch cord
1. identify the end points of the new circuit
2. remove the dust covers on one end of the patch cord and clean the connector and
adapter — see Appendix B (in this document) for detailed cleaning procedure.
3. plug one end of the patch cord into the fiber coupling
4. route the patch cord through cable pathways to the switch or patch panel port
5. remove the dust covers on the end of the patch cord and clean the connector and
adapter — see Appendix B (in this document) for detailed cleaning procedure.
6. plug the end of the patch cord into the fiber coupling
6.3 Validation
Final Visual Inspection and Panel Closure


Patching must be right the first time since mistakes can cause costly disruption and re-work. The
time taken to make a final visual check of connections is a good investment. When patch panels
are mounted in enclosures, ensure these are securely closed, making sure that cord slack is not
snagged or pinched by the doors.
Update Documentation
The final step is to update the documentation to the as-built configuration and close the work
order associated with the completed change request.



7 APPENDIX A – OPTICAL FIBER CLEANING STANDARD
Cleanliness of fiber optic connections is critical to the performance of optical communication networks. Contamination on
a connector end face, even if only at the microscopic level, can create severe problems. Single-mode fiber optic core
diameters are approximately 9 microns (0.00035 inches). By comparison, a human hair is 50 microns or larger in
diameter. Contamination that blocks the fiber core generates strong back reflections (Return Loss), and may effect
attenuation (Insertion Loss). Loose contamination on the connector end face that does not block the core may move
during de-mating, or may prevent physical glass-to-glass contact required for proper signal transmission. Rigid
contamination trapped between connector end faces may permanently damage the fiber core(s). Dry contaminants are
relatively simple to remove compared to oils and films which naturally occur with human contact, vapor condensation, and
solvent evaporation. If you clean only the connector and not the adapter, pre-existing contaminants on the adapter will be
transferred to the connector, spreading the problem instead of reducing it.
DO NOT ASSUME THAT THE FIBER PATCH CORD IS CLEAN. Though patch cords in factory packaging should be
clean, it is essential that each and every patch cord be cleaned before making every connection, every time. Making a
habit of cleaning fiber patch cords before connecting results in a reliable, successful outcome.
Cleaning ST Connector, Coupling and Attenuator

Clean connector ferrule with a lint-free wipe moistened with minimum 90% isopropyl alcohol and blow-dry with canned
air, holding the nozzle 75 mm (3 inches) from the ferrule. Clean end and sides of the ferrule.
Caution: Signal strength will be affected if the ferrule is not thoroughly cleaned.
Clean coupling by placing a cleaning stick (moistened with minimum 90% isopropyl alcohol) inside the coupling and
gently rotating. Blow-dry the coupling using canned air, holding the nozzle 75 mm (3 inches) from the coupling.
Caution: Do not try to clean the coupling with a cleaning stick if a connector is mounted in one side.
Clean attenuator by holding the canned air nozzle 75 mm (3 inches) from the attenuator end.
Caution: Do not use a cleaning stick to clean the attenuator.
Inspect: If you have problems after your patching is complete, first check the cleanliness of the patch cord by inspecting
the connector end faces with a fiber inspection microscope to verify that it is free of dirt, smudges and/or scratches.
NOTE: Though they are less effective than the method described above, tools that utilize non-reusable film instead of
alcohol can be of assistance when cleaning large quantities of fiber connectors. If this type of tool is selected, it is crucial
that the user advance the film after each connector is cleaned. Failure to advance the film after each cleaning will result
in re-contamination of the fiber. See Appendix B (in this document) for a listing of fiber cleaning products.
Cleaning SC Connector, Coupling and Attenuator

air, holding the nozzle 75 mm (3 inches) from the ferrule. Clean the end and sides of the ferrule.
Caution: Signal strength will be affected if the ferrule is not thoroughly cleaned.
Clean sides of ferrule
Clean tip of ferrule
Caution: Do not try to clean the coupling with cleaning stick if a connector is mounted in one side.
Clean attenuator by holding the canned air nozzle 75 mm (3 inches) from the attenuator end.


Cleaning LC Connector, Coupler and Attenuator
air. Hold the canned air nozzle 75 mm (3 inches) from the ferrule. Clean the end and sides of the ferrule.
Clean tip of ferrule
Warning: Do not try to clean the adapter with a standard cleaning stick because the LC’s sleeve inner diameter is too
small.
Clean attenuator by holding the canned air nozzle 75 mm (3 inches) from end of the attenuator. Blow air into each side of
the attenuator.
Cleaning the MPO Connector and MPO Adapter

Clean female or male MPO connector ferrule with a lint free wipe moistened with minimum 90% isopropyl alcohol and
blow dry with canned air, holding the nozzle 75 mm (3 inches) from the connector. Clean end and sides of ferrule.
Caution: Signal strength will be affected if ferrule is not thoroughly cleaned.
Warning: To prevent scratching the end face, always clean the MPO connectors with a cleaning motion from top to
bottom. Never clean the MPO connector by rubbing across it from side to side.
Clean adapter by wiping the inside surface with a stick cleaner (moistened with minimum 90% isopropyl alcohol). Blow
dry adapter using canned air, holding the nozzle 75 mm (3 inches) from the adapter.
If access to the adapter is only available from one side, use canned air to blow the inside of the adapter.
the connector end face with a fiber inspection microscope to verify that it is free of dirt, smudges and/or scratches.


8 APPENDIX B – FIBER CLEANING PRODUCTS
JP Morgan Chase identifies fiber structured cabling products manufactured by Corning and CommScope, who sell the
fiber cleaning products listed below. Fiber cleaning products from other manufacturers may be as effective and less
costly, only products listed below are supported by the manufacturer of the fiber should be used. These products are
available through many distribution channels.
Table 2 ‐ Fiber Cleaning Products ‐ Corning
Part Number Description Notes
Can be used with either standard or shuttered LC
CLEANER-PORT-LC LC Port Cleaning tool
adapters
2104466-01 MTP Port Cleaning Tool For MTP connection only
200FM 200x Microscope Includes adapter for 2.5 µm ferrules
FMFA-U12 Adapter for 200FM allows visual inspection of 1.25 µm ferrules
FMFA-MTP Adapter for 200FM allows visual inspection of MTP Connectors
TKT-CLEAN-SFC Cleaning Kit for Single Fiber Connectors Cleaning Kit only, no scope or adapters
TKT-CLEAN-MFC Cleaning Kit for Multi Fiber Connectors Cleaning Kit only, no scope or adapters
CLEANER-CONN-REEL Single Fiber Connector Cleaning Reel Single fiber connectors only
CLEANER-UNIV-CASS Universal Connector Cleaning Cassette Single or Multi fiber connectors
FCC-WIPES Fiber Cleaning Wipes 90 per tub
CLEAN-STICKS-125 LC Cleaning sticks--1.25mm ferrule 10 per pak
CLEAN-STICKS-250 ST, SC, FC Cleaning sticks--2.5 mm ferrule 10 per pak
Table 3 ‐ Fiber Cleaning Products ‐ CommScope
Part
Description Notes
Number
760053199 Fiber Optic Contents:
Connector - Westover probe microscope and display
Clean/Inspect Kit - NTT-ATT cleaning cassette for cleaning ST, SC, LC and MPO(f) connectors in hand
- Noyes 1.25 mm and 2.5 mm swabs for cleaning ST, SC, LC connectors through the bulkheads
- US Conec IBC cleaner for cleaning MPO(m) and MPO(f) connectors both in hand and through
the bulkhead
- MicroCare Fiber Optic Cleaning Solution
- SYSTIMAX cleaning instructions
760053207 Fiber Optic Contents:
Connector - NTT-AT Optipop reel cleaner refill
Cleaning and - MPO-MTP internal bulkhead cleaner
Consumables Kit - 1.25 mm swabs (green label)
- 2.5 mm swabs (blue label)
- Fiber optic cleaning solution
- Instruction Sheet



9 APPENDIX C – PATCHING DIAGRAM


APPENDIX J – Main Equipment Room (MER), Technology
Room (TR) and Technology Lab Security Design Standard
Standard
Main Equipment Room (MER),
Technology Room (TR) and Technology
Lab Security Design Standard
Current Effective Date: July 13, 2016
CHIEF ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICE – GLOBAL SECURITY & INVESTIGATIONS, TECHNICAL SECURITY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Summary ....................................................................................................................................... 2
2. Changes from Previous Version ...................................................................................................... 2
3. Scope ................................................................................................................................................ 2
3.1. Scope/Exceptions ................................................................................................................... 2
4. Roles and Responsibilities ............................................................................................................... 2
5. Technology Standards ..................................................................................................................... 2
6. People Standards Overview .......................................................................................................... 3
7. MER Design Standard...................................................................................................................... 3
8. TR Design Standard ......................................................................................................................... 4
9. Technology Lab Room Design Standard ....................................................................................... 4
10. Defined Terms ......................................................................................................................... 5
11. Firm References ............................................................................................................................... 5
12. Document Information ...................................................................................................................... 5

1. Summary
JPMorgan Chase & Co.’s (JPMC, or the Firm) Global Security & Investigations (GSI) Technical
Security department establishes these global technical security design standards for all JPMC Main
Equipment Rooms (MER) and Technology Rooms (TR). These standards focus on technical
security design areas for housing JPMC computer systems, servers and/or voice/data network
facilities or exposure and breach to the Firm’s network.
2. Changes from Previous Version

Revised per the annual review of the Standard by GSI, GTI, and DCS staff
3. Scope
Lines of Business Chief Administrative Office
Sub-Lines of Business Global Security & Investigations

WTS
GRE
GTI
IT Risk
Function(s) Technical Security
Locations All
Legal Entities All
3.1. Scope/Exceptions
Local regulations or data protection legislation may dictate deviations to this Standard, which must
be incorporated into the design. Any exceptions will be clearly defined and documented within the
JPMC Controls Framework.
4. Roles and Responsibilities

Standards Owner: The Standards Owner is responsible for the development and content of the
Standards herein, as well as for conducting an annual review of the Standards and obtaining all
necessary approvals.
5. Technology Standards
GSI integrates various technologies and people with processes to form the depth and layered
approach to security, which monitors, records and deters potential malicious activity. The
technology that is used will vary depending on the space protected, variations include:

a. Access Control:
JPMC Regional Access Control Systems provide employees and contingent workers the
ability to access JPMC premises across the globe. Controlling and managing this access
ensures a safe and secure work environment and guards against potential risks to the
company's people, facilities, information and assets. An Information Custodian or
designee must authorize access. A record of the authorization must be maintained for at
least thirty-six (36) months,
b. CCTV:
The JPMC CCTV systems are in place to assist security personnel in detecting safety
and/or security violations, investigate and verify alarms.
c. Intrusion Devices:
Door contacts are used to monitor all emergency exits, roof hatches and appropriate
access panels.
d. Biometric Readers:
These readers must be used in card plus fingerprint mode. This creates a dual
authentication using the hardware.
e. Electronic Key Management:

System used to manage key access to buildings, facilities, secure areas, equipment,
machinery, lockers and cabinets.
f. Physical Assets (People):

GS&I contract or proprietary personnel housed within the facility to manage security
operations. .
6. People Standards Overview

All personnel (people) who work or visit the sites will be one of the following:
a. JPMC Full Time Employees (FTEs)
b. Contingent Workers (Non-employee who has completed CWOC Process)
c. Visitors (includes deliveries). (Requires full time escort by JPMC FTE or Contingent
Worker
d. Emergency Services
7. MER Design Standard

The following must be in place to secure and monitor a MER Room:
a. Single point of entry into the room with a PIN and card reader on the ingress and card
reader only on the egress side of the door.
b. Card Reader entry door lock should be fail secure in case of power outage or fire alarm
system activation unless dictated by local code.
c. Cameras covering the entrance door and any other secondary exits from inside and
outside.
d. Any secondary doors that lead into the room must be treated as emergency exits and
must have a door contact (remotely monitored) and local alarm sounder.
e. All doors leading into the MER should be monitored for immediate forced open and door
held open (60 Second) alarms.
f. The MER and TR demising walls must be slab-to-slab construction.

8. TR Design Standard
The following must be in place to secure and monitor a TR Room:
a. Single point of entry into the room with a PIN and card reader on the ingress and card
reader only on the egress side of the door.
b. Card Reader entry door lock should be fail secure in case of power outage or fire alarm
system activation unless dictated by local code.
c. Cameras covering the entrance door and any other secondary exits from inside and
outside.
d. Any secondary doors that lead into the room must be treated as emergency exits and
must have a door contact (remotely monitored) and local alarm sounder.
e. All doors leading into the TR should be monitored for immediate forced open and door
held open (60 Second) alarms.
9. Technology Lab Room Design Standard

Technology Lab Rooms; the following must be in place to secure and monitor a Technology Lab
Room
a. Each entry into the room shall have a standard card reader on the ingress side of the
door
b. Card Reader entry door lock shall have a fail secure electric strike or lockset, for normal
card access ingress, to maintain a secure environment in case of power outage or fire
alarm system activation. This design permits free egress at all times
c. Perimeter walls of a Technology Lab Room, are not required to be slab to slab
d. Cameras covering the entrance door and any other secondary exits from inside and
outside
e. Any non-card access doors that lead into the room must be treated as emergency exits
and must have a door contact (remotely monitored) and local alarm sounder
f. All card reader doors leading into the Technology Lab Room shall be monitored for
immediate forced open and door held open (60 Second) alarms
g. Exterior windows should be avoided where possible, but if they exist they must be either
shatter resistant or fitted with protective film
4 © 2016 JPMorgan Chase & Co. All Rights Reserved. Confidential And Proprietary For
Internal Use Only
10. Defined Terms
Main Equipment Room consists of technology assets containing servers with applications
MER
being run on them within JPMC controlled space. The facility in which this room resides may
be leased or owned. These rooms differ from a Technology Room (TR) since they have
outside communication circuits terminated within the space and do not contain servers with
applications being run on them.
A Technology Room consists of technology assets in a single room within JPMC controlled
TR
space. The facility in which this room resides may be leased or owned. These rooms are used
to distribute communications to the workstations or offices within a JPMC controlled
environment. TRs contain horizontal distribution switches only; they do not contain outside
communication circuit termination, nor servers with applications run on them.
GSI Abbreviation for Global Security & Investigations

11. Firm References
Other Standards  Data Center Technical Design Standards
12. Document Information
Standards Owner / Primary Michael Forlenza, Jon Denial, GSI, Russell Ang, Ernest D’Souza,
Contact / Secondary GSI, EMEA Director, GSI, Standard
Contact/Standards Manager NAMR/LATAM APAC Manager
Procedure Owner’s Function or Global Security & Investigations , Global Security, NAMR/LATAM
Line of Business/Region/Country
Procedure Approver Steve Wisotzki, Managing Director, NAMR/LATAM

Tim McNulty, Managing Director APAC/EMEA
Original Effective Date March 1, 2015
Last Review Date July 13, 2016
5 © 2016 JPMorgan Chase & Co. All Rights Reserved. Confidential And Proprietary For
Internal Use Only
Appendix K

Exception Approval - GTI-EUS Global Standard for Critical Technology

Space Builds
Step 1: Open http://request.jpmchase.net/Home.aspx cut and paste: Exception Approval - GTI-WTS Global

Standard for Critical Technology Space Builds into search for services. Search
Step 2: Click on Exception Approval - GTI-EUS Global Standard for Critical Technology Space Builds
Step 3: Check Action details, Request the Product Details.

Appendix K

Step 4: *
1. Enter all information with . (IF MULTIPLE EXCEPTIONS ARE REQUIRED FOR ONE PROJECT EACH EXCEPTION MUST BE
SUBMITTED SEPERATELY).
2. Statement from Standard Where Exception is required: This can be found within the WTS handbook at the following link:
https://confluence.uk.jpmorgan.com/confluence/display/RSO/1.+Introduction
3. Supporting documentation can be added and attached at the bottom.
4. Click Save Details.
Step 4: Check Out:

IFC V5 Technology PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IFC V5 Technology PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LEGACY WEST JPMORGAN CHASE - PHASE 2

First Column: Current Date for Section

NOTES FOR REVISIONS IN TECHNICAL SECTIONS

2019-06-28 Issue For Construction

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

2019-06-28 00 3100 Available Project Information HKS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2019-06-28 01 0500 Design Selections HKS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

2019-06-28 02 4119 Selective Demolition HKS

2019-06-28 03 1113 Structural Concrete Forming LAFP

2019-06-28 04 0513 Masonry Mortaring KH

2019-06-28 05 1200 Structural Steel LAFP

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

2019-06-28 06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry HKS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

2019-06-28 07 1326 Sheet Waterproofing HKS

2019-06-28 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames HKS

2019-06-28 09 2900 Gypsum Board Assemblies HKS

2019-06-28 10 1100 Visual Display Boards HKS

2019-06-28 11 1200 Parking Control Equipment HKS

2019-06-28 12 2413 Roller Window Shades HKS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

2019-06-28 13 3423 Fabricated Control Booths HKS

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

2019-06-28 14 2100 Electric Traction Elevators PH

DIVISION 20 – GENERAL MEP/FP REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

2019-06-28 22 0548 Vibration Controls For Plumbing Piping And SHG

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING

2019-06-28 23 3416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans SHG

DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

2019-06-28 26 2313 Paralleling Medium-Voltage Switchgear SHG

2019-06-28 27 0000 Communications SHG

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

2019-06-28 28 1000 Security Systems (Garage G) SHG

2019-06-28 31 1300 Selective Tree and Shrub Removal and Trimming KH

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

2019-06-28 32 0190 Operation and Maintenance of Planting KH

2019-06-28 33 4601 Subdrainage for Landscape KH

2018-07-01 WTS Critical Technology Space and Infrastructure SHG

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.2 CRITICAL TECHNOLOGY SPACE DEFINITIONS

A. MAIN EQUIPMENT ROOM (MER):

• Information outlet faceplates

B. TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM (TR):

C. CO-LOCATION SPACE (CO-LOCATION FACILITY):

C. Code refers to requirements that are legally binding.

G. “ICT” stands for “Information and Communication Technology”.

1.4 CODES, REGULATIONS, STANDARDS, AND PRACTICES

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – see attachments

A. ROOM SIZE AND QUANTITY

3. Additionally, for TR:

2. VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (VCT)

3. ACCESS FLOORING (RAISED TILE)

b) Must comply with design requirements for depth of floor.

h) There must be underfloor smoke detection, if required by code.

4. SERVICES BELOW ACCESS FLOORING

5. ACCESS FLOOR (RAISED TILE) LOADING

2. For Co-location: Coordinate with the Co-location facility provider

J. COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS IN ROOM

K. STORAGE AND STAGING AREA

4. A storage and staging room: